The University of Sydney
Faculty of Economics Handbook 1995
Editors Greg Patmore Mary Pollard Faculty of Economics Handbook 1995 © The University of Sydney 1994 ISSN 1034-2621
The University of Sydney N.S.W.2006 Telephone (02) 3512222 Facsimile (02) 552 3105 (Faculty of Economics)
University of Sydney Helpline: tel. 1800 06 1995 (free call)
Set in 10 on 11.5 point Palatino by the Publications Unit, The University of Sydney and printed in Australia by Printing Headquarters, Sydney. Text printed on 80gsm bond, recycled from milk cartons. Message from the Dean iv
Introduction V
Merewether Building vi
1. Which degree? 1
2. Bachelor of Economics 6
3. Bachelor of Economics (Social Sciences) 17
4. Bachelor of Commerce 27
5. Postgraduate studies 39
6. The Faculty of Economics 41
7. Departments and courses of study 44 Accounting 44 Agricultural Economics 49 Anthropology 52 Computer Science 53 Econometrics 55 Economic History 59 Economics 64 Economics / La w 79 Education 80 Finance 82 Geography 85 Government and Public Adminis tra tion 88 Industrial Relations 96 Interdepartmental courses and programs 99 Marketing 100 School of Philosophy 101 Psychology 105 School of Studies in Religion 107 Social Work and Social Policy 107
8. Other faculty information 114 Enrolment 114 Discontinuation 114 Computer facilities 114 Lecture and seminar rooms 114 Examinations and further tests 115 Restriction upon re-enrolment 116 Prizes and scholarships 117 Societies 119 Libraries 120 Publications 121 Research units 121 Professional organisations 123
Appendix: explanation of symbols 125
Main campus map 127 Honours undergraduate degree programs. The Department has also established a strongpostgraduate and research program. Because the Department has established close links with the commercial marketing and advertising world, Sydney's marketing majors will find many opportunities upon graduation. The year 1994 also marked the beginning of an important new Human Resource Management program within the Department of Industrial Relations. Currently, the Faculty of Economics is planning the establishment of a fourth discipline, Management Science, which we hope will begin as a major in 1996. The Faculty of Economics has some of the best and most advanced computer teaching facilities in Australia. These include the new Bevan Bradbury Postgraduate Facilities which opened in 1994. The year 1995 will see a total re-equipment of the Large Undergraduate Teaching Computer Laboratory—an event which will keep the Facility at the cutting edge of world computer technology. Welcome to the Faculty of Economics! The year 1995 The introduction of new disciplines within the will witness an important event in the evolution of the Faculty has not been at the expense of the traditional Faculty. In 1993 the Faculty admitted its first students offerings in Economics, Accounting, Econometrics, to the new Bachelor of Commerce degree program. Economic History, Industrial Relations, and This year many of these students will complete their Government. In fact, the Faculty is working to increase studies and earn their Bachelor of Commerce degree its emphasis on Asian and European studies within at Pass level. the departments of Government, Economics, and The year 1994 saw the founding of two new Economic History. The Faculty is also working closely departments, Finance and Marketing. The progress in with the Faculty of Arts to ensure that resources in building these new disciplines has been both rapid that Faculty, especially in languages such as Japanese, and substantial. Under the direction of Professor Peter Korean, Chinese, German, French, and Italian, are Swan, the Finance Department has established its available to Economics and Commerce students. Never undergraduate Pass and Honours program and have students had a wider choice of programs. I urge appointed 10 staff members, all of whom are dedicated students to plan courses of study which are scholars and teachers. In addition, the Finance academically challenging as well as rewarding in the Department provides the home for a new research sense of providing a pathway into a productive career. division, the Securities Industry Research Centre of In the Faculty of Economics it is possible for students Asia-Pacific (SIRCA). This organisation, currently to combine career oriented disciplines such as Finance, housed in newly refurbished quarters in the Institute Marketing, Economics or Industrial Relations with Building, has been endowed with a sophisticated and such fields as Asian languages and Asian culture or powerful computer system for research purposes. European languages and European culture. These SIRCA will not only enhance the research productivity combinations will prove both academically of the Finance Department, but will provide funding challenging and provide students with immediate and resources that will create opportunities for research access to the growing global economy. in other departments in the Faculty and also for Fourth If students are uncertain or need advice, I urge Year Honours students and Postgraduate students. them to consult the Faculty Office or the Faculty The path-breaking research emanating from this teaching staff. organisation has put the Sydney University's Finance Department into the front rank of university finance departments in the world. Simultaneously, the Faculty's new Marketing Department, under the leadership of Professor Jordan Louviere, is making excellent progress. This year it will have a distinguished staff of 6. It will also move Stephen Salsbury into refurbished quarters on the lower ground floor of Dean the Institute Building. As in the case of Finance, Marketing has already developed strong Pass and The Faculty of Economics handbook is designed to provide a complete guide to the Faculty and its courses. Undergraduate students should turn immediately to chapters 1 to 4 written with their needs in mind. Prospective postgraduate scholars should find most necessary informationin chapter 5. All students should read the sections later in the handbook devoted to the Faculty of Economics itself and to each of the teaching departments within the Faculty. For further information about the University, see the separate publication University of Sydney Diary which is available free from the Student Centre or from the University of Sydney Union outlets. ONicnma HaHxaManaw Bachelor of Economics, Bachelor of central importance to the academic discipline of Economics (Social Sciences) or Bachelor of economics and to some of the specialised career Commerce? patterns for graduates in economics. Some of you may already have made a firm choice The BEc(SocSc) restricts access to some subjects about which of the Faculty's three degrees is for you; which have a strong professional focus (for example, others may still wonder what the differences are. In full sequences in accounting and commercial law), but Table A includes a wider range of subjects with a both cases you should read the next few pages carefully relevance to the study of society in general, not only to so as either to confirm you in your decision or to help economic aspects. These subjects include psychology, you make up your mind. social anthropology, philosophy and sociology, none In 1993 the Faculty introduced a new degree, the of which is available as a Table A subject in the other Bachelor of Commerce. With it came a new range of two degrees. subjects and courses such as marketing and human On the other hand, subjects available as majors in resource management, and an expanded range of Table A for the BEc but not the BEc(SocSc) include offerings in finance. These courses are also available accounting, econometrics, commercial law and in the BEc. computer science. The Table A subjects in the BCom As you will be aware from reading the Universities direct you to courses in those disciplines that are of Admissions Centre Handbook, there is a quota (STB) particular relevance to the management and conduct limiting the number of students permitted to study of business, such as finance and human resource Accounting IA and IB in each of the three degrees. management. Because these courses are compulsory at first year 4. Table B subjects: in each degree, you can take a level in the BCom, all students enrolling in that degree number of courses from any subject offered in the will come from the STB quota. It is also possible to Faculty of Arts or the Faculty of Science (known as enrol in one of the other two degrees from within this Table B subjects). In the BCom, you may take the quota although, in the case of the BEc(SocSc), you are equivalent of six semester courses from Table B, while restricted to only one year of study in accounting. in the other two degrees you are only allowed to take four, except with special permission from the Faculty. Degree structures The details of the structure of the three degrees are Student interest contained in the succeeding chapters. Each of the The three degrees represent an attempt to cater for degrees has a common core requirement of completing quite different demands by students. Part of the at least two majors, that is three years of study, in difference in demand reflects the ways students subjects central to those degrees. We call these Table perceive their career opportunities as flowing from A subjects, and for each degree there is a separate their studies. This is discussed below. Another reason Table A, as set out in chapters 2, 3, and 4. for different choices is the distinct individual talents In outline the main differences between the three and interests of students. For example, if you have degrees are as follows: been at ease with mathematics at school, you will find 1. The number of courses: the Bachelor of Economics that subjects like econometrics, finance and marketing (BEc) and the Bachelor of Commerce (BCom) require will present you with less difficulty than they would you to complete the equivalent of 22 full semester for students without that facility. This might be a courses over three years, while the Bachelor of reason for preferring either the BEc or the BCom to the Economics (Social Sciences) (BEc(SocSc)) contains the BEc(SocSc). On the other hand, if your interests lie in equivalent of 20 courses. the direction of developing a broad understanding of 2. The compulsory courses: in the BEc, the compulsory the social environment in which economic activity courses are Economics I, II and III (which comprises a takes place, or if you would like to minimise major in economics) and Econometrics I; in the mathematical approaches, then your choice might be BEc(SocSc) you must take two years of study in the BEc(SocSc). economics, either Economics I (Social Sciences) and Some students are aware from the beginning of Economics II(P), or Economics I and II; and in the some particular subject in which they want to BCom, the compulsory courses are Accounting IA specialise. In this case, there may be a program of and IB, Econometrics I and either Economics I or related courses that is available in one degree rather Economics I (Social Sciences). Most students in the than another. Chapters 2, 3 and 4 give examples of BCom will take Economics I, as this course is a such combinations. The Economics Faculty at Sydney prerequisite for a number of courses central to this is unusual in that it offers students a choice between degree. sequences of courses in regular and radical economics. 3. Thesubjects in Table A: many subjects appear in Table Students interested in the latter approach to the study A for each of the degrees, but there are some important of economic issues should normally do the BEc(SocSc) differences. The BEc encourages students to concen and take the sequence: Economics I(SocSc), Economics trate their studies in a range of subjects which are of II(P) and Economics III(P). For detailed information on these and other courses, B subjects. For example, in the BCom, you can study a read the course descriptions contained in the separate language for three years, and in the other degrees for sections for each department in chapter 7 of this two years plus, with permission from the Faculty, a handbook. There will be faculty advisers available to third. This is not an option to be entered into lightly, help you with your choices at enrolment time — however, unless you have a particular talent for although it will certainly help if you have read the languages and perhaps some prior knowledge, as relevant parts of this handbook carefully beforehand. language study can be intensive and very time- consuming. Career opportunities and subject choice With labour market considerations taken care of by The employment opportunities for economics and a core major such as economics or accounting, you can commerce graduates have always been particularly follow your own course of study based on your promising, even in hard times. The Faculty's degrees interests in particular subjects, or your curiosity about have been accorded a high degree of credibility in particular fields of knowledge and forms of enquiry. both the public and private sectors, the demand for It is often a mistake to focus all your energies on 'good' graduates has nearly always exceeded the subjects leading to a predetermined, narrow career supply, and the range of career options has always path, particularly if this is at the expense of studying been extensive. a subject that interests you more. You should beware, How far should your career plans determine your in the first place, of putting all your career eggs in the choice of subjects? There is no simple answer to this one basket: the labour market changes, and your own question. In general, you should not let your current aspirations may also change. In the second place, you views of a prospective career determine all your should notbe attracted solely by the apparent 'practical choices, especially in first year. Most of you will be relevance' of a particular subject, as others may be just taking subjects that are new and unfamiliar, and you as important in preparing you for entering various will want to test out your aptitude and interests before careers: for example, a knowledge of economic history, committing yourself to a specialisation. First year lays including the cycles of boom and bust in the Australian the foundation, but try to leave some options open. and world economies, and the rise and fall of the For some of you, a major reason for enrolling in the economic health of nations, is invaluable in the world Faculty is to embark on a career in accounting. You of business and government decision-making; and an can study accounting and take the full program as understanding of the political and governmental advised by the Department of Accounting in either frameworks within which national and international the BEc or the BCom. A BEc with a major in accounting business functions is also vital. signals to employers that you have also specialised in Moreover, employers don't only look at the label on economics. A thorough grounding in the discipline of your degree and the subjects you have studied, but economics is widely recognised as providing a rigorous also at the results you have obtained. You maximise training in analytical and problem solving skills, with your chance of getting good results if you take subjects application in all spheres of employment. that genuinely interest you. Just as importantly, you Whether or not you have in mind to qualify as an will also enjoy your time at University much more. accountant, the BCom offers you opportunities to One way in which you can broaden the scope and enter the labour market with specialised knowledge content of your degree is to take advantage of the and skills in varied fields that are of relevance to opportunities in the Faculty of Economics for pursuing management and business affairs. In this degree, your a program in Asian studies. Each of the Faculty's three choice of first year subjects is limited because of the degrees has plenty of scope within them for you to three compulsory courses, but in later years your combine such a program with your two majors and choice is wider than in the BEc because it is not the compulsory courses. In the Departments of compulsory to major in economics. Government and Economic History, a wide range of Because of the wide range of subjects and courses courses is offered on economic and political aspects of available in the three degrees, you can position yourself Asia, especially East Asia. Courses are available, for for many different career paths. The example of the instance, on Japanese politics and economic accountancy profession has already been mentioned. development. You may wish to begin study in this Apart from this, a combination of economics and area at first year level, where there is a semester course econometrics, if this is where your talents lie, opens in the Department of Government, Introduction to up opportunities in economic research and forecasting International and Comparative Politics. Even if you positions in both private and public sectors; do no t take these subjects at first year, special provision specialisations in economics and finance position you has been made to allow you to combine a selection of well for careers in the financial sector of the economy, later year semester courses from these departments in such as banking; a combination of economics and the an Asian Studies Program. Some third year options in study of government is valuable for a range of careers the Department of Economics are also appropriate if in the public and private sectors; and the study of you are interested in Asian studies. As mentioned industrial relations and human resource management above, you can also undertake some study of an Asian opens up careers in personnel management or labour language, such as Japanese or Indonesian. relations. Employers expect economics and commerce There are even wider opportunities than may appear graduates to be numerate, to be able to analyse data from a perusal of the core subjects in each of the using basic mathematical and statistical techniques, degrees, because we permit you to choose some Table and to do so through the use of the latest computer technology and software. These skills may be obtained study in the Faculty. In order to enter and remain in in each degree in various ways. In the BEc and the the honours stream in a subject, you normally have to BCom, at least one year of study of econometrics is perform at credit level or better in that subject. A bare compulsory. In addition, at all levels there is an pass level of performance in a first year subject will emphasis in a number of subjects on computer not be enough to secure entry into honours courses. applications, and in studying them, you will be doing a considerable amount of work in the Faculty's Transfers between the three degrees computer laboratory. It is not necessary in order to The restriction on the number of students studying become competent in the use of computers for you to accounting means that students not in the accounting take computer science as a subject, although this is an quota cannot transfer into the BCom. There is another excellent choice for those of you wanting to specialise restriction on transfers to the BCom, which applies to in computer technology and programming. In the students enrolled in the Faculty prior to 1993: because BEc(SocSc), where there is less emphasis on most of the new courses central to the degree are not quantitative techniques, you.will nevertheless find available in 1993, students enrolled before 1993 will you can acquire some of them through the study of not be permitted to transfer into the BCom. economics, or in other fields, such as psychology and Apart from these two restrictions, you are free to government. transfer from one degree to another during your One final point: in addition to numeracy skills, an enrolment in the Faculty. However, students who increasingly high premium is placed by employers on want to enter the accounting quota after being admitted communication and general literacy skills. This is one to the other quota must apply through UAC in time reason why access to Table B subjects is provided in for enrolment at the commencement of the next your degree. In the BCom, for example, there is scope academic year. to choose courses in the humanities offered in the Up to 30 March each year, students may withdraw Faculty of Arts, where such skills are an essential from any course and enrol in any other. During this component of learning. Within many of the Faculty's period you may also withdraw from one degree and own courses, attention is paid to developing skills in enrol in one of the other two — subject to the above logical argument through written and oral quota restrictions, and as long as the individual subjects communication. Such skills are particularly important you have chosen make this allowable under the rules for the successful completion of courses such as of the other degree. As well, transfers between the Commercial Law and Government. Special courses in degrees can be made at the commencement of each such skills as they relate to university work are also year when you re-enrol. In other words, you may not available through the University's Learning Assistance change from one degree to another in the middle of Centre. the year. If you want further advice on the matter you should consult the advisers in the Faculty Office. Honours degrees In some of the more specialised careers open to the Full-time and part-time study Faculty's graduates, such as economic forecasting Most discussion so far has assumed that you will be a and analysis, employers may be looking for a level of full-time student and will want to graduate after three specialisation that is not provided by a three-year pass years' study. Yet many students cannot attend full- degree. Similarly, if you want to qualify for specialised time and are happy to complete their degree in a postgraduate study, a pass degree is not normally longer time. Although the University enrolmentmakes sufficient. For all graduates, a good four-year honours a distinction between full-time and part-time students degree considerably enhances the quality of your (as does the Commonwealth Government for the sake qualification and singles you out to an employer as of student allowances) the Faculty of Economics has having exceptional ability. the same rules to determine what is 'satisfactory Honours degrees are available in most of the subjects progress' for all students. You must enrol in at least in Table A of the respective degrees. An honours the equivalent of four full semester subjects per year, degree may involve extra work at second and third except when you have less than four left to complete year level in your chosen subject and, in all cases, an the degree, and you must pass the equivalent of six additional year of study spent entirely on studying full semester courses over any two-year period. The that subject. Details of the honours programs in each intentionis thatsrudents should notbe able to complete department can be found in chapter 7. Honours is not just one subject a year and stretch the degree out available in any Table B subject. inordinately. It is possible to suspend your candidature It is also possible to complete either double honours for one year and, with permission, more; but, even or jointhonours. Double honours involves completing here, the total length of your degree must not go all the honours workin two subjects, and thus normally beyond ten calendar years. Satisfactory progress means takes an extra year. In joint honours the two subjects also that you may not keep attempting and failing any are more closely related to each other and a special subject. If you do not make satisfactory progress you program of study is designed for the student so that it will be asked to explain (show cause) and you may be can be completed concurrently. For example, each excluded from individual subjects or from the whole year a number of students take joint honours in degree. The implication of this at the beginning of economics and econometrics. your studies is that you should regard your choice of degree as a serious one and that you should apply Normally you will not make any decisions about yourself to your studies. If you don't, then you are doing honours work until the end of your first year of keeping a place at the University for which there are familiar Arts/Law course; and in 1994 Economics/ many aspirants. Law, Arts/Law and Science/Law shared a common You should also take careful note of the availability entry quota of 208 places. The Faculty of Law also of evening courses if you are a part-time student as offers a three-year course available only to approved most courses are not offered in the evening. graduates of other faculties. In 1994 this LLB course had an entry quota of 65 places. Variation of enrolment The requirements for the Faculty of Economics Considerable freedom to choose the courses in which degrees have been designed to allow flexibility in the you enrol inevitably means that some students will choice of courses so that the most appropriate have second thoughts on the wisdom of their choice combination of courses for a particular career or field after they have started attending classes. Provision is of specialisation might be made by each candidate. made for this by permitting variations in enrolment This flexibility is somewhat curtailed within the up to 30 March for first semester and year long courses combined course, but a student may nevertheless and up to 30 August for second semester courses. Up qualify as a lawyer and at the same time choose the to these dates you can withdraw from a course or add particular disciplines in which he or she will another one and, prior to 30 March, transfer from one concentrate within the BEc, BEc(SocSc) or BCom degree to the other within the faculty without any degree. In the BEc degree all students must complete penalty whatsoever. However, you are strongly the subjects Econometrics I and Economics I, II and III advised during those weeks to attend all courses into „ and the equivalent of at least two Table A third year which you think you might wish to transfer. It is not semester courses other than Economics. In the possible to add a course after this time though you can BEc(SocSc) degree all students must study the subject discontinue a course. Detailed information about Economics for at least two years and must complete withdrawal, discontinuation with permission and the equivalent of at least four semester courses at the third year level. In the BCom degree all students must discontinuation can be found in chapter 8. study first year Accounting, Econometrics and Economics or Economics (Social Sciences) and must Timetable complete the equivalent of at least four semester First year students will be provided after they have courses at the third year level. Full details of the enrolled with a personal timetable showing the times subjects available in the degrees are given in chapters and locations of their classes in each subject. Thus, in 2, 3 and 4. Students proceeding under combined degree choosing your subjects, you need not worry in the first requirements should note that no more Table B courses instance about the timetable and any possible clashes. other than Legal Institutions, Constitutional Law, Torts, Many of the departments with large enrolments give Administrative Law, Contracts and Criminal Law can be lectures in a subject more than once, scheduled at counted towards the requirements for the Faculty of different times of the day. Copies of the Faculty lecture Economics degree. timetable are available at enrolment time. If the personal timetable you have been allocated by the Combined degree students will normally take Legal computer is unsuitable, you may seek to change some Institutions, Constitutional law, Torts, Administrative of the times, but only if there is room available at an Law, Contracts and Criminal Law (which are LLB courses) to count toward the first degree. In the first alternative time. year of attendance, they will normally enrol in four Most departments schedule one hour per week of first year courses of which one is Economics I or. tutorials in first year courses, in addition to the lecture Economics I (SocSc) and another is Legal Institutions. hours. In addition, students will be expected to complete the Legal Research and Writing course. Combined degree Credit for work previously completed candidates will take Constitutional Law and Torts in Graduates of other faculties and universities are not second year and Administrative Law and Contracts in normally accepted into the undergraduate program. third year, with Criminal Law being taken either in Undergraduates in other faculties or universities or second or third year. As in the case of Arts/Law, the similar institutions may apply for transfer to the BEc, first three years of the five-year combined course are BEc(SocSc) or BCom and be credited with courses spent at the main grounds of the University. The deemed equivalent to courses available in the faculty. remainder of the course is completed at the Law School. Restriction upon re-enrolment A student who wishes to proceed to an honours Details on restriction upon re-enrolment are given in BEc, BEc(SocSc) or BCom degree and who is qualified chapter 8 of this handbook. to enter the final honours year, may proceed directly into the final honours year after the first three years/or Economics, Economics (Social Sciences) may defer entry until after the completion of the entire or Commerce/Law degrees combined course. Intending honours students take Economics, Economics (Social Sciences) or Commerce/ the second and third year honours courses (instead of Law is a combined course of study in which the the corresponding pass courses) in the chosen honours student may gain degrees in both the Faculties of subject. While there is much to be gained by combined Economics and Law in five years, which is one year degree students taking honours courses, the final less than it would take to complete both separately. honours year would normally only be undertaken by The Economics, Economics (Social Sciences) or a student with some serious scholarly ambitions in the Commerce/Law arrangements are similar to the more honours subject. Graduate entry to Law A student who secures a place in the Economics undergraduate quota may complete the Economics degree and apply for Graduate Law. Only students who have obtained a place in the Combined Law quota are permitted to enrol in Law subjects in Faculty of Economics degrees.
Engineering/Commerce A five-year double degree program is available in Engineering and Commerce. Engineering graduates often end up in management, and a background in commerce subjects is a valuable asset in such progression. Entry to the double degree is restricted to students already enrolled in the Bachelor of Engineering, and occurs at the beginning of their second year of study. There is a quota, and selection is on academic merit. Further details are available from the Faculty of Engineering. In the double degree program, students spend the last four years of their studies doing commerce and engineering courses in parallel. Special rules have been framed for the Bachelor of Commerce in this mode (see chapter 4). Students are required to complete fifteen semester courses in Commerce, taken from Table A.
Diploma in Education (DipEd) The Diploma in Education may be taken after completion of the requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Arts, Science, Economics or Economics (Social Sciences). Further details about courses and applicationdatesareavailableintheFflcwZfi/o/Edwcflhon Undergraduate and Diploma Studies Handbook and from the University's Faculty of Education.
Faculty of Arts students Students of the Faculty of Arts are subject in general to the by-laws and general arrangements of that faculty and should consult the Faculty of Arts Undergraduate Handbook. Faculty of Arts students should make sure thatthey comply withFaculty of Arts rules particularly with regard to courses which are taught by Faculty of Economics staff, i.e. Economic History, Economics, Economics (Social Sciences), Government and Industrial Relations. Candidates for the BA degree with honours in the subjects listed above are also subject to the rules of the Faculty of Arts, and except with the approval of that, faculty may not proceed to honours unless they have obtained higher than pass in the first course of the subject in which they seek honours. In examinations Arts students in Economic History, Economics, Economics (Social Sciences), Government and Industrial Relations are, in respect of those courses, subject to the rules and practices of the Faculty of Arts. Economics students taking Arts courses are, in respect of those courses, subject to the rules and practices of the Faculty of Economics. New students in the Faculty of Arts should note that in courses provided by the Faculty of Economics there are no evening lectures. The formal rules for the BEc degree are to be found in majors from Table A in the normal period, you will the resolutions of the Senate and of the Faculty, and in need to choose subjects in your first year which will the attached tables of courses. You will find most of allow you to complete the sequences of your choice. the detailed information at the end of this chapter. The The examples of course patterns givenbelow are no purpose of the following discussion is to give you an more than examples of how you might structure your introduction to the structure of the degree and to the degree to achieve certain ends. The advisers from the extent of choice available. Faculty who will be available at enrolment time will You will be required to complete the equivalent of be pleased to explain to you many other possible 22 full semester courses to qualify for the award of the combinations and variations of courses. degree. Most courses available in the degree are of If you have been admitted to the Faculty within the semester length, although some are full year courses. STB (Accounting) quota you can follow a program in At first year level, a full semester course, such as the BEc which will enable you to be admitted to the Accounting LA, has a unit value of 6, and a full year Australian Society of Certified Practising Accountants course, such as Economics I or Econometrics I, a unit or the Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia. value of 12. At second and third year levels, semester You can do this by taking one of the following courses are worth 8 units and full year courses 16 programs: units. There are also some 4 unit courses. The unit value of all courses is shown in the table of courses for Program 1 the BEc. Most students expect to complete their degree in First Year Ecs I* Ace. LA Comm. Trans I Economet.I* three years. In first year, full-time students should Ace. IB Elective enrol in the equivalent of 8 semester courses in four subjects (48 units). In second year, most of you will Second Year enrol in the equivalent of 7 or 8 later year semester Ecs XI* Man. Ace. A Elective Finance 201 courses (56 or 64 units), leaving 56 and 48 units Fin. Ace. A Corp. Law respectively to complete the degree in third year. Third Year Thus, your degree will comprise a total of 160 units. If Ecs HI* Fin. Ace. B Pr. Tax. Law Auditing you choose to complete a fifth first year subject, Man. Ace. B Tax. Bus. Ent. normally in your second year of enrolment, you will Program 2 qualify with 156 units. Any failures in courses will First Year make the task of completing in three years considerably Ecs I* Ace. IA Elective Economet.I* more difficult. Note that you cannot, without special Ace. IB Elective permission, enrol in more than 9 semester courses, or their equivalent, in any year. Second Year There are a number of compulsory courses in the Ecs II* Man. Ace. A Comm. Trans I Finance 201 Fin. Ace. A Corp. Law degree. You will need to complete successfully Economics I, LI and III, as well as Econometrics I. Third Year Virtually all first year students will enrol in Economics Ecs LU* Fin. Ace. B Pr. Tax. Law Auditing I and Econometrics I. Thus, you will normally have Man. Ace. B Tax. Bus. Ent. two of your four first year subjects determined for you. There is considerable choice about the remaining two. Have a look at the Table A firstyear courses listed More detailed advice from the Department of at the end of this chapter. Remember, also, that you Accounting will be available at enrolment. may choose from Table B courses as well — but you Another pattern, which would be suitable for would be well advised not to choose more than one at students with a strengthin mathematical and scientific this stage. subjects, might look something like this: Another requirement to keep in mind is that you First Year will need to complete two major sequences of subjects Ecs I* Comp. Sc. I* Economet. I* Ace. IA before the end of your degree. One of these will entail Ace. IB Economics I, II and III. The other will comprise 44 units in a subject listed in Table A other than Economics, Second Year for example, Econometrics. Table A and the separate Ecs II* Comp. Sc. II* Economet. HA Ec. Hist. Economet. IIB departmental entries in this handbook contain informationaboutwhat constitutes amajorina subject, Third Year including information on any course prerequisites. Ecs III* Comp. Sc. Ill* Ops Res. A Ecs III Supp. Examples of such sequences are set out in the sample Ops Res. B programs below. In order to complete at least two *full year course This would be a vocationally-directed degree that (3) A later year course, where it comprises a would steer you into the technical side of quantitative half semester of study in the subject, shall have economic research. a value of 4 units; where it comprises a full A degree pattern whichis more general but still has semester of study, a value of 8 units; and where an emphasis on subjects which would be of vocational it comprises a full year of study, a value of 16 value in both the public and the private sectors might units. look like this: 5. A candidate in any one year shall, except with the permission of the Faculty, enrol in the equivalent First Year of no more than nine and no less than four full semester Ecs I* Govt Ind. Rels Economet. I* courses. Govt Ind. Rels 6. A candidate may not, except with the permission Second Year of the Faculty, enrol in a course unless the entry Ecs II* Govt Ind. Rels Ec. Hist. requirement for that course is satisfied; an entry Govt Ind. Rels requirement may include the completion of a course Third Year at a specified level. Ecs m* Govt Ind. Rels Ec. Hist. 7. A candidate may not count the same course Govt Ind. Rels more than once towards the degree or count two courses which overlap substantially in content. If you want to maximise your involvement in the 8. Where in the tables of courses referred to in central core of economics then the following pattern section 1 a course is designated a corequisite to another would accomplish it: course a candidate may, except with the permission of the Faculty, enrol in the latter course only if he/she is First Year concurrently enrolled in the corequisite course or has Ecs I* Ec. Hist. Economet. I* Aust. already completed that course. Ec. Hist. Economy* 9. Subject to the Senate resolutions concerning Second Year satisfactory progress and except with the permission EcsII* EcHist. Economet. IIA Ec. Hist. of the Faculty, a candidate for the Pass degree must Ec. Hist. Economet. IIB complete the requirements for the degree within ten Third Year calendar years of first enrolment for the degree, and, Ecs HI* Ec. Hist. Ecs in Add.* Ecs in Supp. in the case of the Honours degree, within five calendar Ec. Hist. years of first enrolment. Pass degree 10. In order to qualify for the award of the degree Resolutions of the Senate a candidate shall complete the equivalent of 22 full Bachelor of Economics semester courses having a total value of not less than 1. (1) The courses which are available for the 156 units, which shall include: degree are set out in the table of courses attached (i) 12 units in Econometrics; to these resolutions and in other tables approved (ii) a major in Economics; by the Faculty. (iii) a major in a subject other than Economics (2) In respect of each course the Faculty may listed in Table A;** designate prerequisite courses, corequisite (iv) no more than 60 units at first year level; courses and specific entry requirements and and such information shall be added to the table of (v) except with Faculty permission, no more courses for the degree. than 28 units in total from subjects listed 2. A candidate may be permitted by the Faculty to in Table B. count towards the degree a course or courses other A major comprises a sequence of courses of not less than those listed in the tables referred to in section 1. than 44 units, which shall include not less than 32 3. Each course is designated as a first year course units of later year courses, as specified for each subject (by the Roman numeral I), or a later year course. in Table A. 4. (1) Each course available for the degree is either a full year, full semester or half semester Concurrent candidature for the degrees of Bachelor of course and is designated as having a unit value Economics and Bachelor of Laws as described in the tables of courses. 11. A student may proceed concurrently as a (2) A first year course, where it comprises a candidate for the degrees of Bachelor of Economics half semester of study in the subject, shall have and Bachelor of Laws, and may receive credit for the a value of 3 units; where it comprises a full semester of study, a value of 6 units; and where it comprises a full year of study, a value of 12 "Combined BEc/LLB students enrolled in Economics III Honours units. are exempt from completing a major in a subject other than Economics listed in Table A — they may complete a minor in a subject other than Economics, i.e. two years where the major is three years e.g. Government, or one year where the major is two *full year course years e.g. Finance. This policy will be reviewed at the end of 1996. courses Legal Institutions, Torts, Constitutional Law, may decide, provided that such a student may only be Contracts, Administrative Law and Criminal Law for admitted to candidature for the Honours degree up to the Bachelor of Economics degree, provided that the three years after the award of the Pass degree. student may not count any further courses from Table 18. A candidate who is qualified to enrol in two B; and provided that, with respect to section 5, fourth year honours courses may complete the final permission of both the Faculties of Economics and honours year in the two subjects in one year each or Law is required. complete a joint honours year in the two subjects in one year. Honours degree 19. A fourth year joint honours course shall 12. The degree may be awarded with honours in: comprise such parts of each of the related fourth year Accounting honours courses as may be decided by the Faculty. Computer Science 20. Acandidatemaynot, exceptwiththepermission Economics of the Faculty, repeat an honours course which he/ Econometrics she has discontinued or failed once. Economic History 21. A candidate who does not complete an Honours Finance degree may be permitted by the Faculty to count Geography towards the Pass degree any honours courses Government completed. Industrial Relations 22. The Faculty may grant a candidate credit for Marketing courses completed either at other institutions, or in Operations Research. other faculties within the University of Sydney 13. The degree may also be awarded with joint provided that all the following conditions are met: honours in any two of the subjects in which honours (i) the Faculty assesses the course or courses are available. to be equivalent to courses offered by the 14. There shall be three classes of honours, namely Faculty; Class I, Class II and Class III and within Class II there (ii) the courses are not counted towards shall be two divisions, namely Division 1 and Divi another qualification; sion 2. (iii) in the case of courses completed at 15. If a student graduates with First Class Honours another institution, credit shall not be in any honours subject or in any of the forms of joint given for more than the equivalent of 10 honours and the Faculty decides that the student's full semester courses, while credit may work is of sufficiently high merit, the student shall be granted for any number of units for receive a bronze medal. courses completed at the University of 16. A candidate may, except with Faculty Sydney; permission, enrol in a fourth year honours course only (iv) credit shall not be given for courses on completion of requirements for the Pass degree completed ten or more years prior to the and on satisfying any other entry requirements for the proposed year of enrolment. fourth year honours course. 23. A student who was enrolled as a candidate for 17. A student who has been awarded the Pass the degree prior to 1 January 1993 and who has not degree may subsequently be admitted to candidature completed the requirements for the degree by 1 January for the Honours degree and may qualify for the award 1997 shall be transferred to the unit structure which of the Honours degree upon completion of such took effect for commencing students from 1 January additional requirements in such time as the Faculty 1993.
Table A: Bachelor Of Economics (See section 1 of Senate resolutions) Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Accounting Accounting IA 6 A major in Accounting under Accounting IB 6 Accounting IA section 10(iii) consists of Management 8 Accounting IA and IB Econometrics I Accounting IA and IB, Accounting A Management Accounting A, Financial 8 Accounting IA and IB Econometrics I Management Accounting B, Accounting A Financial Accounting A and Management 8 Management Financial Accounting B. Accounting B Accounting A Financial 8 Financial Accounting A Accounting B Financial Statement 8 Finance 201 and Finance 201 replaced the course Analysis Financial Accounting A Investments from 1994. Auditing 8 Accounting IA and IB Financial Accounting B Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Information Systems 8 Accounting IA and IB This course is not available in 1995. Financial Accounting 6 Terminating course. Concepts Cannot be counted with Accounting IA and IB. Management 6 Terminating course. Accounting Concepts Cannot be counted with Accounting IA and IB. Accounting IV Consult Department Requirements for the Pass degree must be completed before entry to this course. Agricultural Economics Agricultural 12 Assumed knowledge: 2 unit Economics I Mathematics Production Economics 8 Economics II A major in Agricultural Commodity Price 8 Economics II Economics under section 10(iii) Analysis consists of Agricultural Applied Marketing 8 Economics II Economics 1, Production Agricultural and 8 Economics II Economics, Commodity Price Resource Policy Analysis, and any two of Applied Commodity 8 Economics II Agricultural and Resource Trade Policy, Applied Commodity Natural Resource 8 Economics II. Trade, Natural Resource Econ Economics omics and Applied Marketing. Commercial Law Commercial 6 Commercial Transactions I may Transactions I not be counted with Legal Institutions. Corporations Law 8 Any 4 full semester Commercial Corporations Law is a second or first year courses Transactions I later year course from 1995. Principles of Taxation 8 Corporations Law A major in Commercial Law Law under section 10(iii) consists of Taxation of Business 8 Corporations Law Principles of Commercial Transactions I, Entities Taxation Law Corporations Law, Principles of Taxation Law, Taxation of Business Entities and two additional courses in Commercial Law. Trade Practices and 8 Commercial Cannot be counted with deleted Consumer Law Transactions I courses Restrictive Trade Practices or Commercial Law IB. Bankruptcy and 8 Corporations Law Insolvency Securities Regulation 8 Corporations Law Finance Law 8 Commercial Transactions I Computer Science Computer Science 101 12 Econometrics I Assumed knowledge: 3 unit HSC Mathematics Computer Science 201 16 Computer Science 101 Students who intend to take and Mathematics I or Computer Science 301 should Econometrics I take either a second year Mathematics course or Econometrics IIA and IIB. Computer Science 301 16 Computer Science 201 and A major in Computer Science Pure Mathematics 2 or under section 10(iii) consists Applied Mathematics 2 or of Computer Science 101,201 Mathematical Statistics 2 and 301. or Mathematics 2 or Econometrics (IIA and IIB) or (Management Accounting A and Financial Accounting A) Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Computer Science 302 8 Computer Science 201 and Computer Note that Management Pure Mathematics 2 or Science 301 Accounting A and Financial Applied Mathematics 2 or Accounting A do not satisfy the Mathematical Statistics 2 mathematical prerequisites for or Mathematics 2 or Econ this course. ometrics (IIA and IIB) Computer Science 4 Credit in Computer Consult departmental handbook. Science 301 and 302 and Requirements for the Pass preferably a third year degree must be completed Mathematics course before entry to this course. Econometrics Econometrics I 12 Compulsory course. Assumed knowledge: 2 unit Mathematics 201 Econometrics IIA 8 Econometrics I 202 Econometrics IIB 8 Econometrics A major in Econometrics under IIA section 10(iii) consists of Econometrics I, IIA, IIB, IIIA and one other full semester course. 301 Econometrics IIIA 8 Econometrics IIA 351 Operations 8 Econometrics IIA Candidates intending to take Research A Econometrics IV must complete all core Econometrics courses and 302 and 321. 352 Operations 8 Operations Candidates intending to take ResearchB Research A Operations Research IV must complete all core Operations Research courses and 321. 302 Applied 8 Econometrics IIB Econometrics A major in Operations Research Econometrics IIIA under section 10(iii) consists of Econometrics I, IIA, IIB and Operations Research A and B. 303 Forecasting for 8 Econometrics Economics and IIA Business 304 Sample Design 8 Econometrics and Analysis IIA 321 Statistical 8 Econometrics IIB Econometrics Modelling IIIA or Operations Research A 322 Numerical 8 Econometrics IIB Analysis 323 Decision Theory 8 Econometrics IIB 324 Special Topic 8 Econometrics IIB Econometrics IV Credit average in 4 sem Requirements for the Pass degree ester courses at 300 level must be completed before entry including 301,302 and to this course. 321 or with permission of Head of Department Operations Research Credit average in 4 sem Requirements for the Pass degree IV ester courses at 300 level must be completed before entry including 321, 351 and to this course. 352 or with permission of Head of Department Economic History Economic History IA 6 A major in Economic History Economic History IB 6 Economic under section 10(iii) consists of History IA Economic History IA and IB or Introduction to East 6 Introduction to East Asian Asian Economic Economic History IA and IB and History IA 4 full semester courses other than those designated as Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite v'alue course course Introduction to East 6 honours courses (except with the Asian Economic permission of the Head of History IB Department). Introduction to East Asian Economic History IA and IB are not offered in 1995. Economic History II 8 Credit in Economic Two full Comprises an honours seminar Honours History LA and IB semester options and a research essay. in Economic History Economic History III 16 Credit in Economic Two full Comprises a year-long seminar Honours History II Honours semester options and a research essay. and in two full in Economic semester options in History Economic History Economic History IV Credit in Economic Requirements for the Pass degree History III Honours must be completed before entry and options to this course.
Options Economic 8 For all Economic History Candidates who have not Development semester courses completed the prerequisites for in Southeast Asia Economic History IA Economic History courses but Economic 8 and IB or Introduction have completed 4 full semester Development of to East Asian Economic first year courses may, with Modern Germany History IA and IB or the permission of the Head of Economic 8 History I or any 4 full Department, take options in Development of semester first year Economic History. Modern Japan courses Issues in Modern 8 As above plus Economic Japanese Economic Development of History Modern Japan Economic Develop 8 ment of Russia and Eastern Europe Economic Fluctuations 8 Economics I or Economics I (Social Sciences) or with the consent of the Head of the Department of Economic History Economic History of 8 the Mediterranean Region Social Aspects of 8 Industrialisation in the United States Economic and Social 8 Development of Modern France Economic and Social 8 History of Minority Groups American Economic 8 History 1607-1865 American Economic 8 History 1865-1970 Early Australian 8 Economic History Modern Australian 8 Economic History Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course History of the Island 8 Pacific since the mid-1800s Latin America: 8 Political Crises and Economic Change The Historical 8 Development of the Chinese Economy Strategy and Growth 8 For all Economic History of Big Business semester courses Urban History 8 Economic History IA Historiography 8 and IB or Introduction Honours course. Pass student to East Asian Economic may take with permission of History IA and IB or any Head of Department. Men and Women 8 4 full semester first year Experience courses Industrialisation Economic History of 8 the Newly- Industrialising Countries of Asia (the 4 tigers) Topics in Modern 8 European Social History History of Modern 8 European Expansion: Theory and Practice of Imperialism European Studies 201 8 European Studies 202 8 European Studies 301 8 European Studies 302 .8 Economics Economics I 12 Compulsory course. Assumed knowledge: 2 unit Mathematics Economics II 16 Economics I or Econometrics I Compulsory course. Economics I (Social Sciences) and success ful completion of a qualifying examination for Economics II Economics II 24 Credit in Economics I Econometrics I Honours Economics III 16 Economics II and Compulsory course. Comprises 4 Econometrics I options or equivalent. Economics III 32 Credit in Economics II Honours Honours Economics III 16 Economics III or Comprises 4 options or equivalent Additional Economics III other than those taken for Honours Economics III. Economics III 8 Economics III Comprises 2 options or equivalent Supplementary other than those taken for Economics III. Economics IV Credit in Economics III Requirements for the Pass degree Honours must be completed before entry to this course. Economics I 12 (Social Sciences) Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Economics II(P) 16 Economics I (Social Sciences); or Economics I and successful completion of a qualifying examination for Economics II (P) Economics III(P) 16 Economics II(P) Comprises 2 (P) options or equivalent; Economics III(P) 16 Economics III(P) Comprises 2 (P) options or Additional equivalent other than those taken for Economics III(P). Economics III(P) 8 Economics III(P) Comprises 1 (P) option or Supplementary equivalent other than those already taken. The Australian 12 Terminating course. May not be Economy I taken by candidates who have already completed Economics Ilorll(P). Finance Finance 201: 8 Accounting LA or Second year full semester course. Corporate Finance I FinAcCon, Finance 201 cannot be counted Economics I and with Investments. Econometrics I Finance 202: 8 As for Finance 201 Finance 201 A major in Finance under section Corporate Finance II 10(iii) consists of Finance 201 and 202, plus one of 301,302 and 303, and one of 304 and 305. Finance 202 Honours 4 Credit in Finance 201 Finance 201 and Finance 202 Honours comprises 202 a special honours seminar in semester 2. Finance 301: 8 Finance 201 and 202, Investments and and Economics II Portfolio Management Finance 302: 8 As for Finance 301 Derivative Securities Finance 303: 8 As for Finance 301 Corporate Control Finance 303 Honours 4 Credit in Finance 202 Finance 303 Finance 303 Honours comprises or 202 Honours, and a special honours seminar. Economics II Finance 304: 8 As for Finance 301 Trading and Dealing in Securities Markets Finance 304 Honours 4 Credit in Finance 302, Finance 304 Finance 304 Honours comprises or 303 or 303 Honours, a special honours seminar. and Economics II Finance 305: 8 As for Finance 301 Advanced Corporate Finance Geography Geography 1 12 Geography 2 16 Geography 1 Geography 3 16 Geography 2 Candidates may count either the M(Environmental) course or the E(Human) course. Geography 3P(Physical) is a Table B course. Geography 2 24 Credit in Geography 1 Honours Geography 2 8 Credit in Geography 2 Honours only Geography 3 32 Credit in Geography 2 Honours Honours Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Geography 3 16 Credit in Geography 3 Honours only Geography 4 Credit in Geography 3 Requirements for the Pass degree Honours must be completed before entry to this course. Government Introduction to 6 A major in Government under Australian Politics I section 10(iii) consists of Intro duction to Australian Politics I, Introduction to 6 Introduction to International International and and Comparative Politics I, and Comparative Politics I 4 full semester options except with the permission of the the Head of the Department. Options Human Rights and 8 For all Government Application may be made to the Australian Politics options: Head of Department for any Australian State 8 Introduction to student enrolled in one or more Politics Australian Politics I options in Asian Economic Australian Political 8 and Introduction to History to take options in Asian and Electoral International and Politics without the usual Behaviour Comparative Politics I prerequisites. The Australian 8 Political Party System Religion in 8 Australian Politics Introduction to 8 International Politics Politics of ■8 International Economic Relations The Superpowers and 8 After Peace Studies 8 Australian Foreign 8 and Defence Policy International 8 Communism Politics of Globalism 8 The International 8 Security Problem in the Twentieth Century Politics and Society 8 Socialist and Labour 8 Politics Politics of 8 Information Australian Labour: 8 Politics and Culture Social Movements 8 and Politics Women and Politics 8 Japanese Politics 8 Government and 8 Politics of Modern China Politics of 8 Development Problems of Transition 8 in European Politics American Politics 8 Soviet and post-Soviet 8 Politics South Asian Politics 8 Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Revolution, 8 For all Government Nationalism and options: Modernity Introduction to The Comparative 8 Australian Politics I Politics of Ethnic and Introduction to Conflict International and Northeast Asian 8 Comparative Politics I Politics: change and conflict Southeast Asian 8 Politics South Pacific 8 Politics Authoritarian Politics 8 States and the Politics 8 of Economic Development Public Policy and 8 Administration Policy Analysis 8 Organisational 8 Analysis Comparative 8 Federalism The Politics of the 8 Australian Welfare State The Politics of 8 Government-Business Relations in Australia - Australian National 8 Internship Program Political Theory: 8 Classical Political Theory: 8 Early Modern Political Theory: 8 Modern Democratic Theory 8 Marxism 8 Ethics and Politics 8 Government II 8 Credit in Introduction Two options in Comprises special seminar. Honours to Australian Politics I Government and Introduction to International and Comparative Politics I Government III 16 Credit in Government II Two options in Comprises special seminar. Honours Honours and two Government May be taken concurrently with options in Government Government II Honours with Faculty permission. Government IV Credit in Government III Requirements for the Pass degree Honours and two must be completed before entry options in Government to this course. Industrial Relations Macro Industrial 6 A major in Industrial Relations Relations I under section 10(iii) consists of Micro Industrial 6 Macro Industrial Macro and Micro Industrial Relations I Relations I Relations I and 8 half semester courses. Sociology of Industry 4 For all half semester and Labour courses in Industril Labour History 4 Relations, Macro and Legal Aspects of 4 Micro Industrial Industrial Relations Relations I Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Economics of Labour 4 Markets Human Resource 4 Management Industrial Relations 4 Policy Work Safety 4 Comparative Industrial 4 Relations Organisational Analysis 4 and Behaviour Discrimination and 4 As above plus Legal Equality in Aspects of Industrial Employment Relations Industrial Relations. 8 Credit in Macro and Four half semester Comprises honours seminar. II Honours Micro Industrial courses in Relations I Industrial Relations Industrial Relations 16 Credit in four half Four half semester Comprises Research Methods III Honours semester courses and courses in and Writers on Management. Industrial Relations Industrial II Honours Relations Industrial Relations IV Credit in four half Requirements for the Pass degree semester courses and must be completed before entry Industrial Relations to this course. III Honours Marketing '- Marketing 201: 8 Economics I and Second year full semester course. Marketing Principles Econometrics I A major in Marketing under Marketing 202: 8 Marketing 201 section 10(iii) consists of Consumer Behaviour Marketing 201,202 and 203, and Marketing 203: 8 Marketing 201 301, and one other level 3 full Marketing Research I semester course. Marketing 301: 8 Marketing 201 and Third year full semester courses. Marketing Research II 203, Economics II Marketing 302: 8 Marketing 201 and Marketing 301 Marketing 203, Economics II Communications Marketing 303: 8 As for Marketing 303 Marketing 301 Retail and Services Marketing Marketing 304: 8 As for Marketing 303 Marketing 301 New Products Marketing Interdepartmental Contemporary 8 Any 4 full semester Economics and first year courses Politics of South Asia Political Economy. 8 Any 4 full semester of Women first year courses
Table B (See section 10 of the Senate resolutions) For the Bachelor or Economics degree, Table B consists of all courses not in Table A which are offered by the Faculties of Economics, Arts and Science. The courses Legal Institutions (12 units), Torts, Constitutional Law, Contracts, Administrative Law and Criminal Law (all 8 units) are also Table B courses, but are only available to students concurrently enrolled in the Bachelor of Economics and the Bachelor of Laws. The formal degree requirements for the BEc(SocSc) number of them — and your degree will be worth are found in the resolutions of the Senate and of the little to you. Faculty, and in the attached tables of courses. You will The BEc(SocSc) is designed as a general economics find most details that concern you at the end of this degree. It is not primarily for any particular profession chapter. or vocation. Nevertheless, there are some combinations You will be required to complete the equivalent of which have a significant professional relevance. The 20 full semester courses to qualify for the award of the first combination below, for example, would suit degree. Most courses available in the degree are of students aiming for a career in commerce on the semester length, although some are full year courses. personnel side of management: At first year level, a full semester course, such as Economic History IA, has a unit value of 6, and a full First Year year course, such as Economics I (Social Sciences) a Ecs I or Ind. Rels Psych. I* Economet. I* unit value of 12. At second and third year levels, I(SocSc)* Ind. Rels semester courses are worth 8 units and full year Second Year courses 16 units. There are also some 4 unit courses. Ecs II or Ind. Rels Psych. II* The unit value of all courses is shown in the table of II(P)* Ind. Rels courses for the BEc(SocSc) degree. Third Year Most full-time students will enrol in four subjects Ecs III or Ind. Rels Psych. Ill* (48 units) in their first year. A typical progression over III(P)* Ind. Rels three years will see you enrolling in 8, then 6 then 6 semester courses or equivalent (a total of 144 units). If If you plan to make your profession in secondary you fail any courses then the task of completing the school teaching then the following pattern of courses degree in the minimum time becomes more difficult. could be suitable: There are no specific courses which are compulsory. You will have to do at least two years' study of First Year Economics, and this will normally be either Economics Ecs I or Geog. I* Soc. Anthrop. Psych. I* I and Economics II or Economics I (SocSc) and I(SocSc)* I* Economics H(P). In your first year, then, you will Second Year normally choose Economics I or Economics I (SocSc). Ecs II or Geog. 11* Educ. II* If you are a full-time student you will normally choose H(P)* three other first year subjects. These can be any of the Third Year Table A courses listed at the end of this chapter. Ecs III or Geog. Ill* Educ. Ill* Remember that you may also like to choose one course III(P)* from Table B — courses from other faculties. If you N.B.li taking Ecs II rather than II(P), substitute Economet. I choose Economics I, then it will be sensible also to for Psych. I. choose Econometrics I, because it is a corequisite for Economics II and prerequisite for Economics III. Other combinations may be just as valuable for By the end of your degree you will need to complete teaching in primary or secondary schools; in fact the two major sequences in subjects listed in Table A. whole concept of an economics or general social science Table A contains information about what constitutes degree is especially suited for teaching. a major sequence of courses in a subject, including For a general economics degree which will provide information on any course prerequisites. Examples of you with a strong core of subjects suitable for both such sequences are set out in the sample programs private and public sector employment your choice below. The courses you choose in first year will usually could finish up something like this: give you adequate choice in later years. But be careful not to choose in your first year a combination of Table First Year B courses and terminating or first-year-only Table A Ecs I or Govt Ind. Rels Economet. I* courses. This would considerably narrow your choice I(SocSc)* Govt Ind. Rels in later years. Second Year The BEc(SocSc) is designed specifically to offer a Ecs II or Govt Ind. Rels wide variety of possible combinations of courses. As II(P)* Govt Ind. Rels with the BEc, however, it is even more important for your own education and for your career prospects Third Year that you should complete as well as you can whatever Ecs III or Govt Ind. Rels courses you choose. If you aim merely to achieve bare III(P)* Govt Ind. Rels passes in your courses then you are likely to fail a *full year A general degree which will give you a wide contact (3) A later year course, where it comprises a with a range of social sciences (and this is the half semester of study in the subject, shall have fundamental rationale for this degree) could involve a value of 4 units; where it comprises a full almost any combination of Table A and Table B courses. semester of study, a value of 8 units; and where The main determinant should be your interests and it comprises a full year of study, a value of 16 talents. Just two examples are given below, but the units. variety is much greater than this. 5. A candidate in any one year shall, except with the permission of the Faculty, enrol in the equivalent First Year of no more than nine and no less thanfour full semester Ecs I or Rel.St. I* SocAnthrop. Ec. Hist. courses. I(SocSc)* I* Ec. Hist. 6. Acandidatemaynot,exceptwiththepermission Second Year of the Faculty, enrol in a course unless the entry Ecs II or Rel.St. 11(1) Soc.Anthrop. requirement for that course is satisfied; an entry II(P)* II(1) requirement may include the completion of a course Rel.St. 11(2) Soc.Anthrop. at a specified level. II(2) 7. A candidate may not count the same course Third Year more than once towards the degree or count two Ecs III or ReLSt. III(l) Soc.Anthrop. courses which overlap substantially in content. III(P)* III(i) 8. Where in the tables of courses referred to in Rel.St. III2) Soc.Anthrop. section 1 a course is designated a corequisite to another III(2) course a candidate may, except with the permission of N.B. If taking Ecs II, substitute Economet. I for Ec. Hist. the Faculty, enrol in the latter course only if he/she is concurrently enrolled in the corequisite course or has First Year already completed that course. Psych. I* Economet. I* Ecs I or Govt 9. Subject to the Senate resolutions concerning I(SocSc)* Govt satisfactory progress and except with the permission Second Year of the Faculty, a candidate for the Pass degree must Ecs II or Govt Educ. II* complete the requirements for the degree within ten II(P)* Govt calendar years of first enrolment for the degree, and, Third Year in the case of the Honours degree within five calendar Govt Educ. Ill* Ind. Rels years of first enrolment. Govt Ind. Rels Pass degree 10. In order to qualify for the award of the degree In the examples of course structures provided above a candidate shall complete courses equivalent of 20 you should remember that you may choose a sequence full semester courses having a total value of not less of courses from either orthodox economics or political than 140 units, which shall include: economy. You should remember, however, that if you (i) Economics I or Economics I (Social choose the sequence of Economics I, II and III you Sciences) and Economics II or Economics should also include Econometrics I which is a II(P); corequisite for Economics II. (ii) a major in each of two subjects in Table A; or a double major in one of the subjects Resolutions of the Senate Economics (P), Government or Economic Bachelor of Economics (Social Sciences) History; 1. The courses which are available for the degree (iii) no more than 60 units at first year level; are set out in the table of courses attached to these and resolutions and in other tables approved by the Faculty. (iv) except with Faculty permission, no more 2. A candidate may be permitted by the Faculty to than 28 units in total from subjects listed count towards the degree a course or courses other in Table B. than those listed in the tables referred to in section 1. A major comprises a sequence of courses of not less 3. Each course is designated as a first year course than 44 units, which shall include not less than 32 (by the Roman numeral I), or a later year course. units of later year courses, as specified for each subject 4. (1) Each course available for the degree is in Table A; a double major comprises a 44 unit major either a full year, full semester or half semester in a subject plus an additional 16 units from specified course and is designated as having a unit value later year courses in that subject. as described in the table of courses. Concurrent candidature for the degree of Bachelor of (2) A first year course, where it comprises a Economics (Social Sciences) and Bachelor of Laws half semester of study in the subject, shall have 11. A student may proceed concurrently as a a value of 3 units; where it comprises a full candidate for the degrees of Bachelor of Economics semester of study, a value of 6 units; and where (Social Sciences) and Bachelor of Laws, and may it comprises a full year of study, a value of 12 receive credit for the courses Legal Institutions, Torts, units. Constitutional Law, Contracts, Administrative Law and Criminal Law for the Bachelor of Economics *full year course (Social Sciences) degree, provided that the student may not count any further courses from Table B; and admitted to candidature for the Honours degree up to provided that, with respect to section 5, permission of three years after the award of the Pass degree. both the Faculties of Economics and Law is required. 18. A candidate who is qualified to enrol in two fourth year honours courses may complete the final Honours degree honours year in the two subjects in one year each or 12. The degree may be awarded with honours in: complete a joint honours year in the two subjects in Economics one year. Economics (Social Sciences) 19. A fourth year joint honours course shall Economic History comprise such parts of each of the related fourth year Education honours courses as may be decided by the Faculty. Geography 20. Acandidatemaynot,exceptwiththepermission Government of the Faculty, repeat an honours course which he/ Industrial Relations she has discontinued or failed once. Philosophy 21. A candidate who does not complete anHonours Psychology degree may be permitted by the Faculty to count Religious Studies towards the Pass degree any Honours courses Social Anthropology completed. Sociology. 22. The Faculty may grant a candidate credit for 13. The degree may also be awarded with joint courses completed either at other institutions, or in honours in any two of the subjects in which honours other faculties within the University of Sydney are available. provided that all the following conditions are met: 14. There shall be three classes of honours, namely (i) the Faculty assesses the course or courses Class I, Class II and Class in and within Class II there to be equivalent to courses offered by the shall be two divisions, namely Division 1 and Division Faculty; 2. (ii) the courses are not counted towards 15. If a student graduates with First Class Honours another qualification; in any honours subject or in any of the forms of joint (iii) in the case of courses completed at honours and the Faculty decides that the student's another institution, credit shall not be work is of sufficiently high merit, the student shall given for more than 10 full semester receive a bronze medal. courses, while credit may be granted for 16. A candidate may, except with faculty any number of units for courses permission, enrol in a fourth year honours course only completed at the University of Sydney; on completion of requirements for the Pass degree (iv) credit shall not be given for courses and on satisfying any other entry requirements for the completed ten or more years prior to the fourth year honours course. proposed year of enrolment. 17. A student who has been awarded the Pass 23. A student who was enrolled as a candidate for degree may subsequently be admitted to candidature the degree prior to 1 January 1993 and who has not for the Honours degree and may qualify for the award completed the requirements for the degree by 1 January of the Honours degree upon completion of such 1997 shall be transferred to the unit structure which additional requirements in such time as the Faculty took effect for commencing students from 1 January may decide, provided that such a student may only be 1993.
Table A: Bachelor of Economics (Social Sciences) (See section lof the Senate resolutions) Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Accounting Accounting LA 6 First year courses only available. Accounting IB 6 Accounting LA Financial Accounting 6 Terminating course. Cannot be Concepts counted with Accounting LA and IB. Management 6 Terminating course. Cannot be Accounting Concept:s counted with Accounting IA and IB. Commercial Law Commercial 6 Commercial Transactions I Transactions I cannot be counted with Legal Institutions. Computer Science General Computing 6 Terminating course; not currently Studies available. Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Econometrics Econometrics I 12 Assumed knowledge: 2 unit Mathematics First year course only available. Economic History Economic History IA 6 A major in Economic History Economic History IB 6 Economic under section 10(ii) consists of History IB Economic History IA and IB or Introduction to East 6 Introduction to East Asian Asian Economic Economic History IA and IB and History IA 4 full semester courses other Introduction to East 6 than those designated as Asian Economic honours courses (except with History IB the permission of the Head of Department). Introduction to East Asian Economic History IA and IB are not offered in 1995. Economic History 8 Credit in Economic Two full Comprises an honours seminar II Honours History IA and IB semester options and a research essay. in Economic History Economic History 16 Credit in Economic Two full Comprises a year-long seminar III Honours History II Honours semester options course and a research paper. and in two full in Economic semester options in History Economic History Economic History IV Credit in Economic Requirements for the Pass degree History III Honours and must be completed before entry options to this course., Options Economic 8 For all Economic History Candidates who have not comp Development in semester courses, leted the prerequisites for Southeast Asia Economic History IA Economic History courses but Economic 8 and IB or Introduction have completed 4 full semester Development of to East Asian Economic first year courses may, with Modern Germany History IA and IB, or the permission of the Head of Economic 8 History I or any 4 full Department, take options in Development of semester first year Economic History. Modern Japan courses. Issues in Modern 8 Economic Development Japanese Economic of Modern Japan History Economic 8 Development of Russia and Eastern Europe Economic Fluctuations 8 Economics I or Economics I (Social Sciences) or with the consent of the Head of the Department of Economic History Economic History of 8 the Mediterranean Region Social Aspects of 8 Industrialisation in the United States Economic and Social 8 Development of Modern France Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Economic and Social 8 For all Economic History History of Minority semester courses, Groups Economic History IA American Economic 8 and IB or Introduction History 1607-1865 to East Asian Economic American Economic 8 History IA and IB, or History 1865-1970 History I or any 4 full Early Australian 8 semester first year Economic History courses Modern Australian 8 Economic History History of the Island 8 Pacific since the mid-1800s Latin America: 8 Political Crises and Economic change The Historical 8 Development of the Chinese Economy Strategy and Growth 8 of Big Business Urban History 8 Historiography 8 Honours course. Pass student may take with permission of Head of Department. Men and Women 8 Experience Industrialisation Economic History 8 of the Newly Industrialising Countries of Asia (the 4 tigers Topics in Modern 8 European Social History History of Modern 8 European Expansion: Theory and Practice of Imperialism European Studies 201 8 European Studies 202 8 European Studies 301 8 European Studies 302 8 Economics Economics I 12 Assumed knowledge: 2 unit Mathematics Economics II 16 Economics I or Econometrics I Economics I (Social Sciences) and successful completion of a qualifying examination for Economics II Economics II 24 Credit in Economics I Econometrics I Honours Economics III 16 Economics II and Comprises 4 options or Econometrics I equivalent. Economics III 32 Credit in Economics II Honours Honours Economics III 16 Economics III or Comprises 4 options or equivalent Additional Economics III other than those for Economics Honours III. Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Economics III 8 Economics III Comprises 2 options or equivalent Supplementary other than those taken for Economics III. Economics IV Credit in Economics III Requirements for the Pass degree Honours must be completed before entry to this course. Economics I (Social 12 Sciences) Economics II(P) 16 Economics I (Social Sciences) or Economics I and successful completion of a qualifying examination for Economics II(P) Economics II(P) 24 Credit in Economics I Honours (Social Sciences) Economics II(P) 8 Credit in Economics Honours only H(P) Economics III(P) 16 Economics II(P) Comprises 2 (P) options or equivalent. Economics III(P) 32 Credit in Economics Honours II(P) Honours Economics III(P) 16 Credit in Economics Honours only IIKP) Economics III(P) 16 Economics III(P) Comprises 2 (P) options or Additional equivalent other than those taken for Economics III(P). Economics III(P) 8 Economics III(P) Comprises 1 (P) option or Supplementary equivalent other than those already taken. Economics IV(P) Credit in Economics Requirements for the Pass degree III(P) Honours must be completed before entry to this course. The Australian 12 Terminating course. May not be Economy taken by candidates who have already completed Economics Ilorll(P). . Education Education II 16 One of Sociology I, Education IV maybe undertaken Social Anthropology I, in either the School of Philosophy I or Educational Psychology, Psychology 101 Measurement and Technology or the School of Social and Policy Studies in Education. Education II Honours 8 Credit in one of above Education II Not required for Honours in Social and Policy Studies in Education. Education III 16 Education II Education III Honours 16 Credit in Education Education III Not required for Honours in II and II Honours Social and Policy Studies in Education. Education IV Credit in Education III The former school requires and III Honours Education IV candidates to have completed honours courses in addition to the normal Pass requirements of Education II and III. The latter school requires Education IV candidates to have completed honours courses in Education II and III as part of, not in addition to, the normal Pass requirements. Requirements for the Pass degree must be completed before entry to this course. Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course 1Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Geography Geography 1 12 Geography 2 16 Geography 1 Geography 3 16 Geography 2 Candidates may count either the M(Environmental) course or the E(Human) course. Geography 3P(Physical) is a Table B course. Geography 2 24 Credit in Geography 1 Honours Geography 2 8 Credit in Geography 2 Honours only Geography 3 32 Credit in Geography 2 Honours Honours Geography 3 16 Credit in Geography 3 Honours only Geography 4 Credit in Geography 3 Requirements for the Pass degree Honours must be completed before entry to this course. Government Introduction to 6 A major in Government under Australian Politics I section 10(ii) consists of Introduction to 6 Introduction to Australian International and Politics I and Introduction to Comparative International and Comparative Politics I Politics I and four full semester options, except with the permission of the Head of Department. Options Human Rights and 8 For all Government Application may be made to the Australian Politics options: Head of Department for any Australian State 8 Introduction to student enrolled in one or more Politics Australian Politics I options in Asian Economic Australian Political 8 and Introduction to History to take options in Asian and Electoral International and Politics without the usual Behaviour Comparative Politics I prerequisites. The Australian 8 Political Party System Religion in 8 Australian Politics Introduction to 8 International Politics Politics of 8 International Economic Relations The Superpowers and 8 After Peace Studies 8 Australian Foreign 8 and Defence Policy International 8 Communism Politics of Globalism 8 The International 8 Security Problem in the Twentieth Century Politics and Society 8 Socialist and Labour 8 Politics Politics of 8 Information Australian Labour: 8 Politics and Culture Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Social Movements 8 For all Government and Politics . options: Women and Politics 8 Introduction to Japanese Politics 8 Australian Politics I Government and 8 and Introduction to Politics of Modern International and China Comparative Politics I Politics of 8 Development Problems of Transition 8 in European Politics American Politics 8 Soviet and post-Soviet 8 Politics South Asian Politics 8 Revolution, 8 Nationalism and Modernity The Comparative 8 Politics of Ethnic Conflict Northeast Asian 8 Politics: change and conflict Southeast Asian 8 - Politics South Pacific Politics 8 Authoritarian Politics 8 States and the Politics 8 of Economic Development Public Policy and 8 Administration Policy Analysis 8 Organisational Analysis 8 Comparative 8 Federalism The Politics of the 8 Australian Welfare State The Politics of 8 Government-Business Relations in Australia Australian National 8 Internship Program Political Theory: 8 Classical Political Theory: 8 Early Modern Political Theory: 8 Modern Democratic Theory 8 Marxism 8 Ethics and Politics 8 Government II 8 Credit in Introduction Two options in Comprises a special seminar. Honours to Australian Politics I Government and Introduction to International and Comparative Politics I Government III 16 Credit in Government Two options in Comprises a special seminar. Honours II Honours and two Government Government III Honours may be options in Government taken concurrently with Government II Honours with Faculty permission. Government IV Credit in Government III Requirements for the Pass degree Honours and options must be completed before entry to this course. Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Industrial Relations Macro Industrial 6 Relations I Micro Industrial 6 Macro Industrial Relations I Relations I Sociology of Industry 4 For all half semester A major in Industrial Relations and Labour courses in Industrial under section 10(ii) consists of Labour History 4 Relations, Macro Macro and Micro Industrial Legal Aspects of 4 and Micro Industrial Relations I and 8 half semester Industrial Relations Relations I courses. Economics of Labour 4 Markets Human Resource 4 Management Industrial Relations 4 Policy Work Safety 4 Comparative Industrial 4 Relations Organisational Analysisi 4 and Behaviour Discrimination and 4 As above plus Legal Equality in Aspects of Industrial Employment Relations Industrial Relations 8 Credit in Macro and Four half semester Comprises honours seminar. II Honours Micro Industrial courses in Relations I Industrial Relations Industrial Relations 16 Credit in four half Four half semester Comprises ResearchMethods and III Honours semester courses and courses in Writers on Management. Industrial Relations II Industrial Honours Relations Industrial Relations Credit in four half Requirements for the Pass degree rv semester courses and must be completed before entry Industrial Relations III to this course. Honours Philosophy Philosophy I 12 Intending Honours student should consult the Head of Department. Philosophy 11(1) 8 Philosophy I Philosophy 11(2) 8 Philosophy 11(1) Pass candidates may take up to 2 full semester courses per year in Philosophy III(l) 8 Philosophy II(1)&(2) second and third year. Philosophy 111(2) 8 Philosophy III(l) Philosophy IV Credits in Philosophy Consult Head of Department. II(1)&(2)/III(1)&(2) and Requirements for the Pass degree 2 other full semester must be completed before entry courses to this course. Psychology Psychology 101 12 ' Psychology 201 16 Psychology 101 Psychology 350 16 Psychology 201 Note Honours requirement in departmental entry. Psychology 4 At least Credit in Requirements for the Pass degree Psychology 201 and 350 must be completed before entry to this course. Religious Studies Religious Studies I 12 Pass candidates may take up to 2 full semester courses per year in second and third year. Religious Studies 11(1) 8 Religious Studies I Religious Studies 11(2) 8 Religious Studies •H(l) Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Religious Studies II 8 Credit in Religious Religious Studies Candidates intending to proceed Honours Studies I II(1)&(2) to rV Honours must take Religious Studies 11(1), 11(2), II Religious Studies III(l) 8 Religious Studies 11(1) Honours, IIKD, 111(2) and III & (2) Honours. Religious Studies 111(2) 8 Religious Studies IH(1) Religious Studies 8 Credit in Religious Religious Studies III Honours Studies 11(1), (2) III(1)&(2) and II Honours Religious Studies IV Credit in Religious Requirements for the Pass degree Studies III(l), (2) must be completed before entry and III Honours to this course. Social Anthropology Social Anthropology I 12 Social Anthropology 8 Social Anthropology I Pass candidates may count up to IKD 2 full semester courses per year in second and third year. Social Anthropology 8 Social Anthro IK2) pology 11(1) Social Anthropology 8 Credit in Social Candidates intending to proceed II Honours Anthropology I to Social Anthropology IV must Social Anthropology 8 Social Anthropology take 11(1), 11(2), II Honours, III(l), ffl(l) 11(1) & (2) 111(2) and III Honours. Social Anthropology 8 Social Anthro 111(2) pology III(l) Social Anthropology 8 Credit in II(1)&(2) III Honours Social Anthropology Credit in Social Anthro Requirements for the Pass degree IV pology units specified must be completed before entry for entry to Honours to this course. Anthropology IV Sociology Sociology I 12 Admission may be subject to a quota. Sociology 11(1) 8 Sociology I Sociology 11(2) 8 Sociology 11(1) Sociology III(l) 8 Sociology II(1)&(2) Sociology 111(2) 8 Sociology IIKD Sociology IV Credit in Sociology Requirements for the Pass degree III(D&(2) must be completed before entry to this course. Social Policy and 8 Social Theory II Administration III(l) Social Policy and 8 Social Policy and Administration 111(2) Administration IIKD Interdepartmental Methods and Statistics 6 Comprises Streams A and B. Not in Social Science currently available. Contemporary .8 Any 4 full semester Economics and first year courses Politics of South Asia Political Economy 8 Any 4 full semester of Women first year courses
Table B (See section 10*'of the Senate resolutions) For the Bachelor of Economics (Social Sciences) degree, Table B consists of all courses not in Table A which are offered by the Faculties of Economics, Arts and Science. The courses Legal Institutions (12 units), Torts, Constitutional Law, Contracts, Administrative Law and Criminal Law (all 8 units) are also Table B courses, but are only available to students concurrently enrolled in the Bachelor of Economics (Social Sciences) and Bachelor of Laws. Courses in Agricultural Economics, second and third year Accounting, Commercial Law, Econometrics and Operations Research are not available in the Bachelor of Economics (Social Sciences). The formal rules for the BCom degree are to be found a major in each subject will be found in Table A, and in the resolutions of the Senate and of the Faculty, and in the separate chapters on each department. in the attached tables of courses. You will find most of Courses in Marketing, a new subject in the Faculty, the detailed information at the end of this chapter. The were introduced in 1994, and new, expanded programs purpose of the following discussion is to give you an in Finance and Human Resource Management are introduction to the structure of the degree and to the also offered. Marketing and Finance begin in second extent of choice available. year, while Human Resource Management builds on You will be required to complete the equivalent of the general first year courses in Industrial Relations 22 full semester courses to qualify for the award of the with specialised later year options. Majors in Finance degree. Most courses available in the degree are of and Marketing are available, beginning at second semester length, although some are full year courses. year. Third year courses in these subjects will also At first year level, a full semester course, such as require some additional study of Economics at second Accounting IA, has a unit value of 6, and a full year year level. course, such as Economics I or Econometrics I, a unit Computer Science is available as a Table A subject. value of 12. At second and third year levels, semester However, it is not necessary to take this subject in courses are worth 8 units and full year courses 16 order to gain knowledge and experience of computers units. There are also some 4 unit courses. The unit and their business applications. All students who take value of all courses is shown in the table of courses for courses in accounting and econometrics, for example, the Bachelor of Commerce. will do projects and exercises on a regular basis in the Most students expect to complete their degree in Faculty's computer laboratory. Computer Science is three years. In first year, full-time students should taught in the Faculty of Science, and the courses are enrol in the equivalent of 8 semester courses in four not designed primarily with a view to specific business subjects (48 units). In second year, most of you will applications. enrol in the equivalent of 7 or 8 later year semester Students planning to satisfy the entry requirements courses (56 or 64 units), leaving 56 and 48 units of the Australian Society of Certified Practising respectively to complete the degree in third year. Accountants or the Institute of Chartered Accountants Thus, your degree will comprise a total of 160 units. If in Australia should include in their degree a prescribed you choose to complete a fifth first year subject, set of courses, including a major in Accounting and a normally in your second year of enrolment, you will sequence of four semester courses in Commercial qualify with 156 units. Any failures in courses will Law. This sequence can be completed in one of two make the taskofcompletinginthreeyears considerably ways. In either case, you are left with six elective more difficult. Note that you cannot, without special semester courses (or their equivalent), so that you can permission, enrol in more than 9 semester courses, or combine accounting with a wide variety of other their equivalent, in any year. subjects: The compulsory courses in the degree are Program 1 Accounting IA and IB, Economics I or Economics I First Year (Social Sciences) and Econometrics I. Note that Ecsl* Ace. IA Economet. I* Comm. Trans I Economics I, rather than Economics I (Social Sciences), Ace. IB Elective is a prerequisite for a number of later year courses in other subjects, such as Econometrics, Operations Second Year 0 Elective Man. Ace. A Finance 201 Elective Research, Marketing and Finance. Your choice of a Elective Fin: Ace. A Corp. Law fourth first year subject is entirely up to you. The other Table A subjects taught at first year level are Third Year Commercial Law, Computer Science, Economic Elective Fin. Ace. B Auditing Pr. Tax. Law History, Government, Industrial Relations and The Elective Man. Ace. B Tax. Bus. Ent. Australian Economy (a terminating course). You can Program 2 also choose a Table B subject. However, you must First Year complete two majors from Table A subjects, so if you Ecs I* Ace. IA Economet. I* Elective choose a Table B subject you may be restricting the Ace. IB Elective choice of subjects in which you major. Second Year Some majors start at second year level, allowing Elective Man. Ace. A Finance 201 Comm. Trans I you to progress from one of the compulsory first year Elective Fin. Ace. A Corp. Law subjects to another subject, and to count that sequence Third Year as a major. In the case of Commercial Law, six semester Elective Fin. Ace. B Auditing Pr. Tax Law courses in the subject are required for a major, but Elective Man. Ace. B Tax. Bus. Eng. these can be completed over two years, starting (if you wish) in your second year. Details on what constitutes *full year course Important note: among the electives, a second Table (3) A later year course, where it comprises a A major must be completed. If that major is to be a half semester of study in the subject, shall have subject commencing in first year, other than a value of 4 units; where it comprises a full Commercial Law, Economics or Econometrics, you semester of study, a value of 8 units; and where should follow Program 1, starting Commercial Law in it comprises a full year of study, a value of 16 second year. Commercial Law can be completed as a units. major under either program. 5. . A candidate.in any one year shall, except with the permission of the Faculty, enrol in the equivalent There are a number of courses available to you that of no more than nine and no less thanfour full semester can considerably enrich your degree and broaden courses. your qualification. Aside from those already 6. Acandidatemaynot,exceptwiththepermission mentioned you might consider, for example, a of the Faculty, enrol in a course unless the entry concentration on Asian studies. In second and third requirement for that course is satisfied; an entry years, a variety of courses in this field is available requirement may include the completion of a course within the Departments of Government and Economic at a specified level. History, and you can take a combination of these 7. A candidate may not count the same course whether or not you have completed a first year in more than once towards the degree or count two those subjects. If you want to take this concentration courses which overlap substantially in content. on Asian studies further, you can also study an Asian 8. Where in the tables of courses referred to in language, such as Japanese, although you should be section 1 a course is designated a corequisite to another aware that study of such a language, particularly if it course a candidate may, except with the permission of is new to you, can be very time-consuming. It is the Faculty, enrol in the latter course only if he/she is permitted to count up to six full semester courses from concurrently enrolled in the corequisite course or has Table B towards the BCom. already completed that course. To some extent, you can also 'mix and match' in 9. Subject to the Senate resolutions concerning your choice of electives. For example, a second year of satisfactory progress and except with the permission study in Economics will give you a far better of the Factilty, a candidate for the Pass degree must understanding of the basic analytical tools and complete the requirements for the degree within ten concepts of economics; courses in government and calendar years of first enrolment for the degree, and, business and business history are available to broaden in the case of the Honours degree, within five calendar your understanding of the world of business; and years of first enrolment. there are specialised options in Accounting and Pass degree Commercial Law for you to choose from. You should 10. In order to qualify for the award of the degree' check from Table A the necessary prerequisites and a candidate shall complete the equivalent of 22 full corequisites for any later year elective courses. semester courses having a total value of not less than 156 units, which shall include: (i) not less than 112 units from Table A; Resolutions of the Senate (ii) a major in each of two subjects listed in Bachelor of Commerce Table A; 1. (1) The courses which are available for the (iii) no more than 60 units at first year level; degree are set out in the table of courses attached (iv) 12 units at first year level in each of to these resolutions and in other tables approved Accounting, Econometrics and Econ by the Faculty. omics or Economics (Social Sciences); (2) In respect of each course the Faculty may and designate prerequisite courses, corequisite (v) except with Faculty permission, no more courses and specific entry requirements and than 44 units in total from subjects listed such information shall be added to the table of in Table B. courses for the degree. A major comprises a sequence of courses of not less than 44 units, which shall include not less than 32 2. A candidate may be permitted by the Faculty to units of later year courses, as specified for each subject count towards the degree a course or courses other in Table A. than those listed in the tables referred to in section 1. 3. Each course is designated as a first year course Concurrent candidature for the degrees of Bachelor of (by the Roman numeral I), or a later year course. Commerce and Bachelor of Laws 4. (1) Each course available for the degree is 11. A student may proceed concurrently as a either a full year, full semester or half semester candidate for the degrees of Bachelor of Commerce course and is designated as having a unit value and Bachelor of Laws, and may receive credit for the as described in the tables of courses. courses Legal Institutions, Torts, Constitutional Law, (2) A first year course, where it comprises a Contracts, Administrative Law and Criminal Law for half semester of study in the subject, shall have the Bachelor of Commerce degree, provided that the a value of 3 units; where it comprises a full student may not count any further courses from Table semester of study, a value of 6 units; and where B; and provided that, with respect to section 5, it comprises a full year of study, a value of 12 permission of both the Faculties of Economics and units. Law is required. Concurrent candidature for the degrees of Bachelor of towards the Pass degree any honours courses Engineering and Bachelor of Commerce completed. 11A. (1) Students who have completed one or two 22. The Faculty may grant a candidate credit for years of candidature towards the degree of courses completed either at other institutions, or in Bachelor of Engineering may be admitted by other faculties within the University of Sydney the Faculty of Economics to candidature for the provided that all the following conditions are met: combined degrees of Bachelor of Engineering (i) the Faculty assesses the course or courses and Bachelor of Commerce. to be equivalent to courses offered by the (2) Such students shall comply with such Faculty; requirements for the combined degrees as may (ii) the courses are not counted towards be prescribed in the resolutions of the Senate another qualification; relating to the two degrees and consequential (iii) in the case of courses completed at resolutions of the faculties. another institution, credit shall not be given for more than the equivalent of 10 Honours degree full semester courses, while credit may 12. The degree may be awarded with honours in: be granted for any number of units for Accounting courses completed at the University of Computer Science Sydney; Economics (iv) credit shall not be given for courses Econometrics completed ten or more years prior to the Economic History proposed year of enrolment. Finance Government Industrial Relations Resolutions of the Faculty Marketing Bachelor of Engineering/Bachelor of Commerce Operations Research. 1. (1) PursuanttoSectionllAoftheresolutions 13. The degree may also be awarded with joint of the Senate governing the degree of Bachelor honours in any two of the subjects in which honours of Commerce, a candidate who has completed are available. one or two years of candidature towards the 14. There shall be three classes of honours, namely degree of Bachelor of Engineering may be Class I, Class II and Class III and within Class II there admitted by the Faculty of Economics to shall be two divisions, namely Division 1 and Divi concurrent candidature for the double degrees sion 2. of Bachelor of Engineering and Bachelor of 15. If a student graduates with First Class Honours Commerce provided the candidate has: in any honours subject or in any of the forms of joint (a) gained credit towards the degree of honours and the Faculty decides that the student's Bachelor of Engineering for not less than work is of sufficiently high merit, the student shall 48 units; and receive a bronze medal. (b) except with the permission of the Dean 16. A candidate may, except with Faculty of the Faculty of Economics, completed permission, enrolina fourth year honours course only at full pass level or better at the first on completion of requirements for the Pass degree examination all courses attempted. and on satisfying any other entry requirements for the (2) The University may determine a quota fourth year honours course. for admission to the degree under this section 17. A student who has been awarded the Pass of the resolutions and the Faculty, in considering degree may subsequently be admitted to candidature applicants for admission to candidature, may for the Honours degree and may qualify for the award take account of this quota and will select in of the Honours degree upon completion of such preference applicants who are most meritorious additional requirements in such time as the Faculty in terms of the eligibility criteria. may decide, provided that such a student may only be 2. (1) To qualify for the award of the pass admitted to candidature for the Honours degree up to degree under this section of the resolutions three years after the award of the Pass degree. candidates shall complete, after admission to 18. A candidate who is qualified to enrol in two candidature, and withinfour years of enrolment, fourth year honours courses may complete the final the equivalent of not less than fifteen full honours year in the two subjects in one year each or semester courses approved by the Faculty complete a joint honours year in the two subjects in provided the courses shall include — one year. (a) 12 units in Accounting; 19. A fourth year joint honours course shall (b) 12 units in Economics or Economics comprise such parts of each of the related fourth year (Social Sciences); honours courses as may be decided by the Faculty. (c) 12 units in Econometrics; 20. Acandidatemaynot,exceptwiththepermission (d) no more than 48 units at first year level; of the Faculty, repeat an honours course which he/ and she has discontinued or failed once. (e) a major in each of two subjects in Table 21. A candidate who does not complete an Honours A; or one major and one minor from degree may be permitted by the Faculty to count subjects in Table A; and, except as provided in subsection (4), for Commerce, or with the permission of the Dean the purposes of satisfying the minimum of the Faculty of Economics with the requirements for the degree, shall not include concurrence of the Dean of the Faculty of any of the courses listed in Table B. Engineering, over two years of concurrent A major in a subject comprises a sequence of enrolment in the degrees of Bachelor of courses of not less than 44 units, as described Engineering and Bachelor of Commerce. for each subject in Table A; a minor in a subject (4) The Dean of the Faculty of Economics, comprises a sequence of courses in a subject of with the concurrence of the Dean of the Faculty not less than 28 units, including 12 units in the of Engineering, may permit a candidate to subject at first year level and 16 units from later include within the 15 full semester courses year courses required to complete a major in referred to in subsection (1) a course or courses that subject. not listed in Table A but which is a core (2) The Faculty will not normally approve requirement for a branch or specialisation of an enrolment in the degree which, together the degree of Bachelor of Engineering. with the candidate's concurrent enrolment for (5) Subject to subsection (6), a candidate the degree of Bachelor of Engineering, amounts shall not be awarded the degree until the to more than 66 units. candidate has also qualified for the award of (3) To qualify for the award of the Honours the degree of Bachelor of Engineering. degree under this section a candidate shall, in (6) A candidate who ceases to be a candidate addition to completing the requirements under for the degree of Bachelor of Engineering and subsection (1), complete any other entry who has not been awarded that degree, shall be requirements for the fourth year honours course eligible for the award of the degree of Bachelor and then complete the fourth year honours of Commerce on completing such additional course within one further full-time year of requirements as the Faculty of Economics may enrolment in the degree of Bachelor of determine.
Table A: Bachelor of Commerce (See section l of Senate resolutions) Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Accounting Accounting IA 6 Compulsory course. Accounting IB 6 Accounting IA Compulsory course. Management 8 Accounting IA and IB Econometrics I A major in Accounting under Accounting A section 10(ii) consists of Financial 8 Accounting IA and IB Econometrics I Accounting LA and IB, Accounting A Management Accounting A, Management 8 Management Management Accounting B, Accounting B Accounting A Financial Accounting A and Financial 8 Financial Accounting A Financial Accounting B. Accounting B Financial Statement 8 Finance 201 and Finance 201 replaced the course Analysis Financial " Investments from 1994. Accounting A Auditing 8 Accounting IA and IB Financial Accounting B Information Systems 8 Accounting IA and IB This course is not available in 1995. Accounting IV Consult Department Requirements for the Pass degree must be completed before entry to this course. Agricultural Economics Agricultural 12 Assumed knowledge: 2 unit Economics I Mathematics Production Economics 8 Economics II A major in Agricultural Commodity Price 8 Economics II Economics under section 10(ii) Analysis consists of Agricultural Econ Applied Marketing 8 Economics II omics I, Production Economics, Agricultural and 8 Economics II Commodity Price Analysis, and Resource Policy any two of Agricultural and Applied Commodity 8 Economics II Resource Policy, Applied Trade Commodity Trade, Natural Natural Resource 8 Economics II Resource Economics and Economics Applied Marketing. Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course I lnit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Commercial Law Commercial 6 Commercial Transactions I may Transactions I not be counted with Legal Institutions. Corporations Law 8 Any 4 full semester Commercial From 1995 Corporations Law is a first year courses Transactions I second or later year course. Principles of Taxation 8 Corporations Law A major in Commercial Law Law under section 10(ii) consists of Taxation of 8 Corporations Law Principles of Commercial Transactions I, Business Entities Taxation Law Corporations Law, Principles of Taxation Law, Taxation of Business Entities and two additional courses in in Commercial Law. Trade Practices and 8 Commercial Cannot be counted with deleted Consumer Law Transactions I courses Restrictive Trade Practices or Commercial Law IB. Bankruptcy 8 Corporations Law and Insolvency Securities = 8 Corporations Law Regulation Finance Law 8 Commercial Transactions I Computer Science Computer Science 101 12 Econometrics I Assumed knowledge: 3 unit Mathematics Computer Science 201 16 Computer Science 101 Students who intend to take and Mathematics 1 or Computer Science 301 should Econometrics I take either a second year Mathematics course or Econometrics IIA and IIB. Computer Science 301 16 Computer Science 201 A major in Computer Science and Pure Mathematics 2 under section 10(ii) consists of or Applied Mathematics Computer Science 101,201 and 2 or Mathematical 301. Statistics 2 or Mathe matics 2 or Econometrics (IIA and IIB) or (Management Account ing A and Financial Accounting A) Computer Science 302 8 Computer Science 201 Computer Note that Management and Pure Mathematics 2 Science 301 Accounting A and Financial or Applied Mathematics Accounting A do not satisfy the 2 or Mathematical mathematical prerequisite for Statistics 2 or Mathe this course. matics 2 or Econometrics (IIA and IIB) Computer Science 4 Credit in Computer Consult departmental handbook. Science 301 and 302 Requirements for the Pass degree and preferably a third must be completed before entry year Mathematics course to this course. . Econometrics Econometrics I 12 Compulsory course. Assumed knowledge: 2 unit Mathematics. 201 Econometrics IIA 8 Econometrics I 202 Econometrics IIB 8 Econometrics IIA A major in Econometrics under section 10(ii) consists of Econo metrics I, IIA, IIB, IIIA and one other full semester course. 301 Econometrics IIIA 8 Econometrics IIA 351 Operations 8 Econometrics IIA Candidates intending to take Research A Econometrics IV must complete all core Econometrics courses and 302 and 321. Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions .„ Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course 352 Operations 8 Operations Candidates intending to take Research B Research A Operations Research IV must complete all core Operations Research courses and 321. 302 Applied 8 Econometrics IIB Econometrics A major in Operations Research Econometrics IIIA under section 10(ii) consists of Econometrics I, IIA, IIB and Operations Research A and B. 303 Forecasting for 8 Econometrics IIA Economics and Business 304 Sample Design 8 Econometrics HA and Analysis 321 Statistical 8 Econometrics IIB Econometrics Modelling IIIA or Operations Research A 322 Numerical 8 Econometrics IIB Analysis 323 Decision Theory 8 Econometrics IIB 324 Special Topic 8 Econometrics IIB Econometrics IV Credit average in 4 Requirements for the Pass degree semester courses at 300 must be completed before entry level including 301,302 to this course. and 321 or with permission of Head of Department Operations Research Credit average in 4 Requirements for the Pass degree IV semester courses at 300 must be completed before entry level including 321,351 to this course. and 352, or with permission of Head of Department 271 Management of 8 Accounting IA and IB, A major in Management Science Information Systems Econometrics I and under Section 10(ii) consists of Economics I Econometrics I and the sequence 272 Management 8 As for 271 of courses 271,272,371 and Decision Making 372. These four courses are not 371 Resource 8 271 and 272 available in 1995. Students who Allocation and wish to take only part of the Planning in Business sequence of courses in 372 Operations 8 271 and 272 371 Management Science should Management apply to the Head of the Department of Econometrics for any exemption from the stated corequisites and prerequisites. Economic History Economic History IA 6 A major in Economic History Economic History IB 6 Economic under section 10(ii) consists of History IA Economic History IA and IB or Introduction to East 6 Introduction to East Asian Asian Economic Economic History IA and IB and History IA 4 full semester courses other Introduction to East 6 than those designated as Asian Economic honours courses (except with History IB the permission of the Head of Department). Introduction to East Asian Economic History IA and IB are not offered in 1995. Economic History II 8 Credit in Economic Two full Comprises an honours seminar Honours History IA and IB semester options and a research essay. in Economic History Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite 'value course course Economic History III .16 Credit in Economic Two full Comprises a year-long seminar Honours History II Honours semester options and a research essay. and in two full in Economic semester options in History Economic History Economic History IV Credit in Economic Requirements for the Pass degree History III Honours must be completed before entry and options to this course. Options Economic 8 For all Economic History Candidates who have not Development in semester courses, completed the prerequisites for Southeast Asia Economic History IA Economic History courses but Economic 8 and IB or Introduction have completed 4 full semester Development of to East Asian Economic first year courses may, with the Modern Germany History IA and IB or permission of the Head of Economic 8 History I or any 4 full Department, take options in Development of semester first year Economic History. Modern Japan courses. Issues in Modern 8 As above plus Economic Japanese Economic Development of History Modern Japan Economic Develop 8 ment of Russia and Eastern Europe Economic Fluctuations 8 Economics I or Economics I (Social Sciences) or with the consent of the Head of the Department of Economic History Economic History of 8 the Mediterranean Region Social Aspects of 8 Industrialisation in the United States Economic and Social 8 Development of Modern France Economic and Social 8 History of Minority Groups American Economic 8 History 1607-1865 American Economic 8 History 1865-1970 Early Australian 8 Economic History Modern Australian 8 Economic History History of the Island 8 • Pacific since the mid-1800s Latin America: 8 Political Crises and Economic Change The Historical 8 Development of the Chinese Economy Strategy and Growth 8 of Big Business Urban History 8 Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course iUnit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Historiography 8 For all Economic History Honours course. Pass student semester courses, may take with permission of Economic History IA Head of Department. Men and Women 8 and IB or Introduction Experience to East Asian Economic Industrialisation History IA and IB or Economic History of 8 History I or any 4 full the Newly- semester first year Industrialising courses. Countries of Asia (the 4 tigers) Topics in Modern 8 European Social History History of Modern 8 European Expansion: Theory and Practice of Imperialism European Studies 201 8 European Studies 202 8 European Studies 301 8 European Studies 302 8 Economics Economics I 12 Assumed knowledge: 2 unit Mathematics Economics II 16 Economics I or Econometrics I Economics I (Social Sciences) and successful completion of a qualifying examination for Economics II Economics II Honours 24 Credit in Economics I Econometrics I Economics III 16 Economics II and Comprises 4 options or Econometrics I equivalent. Economics III 32 Credit in Economics II Honours Honours Economics III 16 Economics III or Comprises 4 options or equivalent Additional Economics III other than those taken for Honours Economics HI. Economics III 8 Economics III Comprises 2 options or equivalent Supplementary other than those taken for Economics III. Economics IV Credit in Economics III Requirements for the Pass degree Honours must be completed before entry to this course. Economics I 12 (Social Sciences) Economics II(P) 16 Economics I (Social Sciences); or Economics I and successful comple tion of a qualifying examination for Economics II(P) Economics III(P) 16 Economics II(P) Comprises 2 (P) options or equivalent. Economics III(P) 16 Economics III(P) Comprises 2 (P) options or Additional equivalent other than those taken for Economics III(P). Economics III(P) 8 Economics III(P) Comprises 1 (P) option or Supplementary equivalent other than those already taken. The Australian 12 Terminating course. May not be Economy I taken by candidates who have already completed Economics Ilorll(P). Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Finance Finance 201: 8 Accounting LA or Second year full semester course. Corporate Finance I FinAcCon, Finance 201 cannot be counted Economics I and with Investments. Econometrics I Finance 202: 8 As for Finance 201 Finance 201 A major in Finance under section Corporate Finance II 10(ii) consistsof Finance 201 and 202, plus one of 301,302 and 303, and one of 304 and 305. Finance 202 Honours 4 Credit in Finance 201 Finance 201 and Finance 202 Honours comprises 202 a special honours seminar in semester 2. Finance 301: 8 Finance 201 and 202, Investments and and Economics II Portfolio Management Finance 302: 8 As for Finance 301 Derivative Securities Finance 303: 8 As for Finance 301 Corporate Control Finance 303 Honours 4 Credit in Finance 202 Finance 303 Finance 303 Honours comprises or 202 Honours, and a special honours seminar. Economics II Finance 304: 8 As for Finance 301 Trading and Dealing in Securities Markets Finance 304 Honours 4 Credit in Finance 302, Finance 304 Finance 304 Honours comprises or 303 or 303 Honours, a special honours seminar. and Economics II Finance 305: 8 As for Finance 301 Advanced Corporate Finance Government Introduction to 6 A major in Government under Australian Politics I section 10(ii) consists of Introduction to 6 Introduction to Australian International and Politics I, Introduction to Comparative International and Comparative Politics I Politics I, and 4 full semester options, except with the permission of the Head of the Department. Options Human Rights and 8 For all Government Application may be made to the Australian Politics options: Introduction Head of Department for any Australian State 8 to Australian Politics I student enrolled in one or more Politics and Introduction to options in Asian Economic Australian Political 8 International and History to take options in Asian and Electoral Comparative Politics I Politics without the usual Behaviour prerequisites. The Australian 8 Political Party System Religion in 8 Australian Politics Introduction to 8 International Politics Politics of 8 International Economic Relations The Superpowers and 8 After Peace Studies 8 Australian Foreign 8 and Defence Policy International 8 Communism Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Politics of Globalism 8 For all Government The International 8 options: Introduction Security Problem in to Australian Politics I the Twentieth Century and Introduction to Politics and Society 8 International and Socialist and Labour 8 Comparative Politics I Politics Politics of 8 Information Australian Labour: 8 Politics and Culture Social Movements 8 and Politics O Women and Politics O Japanese Politics 8 Government and 8 Politics of Modern China Politics of 8 Development Problems of Transition 8 in European Politics American Politics 8 Soviet and post-Soviet 8 Politics South Asian Politics 8 Revolution, 8 Nationalism and Modernity The Comparative 8 Politics of Ethnic Conflict Northeast Asian 8 Politics: change and conflict Southeast Asian 8 Politics South Pacific Politics 8 Authoritarian Politics 8 States and the Politics 8 of Economic Development Public Policy and 8 Administration Policy Analysis 8 Organisational 8 Analysis Comparative 8 Federalism The Politics of the 8 Australian Welfare State The Politics of 8 Government-Business Relations in Australia Australian National 8 Internship Program Political Theory: 8 Classical Political Theory: 8 Early Modern Political Theory: 8 Modern Democratic Theory 8 Marxism 8 Ethics and Politics 8 Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Coreauisite value course course Government II 8 Credit in Introduction Two options in Comprises special seminar. Honours to Australian Politics I Government and Introduction to International and Comparative Politics I Government III 16 Credit in Government II Two options in Comprises special seminar. Honours Honours and two Government May be taken concurrently with options in Government Government II Honours with Faculty permission. Government IV Credit in Government III Requirements for the Pass degree Honours and two must be completed before entry options in Government to this course. Industrial Relations Macro Industrial 6 Relations I Micro Industrial 6 Macro Industrial Relations I Relations I Sociology of Industry 4 For all half semester A major in Industrial Relations and Labour courses in Industrial under section 10(ii) consists of Labour History 4 Relations, Macro and Macro and Micro Industrial Legal Aspects of 4 Micro Industrial Relations I and 8 half semester Industrial Relations Relations I courses. Economics of Labour 4 Markets Industrial Relations 4 Policy Work Safety 4 Comparative Industrial 4 Relations Organisational Analysis 4 and Behaviour Discrimination and 4 As above plus Legal Equality in Aspects of Industrial Employment Relations Industrial Relations II 8 Credit in Macro and Four half Comprises honours seminar. Honours Micro Industrial semester courses Relations I in Industrial Relations Industrial Relations III 16 Credit in four half Four half Comprises Research Methods and Honours semester courses and semester courses Writers on Management. Industrial Relations II in Industrial Honours Relations Industrial Relations IV Credit in four half Requirements for the Pass degree semester courses and must be completed before Industrial Relations III entry to this course. Honours Marketing Marketing 201: 8 Economics I and Second year full semester course. Marketing Principles Econometrics I A major in Marketing under Marketing 202: 8 Marketing 201 section 10(ii) consists of Consumer Behaviour Marketing 201,202 and 203, and Marketing 203: 8 Marketing 201 301, and one other level 3 full Marketing Research I semester course. Marketing 301: 8 Marketing 201 and Third year full semester courses. Marketing Research II 203, Economics II Marketing 302: 8 Marketing 201 and Marketing 301 Marketing 203, Economics II Communications Marketing 303: 8 As for Marketing 303 Marketing 301 Retail and Services Marketing Marketing 304: 8 As for Marketing 303 Marketing 301 New Products Marketing Senate resolutions Faculty resolutions Notes Course Unit Prerequisite Corequisite value course course Interdepartmental Contemporary 8 Any 4 full semester Economics and first year courses Politics of South Asia Political Economy 8 Any 4 full semester of Women first year courses
Table B (See section 10 of the Senate resolutions) For the Bachelor of Commerce degree, Table B consists of all courses not in Table A which are offered by the Faculties of Economics, Arts and Science. The courses Legal Institutions (12 units), Torts, Constitutional Law, Contracts, Administrative Law and Criminal Law (all 8 units) are also Table B courses, but are only available to students concurrently enrolled in the Bachelor of Commerce and the Bachelor of Laws. The Faculty offers the following postgraduate degrees The coursework component involves advanced — Doctor of Science in Economics (DScEcon), Doctor courses in industrial relations and itself takes up to of Philosophy (PhD), Master of Economics (MEc), one academic year on a full-time basis. Master of Economics (Social Sciences) (MEc(SocSc)), The Department of Government offers three Master of Industrial Relations (MIR), Master of degrees. The Master of International Studies is for International Studies (MIntS), Master of Public Policy students interested in the national and international (MPP) and Master of Public Affairs (MPA); and politics of the Asia-Pacific region. It is a coursework postgraduate diplomas — Graduate Diploma in and thesis degree and usually entails one calendar Economics (GradDipEc), Graduate Diploma in year on a full-time basis. The Master of Public Policy Industrial Relations (GradDipIndRels), Graduate will be of great interest to those hoping to be employed Diploma in International Studies (GradDIntS), in the public sector, while the Master of Public Affairs Graduate Diploma in Public Policy (GradDipPP) and focuses on the interface between the private and public Graduate Diploma in Public Affairs (GradDipPA). A sectors. They are both coursework and thesis degrees Master of Commerce degree (MCom) and Diploma in requiring three semesters on the equivalent of a full- Commerce (DipCom) are being introduced from time basis. Semester 2,1995. Details will be available in early 1995 from the Faculty Office. The PhD degree is offered by Doctor of Philosophy all of the departments within the Faculty, and there is This is a higher research training degree which requires also provision for interdisciplinary studies. the preparation of a thesis under the close supervision Enquiries about the Master of Business of a member of staff. Some departments have specified Administration (MBA) and other graduate programs prerequisites which may mean completing one or should be made of the Secretary, Graduate School of more preliminary courses. The minimum period of Business, University of Sydney, N.S.W. 2006 or by candidature is two years (for masters graduates) and telephone (550 3544). the maximum is five years on a full-time basis. The normal length of submitted theses is in the range of Diplomas 60 000 - 80 000 words. Diplomas may be regarded as bridging programs for candidates with undergraduate degrees in fields Doctor of Science in Economics different from, or weak in, those offered by the Faculty's The Doctor of Science in Economics is a higher departments. On a full-time basis, they are normally doctorate, and is awarded to scholars who have made one-year programs involving coursework. an outstanding contribution to research in their discipline. The work on which the award of the degree Master's degrees is based should have been published and should be The Master of Economics usually consists of recognised internationally as a distinguished coursework and a thesis or essay. Candidates who contribution to knowledge. graduated with honours in their bachelor's degree may proceed by research thesis only. Each department Admission requirements within the Faculty allows a number of combinations For entry into the PhD program candidates should of courses and thesis or essay, and also offers the have a bachelor's degree with first or upper second degree on both a full-time and part-time basis. class honours or a master's degree with a major in the Intending candidates should consult the department proposed area of their PhD. concerned for details of the programs available. To be admitted to the master's degrees an applicant The Departments of Economics and Econometrics must have a good first degree (usually interpreted as offer a joint MEc program available at the pass or an average of credit level passes) and in some cases honours level with core courses in microeconomics, three years' prior study in the area of the master's macroeconomics, econometrics and researchmethods. degree. Any shortcomings may be made up through On a full-time basis, this degree usually takes one preliminary work specified by the department academic year for the coursework and 3-6 months for concerned. the thesis or essay. A pass degree at a sufficient standard in any field is The Department of Economics offers an MEc(Social generally sufficient for entry to the diplomas. Sciences) which provides anintensive study in political economy with opportunities for study in related Research facilities disciplines. This coursework and thesis or essay degree The Faculty has excellent research facilities to assist will take normally at least one calendar year on a full- candidates for both the master's and doctoral degrees. time basis. The Wolstenholme and Fisher libraries contain The Master of Industrial Relations degree consists significant collections relevant to the work of "the of coursework and thesis or essay or thesis alone (for Faculty. There are 100 computer terminals connected candidates withfirst or second class honours degrees). to the campus broadband network. In addition to these, postgraduate students have access to the Advanced Computer Laboratory located in the Institute Building containing over 30 Compaq and IBM PCs linked to a RISC 6000 server. Also available for research are a number of computer packages, securities price files, company annual reports, historical records, legal services and stock exchange services. The Faculty provides a modern postgraduate resource room with 36 lock-up carrels for the use of research students. In 1994 there were 309 postgraduate students enrolled in the Faculty of Economics. Many of these were studying part time by coursework. International students are welcome within the Faculty, and, to ensure that they have no difficulties in their initial contact, Associate Professor Debesh Bhattacharya of the Department of Economics has been appointed to counsel and advise them on all matters relating to their candidatures. In some departments where familiarity with Australian conditions is assumed, preliminary work may be specified before candidates proceed to formal enrolment. Graduate study is encouraged by all departments in the Faculty, and enquiries may be directed to them or to the Associate Dean for Postgraduate Studies. Officers of the Faculty think of them as multiprofessional faculties because Dean their graduates find their way into a very wide range Professor Stephen Matthew Salsbury, AB Occidental of different occupations. This is certainly the case with AM PhD Haw. the Faculty of Economics. Pro-Dean Degrees and diplomas Professor Warren Pat Hogan, MA N.Z. PhD A.N.U. The Faculty of Economics was established in 1920 to HonDSc N'cle(N.S.W.) provide for the study of economics and of closely related studies. It awards the following degrees and Associate Dean (Postgraduate Studies) diplomas: Associate Professor Jeffrey Sheen, BSc Cape X. MS Essex PhD Lond. BEc Bachelor of Economics BEc(SocSc) Bachelor of Economics (Social Associate Dean (Undergraduate Studies) Sciences) Dr Gregory Patmore, BEc PhD BCom Bachelor of Commerce Secretary to the Faculty and Assistant to the Dean GradDipCom Graduate Diploma in Mary F. Pollard, BA Commerce Faculty Finance Manager GradDipEc Graduate Diploma in Patrick D. McNeice Economics GradDipIndRels Graduate Diploma in Computer Systems Manager Industrial Relations Thomas W. Sedgwick, BSc GradDIntS Graduate Diploma in Librarian, Wolstenholme Library International Studies Gloria E. Muir, BA DipLib, ALAA GradDipPA Graduate Diploma in Public Affairs Administrative Officer' GradDipPP Graduate Diploma in Public Heidi Fisse, BA Adel. Policy Computer Systems Officer MCom Master of Commerce Peter Shum MEc Master of Economics MEc(SocSc) Master of Economics (Social Administrative Assistants Sciences) Julia Hauman MIR Master of Industrial Relations Karin Oosterhoff (Secretary to Dean) MIntS Master of International Studies Attendants, Merewether Building MPA Master of Public Affairs Jim Mullen (in charge) MPP Master of Public Policy Peter McDonald, Frank Merlino PhD Doctor of Philosophy DScEcon Doctor of Science in Economics The University and the Faculty In the early days of the BEc degree, the related The University of Sydney was founded in 1850 by an studies tended to have a strong orientation towards Act of the Legislature of New South Wales and is the commerce. Subsequently, the Faculty provided for oldest university in Australasia. The University is studies related to economics in a broader social science organised into thirteen faculties (Agriculture, sense as well, such as Industrial Relations and Architecture, Arts, Dentistry, Economics, Education, Government. In 1985, the Faculty decided to offer two Engineering, HealthSciences, Law, Medicine, Nursing, undergraduate degrees to take effect from the Science and Veterinary Science) and three academic beginning of 1987: the Bachelor of Economics, which colleges (Orange Agricultural College, Sydney College was restructured to include the compulsory study of of the Arts and the Sydney Conservatorium of Music). three years of Economics and one year of Econometrics; In addition, there are two boards of studies that also and the Bachelor of Economics (Social Sciences), within supervise the award of degrees (the Boards of Studies which a wide range of social science subjects was in Music and Social Work). made available. Many students over the years have The Faculties of Arts, Science and Economics are chosen to specialise in accounting and commercial sometimes referred to as the 'general faculties' for law. In 1991, the Faculty decided to add a third degree, between them they cover the humanities, natural the Bachelor of Commerce, which commenced in 1993 sciences and social sciences. The remaining faculties and includes compulsory study in first year are popularly known as the 'professional faculties' Accounting, Econometrics and Economics or because they are geared to specific professions; but Economics (Social Sciences). Subjects such as Human the three big general faculties should not be thought of Resource Management, Finance and Marketing are as being non-professional. It would be more apt to included in this degree. Another development has been the offering of subjects taught in the faculty. But the term faculty or combined degrees with Law (Economics/Law, members of faculty also has a specific meaning. It refers Economics (Social Sciences)/Law and Commerce/ to those persons — staff from departments teaching Law) and a double degree with Engineering certain subjects, staff from departments that have an (Engineering/Commerce). The last two were offered interest in the general area of the faculty's activities, for the first time in 1993. The combined Law degree and elected students and staff — who have program can be completed in five years, less time than responsibilities for supervising the award of the it would take to complete both degrees separately. degrees of the faculty. The University by-laws and The Faculty also offers elective courses to students resolutions specify the power and responsibility of a in the Faculties of Arts, Science, Education, faculty, and the conditions under which this power is Engineering, Agriculture and Architecture, and in the exercised. The following extracts from the University Board of Studies in Social Work. The Faculties of Arts, Senate resolutions describe the constitution of the Science, Law and Agriculture offer courses which faculty. Faculty of Economics students may elect to take. About 400 students qualify for the award of Constitution of the Faculty of Economics undergraduate degrees in the Faculty of Economics 1. The Faculty of Economics shall comprise the each year. following persons: The Faculty is, of course, also heavily committed to (a) the Professors, Readers, Associate postgraduate teaching and research (see chapter 5). Professors, Senior Lecturers, Lecturers and Associate Lecturers in the Depart Location ments of Accounting, Econometrics, The Faculty of Economics administration and most of Economic History, Economics, Finance, the teaching departments of the Faculty are in the Government and Public Administration, Merewether Building, on the corner of City Road and Industrial Relations, Management and Butlin Avenue directly opposite the main City Road Public Policy and Marketing who are gates of the University. The Departments of Finance full-time or fractional permanent or and Industrial Relations are located in the Institute temporary members of the teaching staff Building next to the Merewether Building. The Faculty of the University, Office can be found on Level 2 of the Merewether Building. (b) the Deans of the Faculties of Agriculture, Arts, Education and Law or their Information and advice nominees, General questions about studies in the Faculty and (c) the Head or the nominee of the Head of interpretation of faculty statutes (its official rules and each of the following departments or regulations) as set out here and in the University's schools— Statutes and regulations or about general administrative Agricultural Economics problems, including anyone else who can help you, Anthropology should be directed to the Faculty Office. Enquiries by Computer Science mail should be addressed to the Assistant to the Dean, Geography Faculty of Economics, University of Sydney, N.S.W. Philosophy 2006. Telephone enquiries during office hours can be Psychology made by calling (02) 351 3076 or 351 3086. The fax Studies in Religion number is (02) 552 3105. Social Work and Social Policy. The Faculty Office is open for general enquiries on (d) not more than five students elected in week days from 11 am to 1 pmandfrom2 pmto4 pm. the manner prescribed by resolution of Interviews with the Dean or the Associate Deans can the Senate. be arranged by making an appointment through the 2. A person nominated by a Dean under section Faculty Office. 1(b) or by a Head of Department under section 1(c) Academic advisers shall hold office for a period of two years from 1 Questions about the overall structure of the under January next following the nomination, and shall be graduate degrees or about particular courses or the eligible for re-nomination for further periods of two requirements of individual departments can be years. answered by the Faculty advisers, who are available in the Merewether Building during the enrolment Student membership of the Faculty period. Advice about departments and their courses The resolutions of the Senate make provision for five may also be obtained from the departments themselves students to be elected to membership of the Faculty of and the lecturers in charge of courses. There is detailed Economics. The five students comprise: information from each of the departments in the (a) the President of the Sydney University following chapter. Economics Society or another office bearer of the Society nominated by the Career prospects President, being a person who is enrolled See chapter 1. as a candidate for a degree in the Faculty; (b) three undergraduate students enrolled Membership of the Faculty as candidates for an undergraduate The terra, faculty is often loosely used as a collective degree in the Faculty; and noun embracing all the staff and students studying (c) one postgraduate student enrolled as a candidate for a postgraduate degree in the Faculty. The Senate resolutions for student membership of the Faculty of Economics are set out in full in the Statutes and Regulations 1994-95. First year students of lectures unless you have consulted the lecturer in This chapter contains details of the content of courses. charge of the course. As for the recommended or The courses are grouped by departments, and the reference books, you should remember that, although various course entries are preceded by information most if not all may be consulted in libraries, library relating to the department's courses and arrangements, facilities cannot always produce the book when you and sometimes advice about the choice of supporting want it; ownership of the book ensures that it is studies, career opportunities and the like. available at any time for easy reference. Additional You should read these departmental statements books or periodicals may be recommended from time and the course descriptions of the first year courses to time during lectures; in all cases you should prefer before making your choices. For details of Table B first the most recent edition of a book. year courses, whichare offered by other faculties, you will have to consult the relevant faculty handbook. Lecturers in charge of courses Below the title of each course is the name of the Course listings are subject to alteration lecturer in charge. When you are in need of advice you Courses and arrangements for courses, including staff should consult in the first instance the lecturer shown. allocated as stated in any publication, announcement or advice of the University are an expression of intent Glossary only and are not to be taken as a firm offer or Prerequisite, used in relation to a particular course, is undertaking. The University reserves the right to another course that must have been completed before discontinue or vary such courses, arrangements or the new course is taken. For example Economics I is staff allocations at any time without notice. the prerequisite for Economics II. Corequisite, used in relation to a particular course, is a Assumed knowledge course that must have been completed, or is currently Agricultural Economics I, Econometrics I, and being taken. For example, in the case of Economics II, Economics I will be taught on the assumption that the corequisite is Econometrics I (and the prerequisite students have taken at least the Mathematics 2 unit is Economics I). course at the HSC examination or equivalent. Computer Science I will be taught on the assumption Further advice that students have taken the Mathematics 3 unit course Further advice on course planning and other matters at the HSC examination or equivalent. is available from the Assistant to the Dean in the Faculty Office and from members of the teaching staff. Mathematics Learning Centre The Mathematics Learning Centre offers help to students who enter the University with insufficient preparation in mathematics to enable them to cope Accounting with the mathematical requirements of their chosen course. Students who have not taken at least the Introduction Mathematics 2 unit course at the HSC, older students At the undergraduate level the department offers who may not have done mathematics for several years sequences in accounting and commercial law. and some international or interstate students may Undergraduates may proceed to an honours degree need some help with the mathematics and statistics in through the completion of a fourth year of study. This Econometrics. If you are doubtful whether you are additional year may be completed on a full- or a part- well enough prepared for a course, you should contact time basis, though the former is the more usual. the Mathematics Learning Centre for advice. Postgraduate study within the department is The Centre's staff can help you decide which topics directed at extending the disciplinary skills and you need to do extra work on. They provide resources knowledge acquired in the normal undergraduate for individual study, with guidance from lecturers, program and at providing research training in and also arrange small tutorials for students who are accounting. Candidates may proceed to either an MEc having difficulties. Introductory and bridging courses or a PhD in accounting. Subject to minimum entry are organised during January and February each year. requirements, both degrees are available by research The Centre is on the fourth floor of the Carslaw only (thesis) or by a combination of coursework and Building. Any student seeking assistance should call research. As a general rule, the MEc requires the at the Centre, or phone 3514061. equivalent of two years' full-time study; the PhD requires the equivalent of three years' full-time study. Books Postgraduate study within the department is You are expected to buy the textbooks specified. It is facilitated by the Accounting Foundation which has not advisable, however, to buy books before the start as its objective the promotion of excellence in all fields of teaching and research in accounting. The depart Computer Systems Officer ment, through thefoundation, is host to the Accounting KalpanaKashya^BEG.C.T.MEngScN.S.WvFIEAust Research Centre, an independent centre for research AACS in accounting. The centre was the first of its kind in Honorary Appointment Australia and has an extensive library and research Emeritus Professor collection. In a similar fashion the department provides Raymond J. Chambers, AO, BEc DScEcon, FASSA the editorial service forAbacus, aninternational journal FASACPA of accounting and business studies. It also sponsors the Sydney University Pacioli Society, an association Location of professional accountants, students and teachers, The department is on Level 4 of the Merewether which meets several times each year to discuss topics Building. Enquiries, Room 476. of professional, commercial and financial interest. The department also runs an active research seminar Accounting program series at which national and international scholars The department's program is designed to provide discuss their current ideas and research. students with the education and disciplinary training appropriate for career opportunities not only in professional accounting but also in the financial Staff services, corporate and government sectors. Subject Professors to the requirements for the award of the BEc or the Allen T. CrasweU, BCom Qld PhD, AASA CPA BCom, students are free to choose courses from a Appointed 1989 series of courses in: accounting (financial, managerial, Terry S. Walter, BCom Qld PhD WAust, FCIS FCIM audit, financial statement analysis) and commercial ACA AAUQ law (contracts, company and tax). Appointed 1990 For the purposes of the BEc and BCom degrees a Murray Charles Wells, MCom Cant. PhD, FASSA majorinaccounting comprises the sixsemester courses, Accounting LA and IB, Management Accounting A FASA CPA and B, and Financial Accounting A and B, as shown Appointed 1975 below: Associate Professors Graeme W. Dean, MEc, AASA TTA BEc degree (Head of Department) Year Semester 1 Semester 2 Stephen L. Taylor, BCom PhD N.S.W. MEc Macq., 1 Accounting IA Accounting IB AASA CPA Economics I Economics I Econometrics I Econometrics I Senior Lecturers Elective Elective Cynthia F. Coleman, DipEd Syd.Teach.Coll. MA LLM (Commercial Law) 2 Management Financial Linda M. English, BA BCom Monash, AASA Accounting A Accounting A Geoffrey E. Hart, BA LLB Qld LLM Lond. (Commercial Economics II Economics II Law) Elective Elective Elective1 Lecturers 3 Financial Management Neal H. Arthur, MCom N.S.W. BEc, ACA Accounting B Accounting B Paul J. Blayney, BCom Calgary MEc Economics III Economics III Mary-Louise Brien, MA N.S.W. LLB BA Elective Elective Patty Kamvounias, BEc LLM (Commercial Law) Elective1 Philip J. Lee, BBus Kuring-gai C.A.E. MCom N.S.W., ASA Anja M. Morton, BBus Northern Rivers C.A.E. MEc BCom degree Macq., ACA Year Semester 1 Semester 2 Joanne Pickering, BA U.S.R.C. BAdmin Regina MSc 1 Accounting IA Accounting IB Sash, CMA Economics I Economics I Mary E. Wyburn, BA N.S.W. LLM Lond. LLB Econometrics I Econometrics I (Commercial Law) Elective Elective Associate Lecturers 2 Management Financial Maria Balatbat, BSCom Santa Tomas MBA De la Salle, Accounting A Accounting A CPA PICPA ASA Elective Elective Elective Elective Prue Bennett, BCom N.S.W., ACA 1 MartinC.Duble^BComLLBN.S.W.^CAfCommercifl/ Elective Law) 3 Financial Management Accounting B Accounting B Administrative Officer Elective Elective Gaye Wilson, MA Macq. BA Elective Elective 1 Administrative Assistant Elective Katharyn Thomas 'May be taken either semester The department also offers a major in commercial law greater flexibility in structuring the undergraduate in the BEc or BCom degree comprising six semester degree. The courses are offered on a fee-paying basis courses in commercial law. Three elective courses only. may be taken in either second or third year as the following table illustrates: Commercial law courses Year Semester 1 Semester 2 These courses are designed specifically to complement 1 Commercial other studies that may be undertaken by students in Transactions I the Faculty of Economics. They are not available to students taking the combined BEc/LLB, BEc(SocSc)/ 2 Elective in Corporations Law LLB or BCom/LLB degrees, although provision is Commercial Law Elective1 in made for students who commence by taking the Commercial Law Faculty of Law series of courses to transfer to the 3 Principles of Taxation of commercial law sequence given in the Faculty of Taxation Law Business Entities Economics. Students in the BEc(SocSc) degree may do Elective1 in Commercial Law no more than 2 full semester courses of commercial law. Textbook and reference lists for the commercial 'May be taken in either year law subjects will be available from the departmental office (Room 476) approximately one month prior to The Bachelor of Economics and the Bachelor of the commencement of classes. Commerce degrees are accredited by the Australian Society of Certified Practising Accountants and The Accounting courses Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia subject All courses are semester courses within an inter-year to the following requirements: (rather than intra-year) prerequisite structure. (i) completion of the accounting major; However, it is important to note that while Accounting (ii) completion of the commercial law courses IA is not a prerequisite for Accounting IB, successful Commercial Transactions I, Corporations Law, completion of both components is required prior to Principles of Taxation Law and Taxation of entry into the department's second year accounting Business Entities (students in the combined subjects. law program will complete comparable subjects Brief course descriptions follow. Textbook and at the Law School); and reference lists for the accounting subjects will be (iii) completion of Finance 201 and Auditing (a available from the departmental office (Room 476) third year elective). approximately one month prior to the commencement Such a program would satisfy the requirements for of classes. registration by the Australian Society of Certified Practising Accountants for admission as an associate and for advancement to CPA status, and by The Semester courses Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia for Accounting IA 6 units admission to its Professional Year Program. Ms English Of course, other combinations of subjects are Classes Sem 1: (2 lec, 1 tut & 2 prac)/wk possible and students are encouraged to consider the Assessment one 3hr exam, 2 tests/sem, weekly assignments inclusion of subjects offered elsewhere within the Introduces accounting and the double>entry system of Faculty (e.g., Government, Industrial Relations, financial recording. Use is made of electronic computer Economic History or Econometrics) or the University spreadsheets to solve financial accounting problems. (e.g., Computer Science, languages) within their Examines assumptions underlying the preparation of program. While such subjects may not satisfy specific financial statements for external users. Consideration professional accreditation requirements, they is given to the relationship between accounting reports nonetheless provide the opportunity to design degree and other sources of information about company programs which are attractive to employers from performance. Development of skills necessary to commerce, industry and government. understand, discuss, analyse and write about accounting-related topics. Designed as an introduction to accounting. No prior knowledge assumed. Extension courses Through the Centre for Continuing Education the department offers evening courses in Company Law, Accounting IB 6 units Taxation Law, Accounting Theory and Auditing. Each Ms English course requires one evening's attendance per week Coreq Accounting IA for the duration of a normal semester. While these Classes Sem 2: (2 lec, 1 tut & 2 prac)/wk courses cannot be counted towards the BEc or BCom Assessment one 3hr exam, 2 tests/sem, weekly assignments degrees, they are, nonetheless, accredited by both the Builds on Accounting IA. Covers more complex Australian Society ofCertified Practising Accountants technical financial accounting issues including and The Institute of Chartered Accountants in accounting for company formation, the preparation Australia. Thus these courses allow for the completion of cash flow statements and financial statement of certain of the professional accreditation analysis. It consolidates students' acquisition of requirements after graduation and thereby provide computer spreadsheet skills. More detailed considera- tion is given to factors which influence the preparation Management Accounting B 8 units of financial reports, including institutional arrange Mr Blayney ments, accounting standards and statements of Prereq Management Accounting A accounting concepts, and the duty of preparers and Classes Sem 2: (2 lec, 1 tut & 1 prac)/wk auditors of financial statements. Systematic analysis Assessment one 3hr exam, one 1hr test, weekly assignments of a recent Annual Report of one of Australia's largest This course provides students with an analysis of public companies is undertaken. Further, the course basic managerial problems focusing on the role of the develops written and oral communication skills management accountant in today's changing through case studies, oral presentations and group manufacturing and business environment. and individual written assignments. Concentrating on organisational and'behavioural issues it contrasts with the rather technical approach Management Accounting A 8 units of Management Accounting A. Topics include: Ms Pickering decentralisation and transfer pricing and motivation; Prereq Accounting IA, IB behavioural consequences (motivation, etc.) of Coreq Econometrics I budgeting and control systems; recent developments Classes Sem 1: (2 lec, 1 tut & 1 prac)/wk such as Just-In-Time inventory management, total Assessment one 3hr exam, weekly assignments quality management, activity based costing and capital This course provides students with an introduction to budgeting. the basics of management/cost accounting. Areas specifically covered include: cost terms and purposes, Financial Statement Analysis 8 units cost behaviour, cost-volume-profit analysis, cost Prereq Financial Accounting A, Finance 201 estimation via regression analysis and other means, Classes Sem 1 or 2: (2 lec & 2 prac)/wk basic and alternative product costingmethods, detailed Assessment one 3hr exam, weekly assignments study of the budgeting process (master budgets, Focus is on identifying key variables in corporations' flexible budgets, standard costing and variance financial statements that are indicative of firms' analysis) and cost allocation. inherentriskiness and future cashflows. Explanations of why these variables serve as effective signals are Financial Accounting A 8 units developed and relevant evidence reviewed. Case Assoc. Prof. Taylor studies (both real and simulated) are used extensively Prereq Accounting IA, IB to illustrate the basic principles and procedures of risk Classes Sem 2: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk assessment for the purpose of investment and credit Assessment one 3hr exam, one 1000w essay, weekly analysis and the evaluation of audit risk. assignments Accounting and reporting practices of companies, Auditing 8 units particularly listed public companies. Emphasis is Ms Morton placed on developing an understanding of, and the Coreq Financial Accounting B ability to evaluate critically, the various regulatory Classes Sem 2: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk requirements (professional and statutory) governing Assessment one 3hr exam, weekly assignments financial reporting. The economic significance of management's ability to choose between alternative Theory and practice of auditing with particular techniques for recording/reporting a given transaction emphasis on explanations for why auditors adopt or event is also considered from within a 'costly particular techniques. Professional auditing standards contracting' framework. Issues covered include and their influence on audit practice. Practical auditing accounting for taxes, leases, intangibles, extractive problems are examined in workshops and students industries. Consideration of off-balance sheet liabilities are required to complete case studies in computer and owner's equity. Introduction to intercorporate auditing. investments. The following two terminating courses are only Financial Accounting B 8 units available in the BEc and BEc(SocSc) degrees and cannot be counted with Accounting IA and IB. If Mr Arthur Prereq Financial Accounting A students have successfully completed Financial Classes Sem 1: (2 lec, 1 tut & 1 workshop)/wk Accounting Concepts and Management Accounting Assessment one 3hr exam, one 1500w essay, weekly Concepts and have gained a place in the Accounting assignments quota STB by applying through UAC, they may be exempted from enrolling in Accounting IA and IB Advanced topics in financial accounting. Preparation after having passed a cross over examination. This of group accounts and associated problems such as examination will be available only to students who equity accounting, accounting for joint ventures and have gained a place in the STB quota. foreign currency translation. The latter part of the semester concerns the debate surrounding alternative (price variation) accounting systems. There is a detailed Financial Accounting Concepts 6 units examination of the concepts and mechanics of the Mr Arthur systems of current purchasing power accounting, Classes Sem 1: (2 lec, 1 tut & 1 workshop)/wk replacement cost accounting and continuously Assessment one 3hr exam, mid-sem test contemporary accounting. Provides an introduction to the theory and practice of accounting. Designed primarily for students who are income tax, concepts of residence and source of income, not majoring in accounting. The aim is to develop meaning of income, tax accounting, statutory concepts skills in preparing and analysing financial statements. of income, taxation of termination and long service Topics include: the institutional arrangements in leave payments, taxation of fringe benefits, basis of Australia and overseas, balance sheet equation, current liability to capital gains tax and allowable deductions. assets (including inventory, accounts receivable), income measurement, financial statement preparation Taxation of Business Entities 8 units and analysis. Mr Hart Prereq Corporations Law Management Accounting Concepts 6 units Coreq Principles of Taxation Law Ms Pickering Classes Sem 2: (3 lec & 1 tut) /wk Classes Sem 2: (2 lec, 1 tut & 1 workshop)/wk Assessment one 3hr exam, weekly assignment, class work Assessment one 3hr exam, mid-sem test This course is the second part of the subject of taxation Follows on from Financial Accounting Concepts. The law. In addition to the specific topics in income tax as aim is to explain how management accounting set out, it also includes material on sales tax. The information is used by managers. Topics include: following topics are included: trading stock, estimating cost functions, relevant costing, cost depreciation, taxation of partnerships and trusts allocation and discounted cash flow analysis. including the application of capital gains tax to interests in these entities, carry forward of losses, taxation of companies, dividend imputation tax, capital gains tax Commercial Transactions I 6 units application to share and other interests in companies, Ms Kamvounias intellectual property, collection of income tax Cksses Sem 1: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk instalments, amendment of assessments, objections Assessment one 3hr exam, one test, essays, class work and appeals, taxation of non-residents, withholding This course is concerned with the fundamental tax, foreign tax credits, international tax treaties, profit elements of business law. It commences with an shifting and tax avoidance. overview of the Australian legal system (sources of law, parliament, courts, statutory interpretation, Securities Regulation 8 units doctrine of precedent), including an examination of Prereq Corporations Law those provisions in the Commonwealth Constitution Classes Sem 1: 3 lec/wk relevant to business and commercial activities. Basic Assessment one 3hr exam, one assignment elements of criminal law and the law of torts (in particular, negligence and negligent mis-statement) The securities industry is primarily concerned with are then examined before the course continues with a public companies and more generally with capital detailed study of the lawof contract. Agency, contracts raisings through the stock market. Regulation is for the sale of goods, partnerships and trusts are also essential to ensure that stock markets are not distorted discussed. by unfair market practices. Topics covered include: licensing of dealers and investment advisers, stock Corporations Law 8 units market manipulation, insider trading, investment advice, misleading statements and warehousing. Ms Wyburn Coreq Commercial Transactions I Classes Sem 2: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk Trade Practices and Consumer Law 8 units Assessment one 3hr exam, one assignment, tutorial Ms Kamvounias participation Coreq Commercial Transactions I Classes Sem 2: (3 lec & 1 tut/wk) This course examines the law relating to modern Assessment one 3hr exam, essays, classwork corporations. After exploring the background to the Australian legislation and the current administrative This course is primarily concerned with the provisions framework, the topics discussed include the concept in the Trade Practices Act 1974 (Cwth) dealing with of corporate personality, the procedures for incorpora restrictive trade practices, unconscionable conduct, tion, the company in its relations with outsiders, the consumer protection and liability for defective goods. position of shareholders, the duties of directors, Topics to be studied in depth include: anti-competitive company meetings and accounts, methods of agreements, misuse of market power, exclusive financing, securities regulations and takeovers. dealing, resale price maintenance, price disoimination, mergers and acquisitions, unfair practices, product safety and product information, conditions and Principles of Taxation Law 8 units warranties in consumer transactions, liability of Mrs Coleman manufacturers and importers, unconscionable Prereq Corporations Law conduct. The consumer sale provisions of the Sale of Classes Sem 1: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk Goods Act 1923 (N.S.W.) are also studied. Assessment one 3hr exam, weekly assignments, class work This course is the first part of a subject which is Bankruptcy and Insolvency 8 units primarily concerned with taxation law. It commences Ms Wyburn with an overview of the Australian tax system, Prereq Corporations Law discusses contemporary tax issues and then deals Classes Sem 1:3 lec/wk with specific topics, viz. basis of liability to Australian Assessment one 3hr exam, one assignment This course is concerned with the law relating to the and to an academic career, the majority of honours bankruptcy of individuals and corporate insolvency. graduates find employment in the more conventional In relation to bankruptcy, the course explores the areasof professional accounting, industry/commerce, mechanisms by which formal bankruptcy may occur finance or government. The additional investment in (creditor and debtor petitions), the roleof the bankrupt, education brings returns in terms of a better under the trustee and the creditors, and the property made standing of accounting, superior skills and a wider available under bankruptcy. It goes on to examine choice of career paths. For example, within accounting arrangements with creditors outside formal firms, in addition to the usual career choices, honours bankruptcy (PartX). In the case of corporate insolvency graduates typically have opportunities in technical the areas discussed include the appointment and role and research divisions or in staff training or consulting of receivers, receivers and managers, arrangements sections. and reconstructions for companies facing financial difficulties, the placement of a company under official Admission requirements management, the appointment of a liquidator and the Admission to, and continuance in, the honours windingupofacompany.Special issues in insolvency programis based solely onperformance. Thus students also discussed are the responsibilities of company who have performed at some level of distinction in officers and the Australian Securities Commission's their undergraduate studies may be invited to powers of investigation and examination. undertake the final honours year. Enquiries from interested students are always welcome and should Finance Law 8 units be directed to any member of staff. MrHart Coreq Commercial Transactions I The program Classes Sem 2:3 lec/wk The fourth year is structured as follows: Assessment one 3hr exam, weekly assignments Semester 1 Comprises electives from the equivalent of four This course examines the basic financial instruments semester courses selected from a series of full and half suchasbillsof exchange and cheques, and also analyses courses whose offerings are dependent on student the law of securities from a perspective of solvency. numbers and staff availability. The following topics will be covered: negotiability, bills of exchange, promissory notes, cheques and Semester 2 payment orders, letters of credit, floating charges, Research Report basic transactions of securities law, Eurocurrency. Research Report Honours program in Accounting Research training involves the development of the ability to identify and address issues and anomalies Honours study within the department is directed at: (inconsistencies or deficiencies) within the body of • increasing students' analytic/constructive skills knowledge that comprises a discipline; and familiarity beyond the level acquired in undergraduate pass with the means available to solve those problems. level courses; These skills are applied in the research report. The • providing a foundation for the conduct of research reports vary widely in terms of the problems identified in accounting; and and the manner in which they are addressed. All • the conduct of research in the form of a research require a thorough knowledge and understanding of report. the discipline and, at one extreme, a short replication These skills are developed through the completion of an existing piece of research may be suitable, either of an additional (fourth) year of study which may be on previously worked or new data. Likewise, ah old on either a full- or a part-time basis, though the former problem might be addressed with new or different is more common. research methods. At the other extreme new issues may be identified and, if relevant, their empirical or Profile of potential candidates practical implications articulated. For many years demand for accounting graduates has The research report embracing the results of the exceeded supply and most graduates find well-paid student's study is written under the direct supervision employment relatively quickly. Why then consider an of a member of staff. additional year of study? Most often, the answer is simply that candidates undertake the degree at the honours level because they find intellectual challenges stimulating and have a high level of achievement. Agricultural Economics Such candidates are rare. Of the approximately 1000 accounting graduates produced in the Sydney Introduction metropolitan region each year only a handful elect to The aim in providing courses in agricultural economics do an honours program. By so doing they mark for students in the Faculty ofEconomics is to give such themselves as different from the average accounting students the opportunity to study in an area of applied graduate and, as a result, are keenly sought by economics which is of considerable importance to the prospective employers. Australian economy. A three-year sequence in While the honours program is the traditional route agricultural economics is available. to higher level studies in the discipline (MEc, PhD) The courses in agricultural economics cover a wide range of fields, including the study of agricultural and Honorary Appointment resource policy, issues in international commodity Emeritus Professor trade, the marketing of agricultural products, natural K.O. Campbell, MA PhD Chic. MPA Haw. BScAgr, resource economics, and production economics and FASSA commodity price analysis with particular emphasis on the agricultural and resource sectors. Location Graduates with a training in agricultural economics The department is in the R.D. Watt Building at the foo t may find jobs ranging from giving management advice of Science Road. to individual farmers to providing economic advice to governments. They may be engaged in research into Agricultural Economics I 12 units rural problems in this country, or if they prefer, they may find employment in the international sphere. Classes Yr: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment one 1.5hr exam in Sem 1, one 3hr exam in Sem 2, In recent years significant growth in job class work opportunities has occurred in the private sector. Graduates with,training in agricultural economics An introductory course serving as a foundation for have gained employmentin commodity trading firms, other units in agricultural and resource economics. farm organisations, the economics departments of The basic structure and nature of the resource and banks, and the agricultural service industries such as agricultural industries are outlined and the principles the fertiliser and machinery firms. In addition, underlying economic analysis for these industries are considered. Topics will include: the structure of the graduates trained in agricultural economics are readily Australian agricultural and resource sectors, the finding positions in the general business community. changing nature of these industries, their international The AustralianBureau of Agricultural and Resource context, problems of structural adjustment and Economics and the various state Departments of technical change, and government intervention. Other Agriculture are major employers of agricultural topics will include material illustrating basic economic economists. The type of work undertaken includes principles, both graphically and mathematically, as field surveys of costs, incomes and practices in they relate to the management of farm firms, the particular industries, analysis of resource use issues, operation of agricultural and resource industry cost-benefit analyses of public works programs, the markets and impacts of macroeconomic factors on the analysis of the market outlook for specific agricultural and resource sectors. Students may be commodities, supply and demand studies, advice on expected to make use of microcomputers in preparing policy proposals, and the provision of farm class work submitted for assessment. management advice. Federal departments such as the Department of Textbooks Foreign Affairs and Trade and agencies such as the R.C. Bure and D.W. Bromley Applied Economics (Iowa State University Press, 1975) Industry Commission also employ graduates with K.O. Campbell and B.S. Fisher Agricultural Marketing and training in agricultural economics. There is Prices (Longman Cheshire, 1991) considerable rnobility of personnel between the V.J. Pollard and W.J. Gbst Practical Farm Business Management Australian Bureau of Agricultural and Resource (Inkata Press, 1986) Economics and other departments as well as into the international agencies such as the World Bank. Semester options Note that second and third year options offered by the Department of Agricultural Economics may not be Staff taught each year. Professor Thomas Gordon MacAulay, MAgrSc MeZb. PhD Guelph Production Economics 8 units Appointed 1992 Coreq Economics II (Head of Department) Classes Sem 1: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk Associate Professor Assessment one 3hr exam, assignments Ross G. Drynan, BAgrSc Old PhD N.E. Production economics is concerned with production Senior Lecturers decisions on resource allocation at the firm, industry Fredoun Z. Ahmadi-Esfahani, BS Oregon MA San and economy levels. The topics include: the nature of Francisco State PhD Manit. agricultural and resource industry production, Robert L. Batterham, BAgEc N.E. MS PhD III. production functions, factor substitution, principles David P. Godden, BAgEc BA MEc N:E. PhD Land. of enterprise combination and multi-product Carolyn Tanner, BScAgr production, firm objectives, constrained and unconstrained maximisation, cost functions and other Lecturer duality relationships, economies of scale and size in GuangHuaWan,BAgEcNan;'ing/4gric.MEcPhDN.E. farming, input demands and dual relationships, Associate Lecturers production over time, productivity and technical John L. Brakey, BAgrEc change, production under risk and the illustration of Lynn A. Henry, BEc DipAgEc N.E. the principles involved through the use of practical applications and exercises involving both the Shauna L. Phillips agricultural and resource industries. In addition, basic In this course the basic economic principles underlying decision analysis will be introduced including basic international trade in agricultural and resource concepts of probability, concepts of utility, utility commodities and the policies involved will be functions and elicitation of preferences. presented. Issues related to trade and development Textbooks will also be considered. The main topics covered will D.L. Debeitin Agricultural Production Economics (Macmillan,include : trends in agricultural and resources trade; 1986) trade policies of importing and exporting nations, J.P. Doll and F. Orazem Production Economics: Theory with includingissues such as food aid and surplus disposal Applications (Wiley, 1984) programs; economic integration and impacts on Reference international commodity trade; international trade J.R. Anderson et al. Agricultural Decision Analysis (Iowa Statepolic y making, including GATT; trade policies of the University Press, 1977) centrally-planned economies and developing countries; the impact of exchange rates and other Commodity Price Analysis 8 units macroeconomic variables on international trade in Coreq Economics II commodities. Classes Sem 1: (3 lec & 1 tut/excursion)/wk Textbooks Assessment one 3hr exam, class work J.P. Houck Elements of Agricultural Trade Policies (Macmillan, The topics covered will include: the nature of 1986) agricultural and resource commodity markets, market R. Tyers and K. Anderson Disarray in World Food Markets supply relationships, market demand relationships, (Cambridge University Press, 1992) price determination, marketing margin relationships, N. Wallace and J. Evans (eds) International Commodity Markets: spatially related markets, market dynamics, derived An Australian Perspective (Australian Bureau of demand for inputs, price expectations, non Agricultural and Resource Economics, 1993) competitive market forms and contestable markets. Applied examples from agriculture and the resource Natural Resource Economics 8 units industries will be used throughout the course as Prereq Economics II illustrations of the principles involved. Classes Sem 2: (3 lec & 1 tut) / wk Assessment one 3hr exam, class work Textbooks A course in natural resource economics of relevance to W.G. Tomek and K.L. Robinson Agricultural Product Prices agriculture and the resource industries. Issues (Cornell University Press, 1990) discussed are: the environment as a source of R.S. Pindyck and D.L. Rubinf eld Microeconomics (Macmillan, environmental services; socially efficient resource 1992) allocation and Pareto welfare economics; market Agricultural and Resource Policy 8 units failure and characteristics of environmental services; Prereq Economics II benefit cost analysis of public projects, including the Classes Sem 2: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk modification of environmental services; non- Assessment one 3hr exam, class work depletable resources and pollution; depletable The topics discussed include: the basic theoretical resources; irreversibility; sustainability. Applications frameworks for the economic evaluation of policy include land degradation, fisheries, forestry, land-use formation (including Pareto welfare economics and planning, greenhouse effect. public choice theory), market and government failure; Textbooks the institutional structure of agricultural and resource To be advised policy formulationinAustralia;microeconomicissues in agricultural and resource policy arising from Applied Marketing 8 units linkages between agriculture and the resource Coreq Economics II industries and with the rest of the economy. Students Classes Sem 2: (3 lec & 1 tut/excursion)/wk will be expected to read widely for this course. Assessment one 3hr exam, class work Reference books This course relates to the basic economic concepts D.B. Williams (ed.) Agriculture in the Australian Economy involved in the marketing of products into the food (Sydney University Press, 1990) and fibre system. Topics covered will include: the D.B. Johnson Public Choice (Mayfield, 1991) marketing functionincluding transportation, storage, R. Smith and L. Watson (eds) Politics in Australia (Allen & processing, market development, advertising, market Unwin, 1993) information, standardisation and grading; marketing A. Moran et al. (eds) Markets, Resources and the Environment management and planning; market efficiency; futures (Allen & Unwin, 1991) markets and other risk-sharing devices; types of market N. Wallace (ed.) Natural Resource Management: An Economican d industry organisation; marketing boards and Perspective (Australian Bureau of Agricultural and corporations and their role in administered pricing; Resource Economics, 1992) private trading corporations and their roles in R.E. Just et al. Applied Welfare Economics and Public Policy (Prentice-Hall, 1982) agriculture and the resources sector. Textbooks Applied Commodity Trade 8 units R.L. Kohls and J.N. Uhl Marketing of Agricultural Products Prereq Economics II (Macmillan, 1990) Classes Sem 1: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk P. Kotler et al. Marketing: Australia and New Zealand (Prentice- Assessment one 3hr exam, class work Hall, 1994) contemporary social anthropology is increasingly Anthropology concerned with the investigation and analysis of modern nation states. Anthropology is also concerned Introduction with general issues of human cognition and The Department of Anthropology provides students communication, withreligion, performance, semiotics with an initial training in social anthropology. and representation. Courses currently offered by the In Social Anthropology the primary focus of the department focus on various aspects of both Aboriginal department is on the various forms of social and immigrant Australians, as well as a wide range of relationships in both stateless and complex societies. Asian, Pacific and other cultures and societies. In its focus on stateless societies the department A degree with a substantial social anthropology specialises in those of Southeast Asia, the Western content is especially recommended for those seeking Pacific and adjoining countries; in complex societies, recruitment into the diplomatic service, overseas aid primary attention is given to Australia. projects or a variety of business or other organisations Economics students taking courses in anthropology whose activities are dependent onrecruitingpersonnel will gain special benefit by selecting options that with some understanding of the cultures and social concentrate on the economic systems of societies institutions of Australia's Asian and Pacific neighbours studied by anthropologists. Social Anthropology is a and trading partners. A major in social anthropology Table A course in the BEc(SocSc) degree and a Table B should also prove useful for prospective high-school course in the BEc and BCom degrees. teachers interested in teaching the HSC subject 'Society Course descriptions for senior years in anthropology and Culture'. There are also increasing opportunities are in the Faculty of Arts Undergraduate Handbook. for good honours graduates in social anthropology for contract-type employment in connection with Staff Aboriginal land claims. Finally, for those who proceed Associate Professors to successful postgraduate research and training there Paul Alexander, MA Otago PhD A.N.U. is a chance to compete for academic positions both in Diane J. Austin-Broos, MA A.N.U. & Chic. PhD Chic. Australian and overseas universities and other tertiary institutions. Advantageous combinations in the Senior Lecturers academic sphere include Anthropology and Asian Richard D. Basham, BA George Washington MA PhD Studies or Aboriginal Studies, and Anthropology with Calif. Philosophy or History. Daryl K. Feil, BA Calif. PhD A.N.U. Peter D. Hinton, MA PhD Francesca Merlan, MA San Francisco State PhD New Location Mexico The department office is at the south-west corner of Allan L. Rumsey, MA PhD Chic. the Main Quadrangle, down the stairs to one level below that of the quadrangle. Lecturers Gillian Cowlishaw, BA PhD Ghassan Hage,MA Nice PhD Macq. Noticeboards Vivienne Kondos, BA W.Aust. PhD All noticeboards are in and around the foyer. Students J. Lowell Lewis, BA Col. PhD Wash. should note that there are two sets of notice boards Neil Maclean, BA Monash PhD Add. relevant to each year of their course. Jadran Mimica, BA Zagreb PhD A.N.U. Registration Research Fellows All students (including those repeating a course and Jennifer Alexander, BA PhD those not enrolled for a degree) are required to register Rita Armstrong, BA PhD with the Department by completing a registration card. Associate Lecturer All students should register with the department Dundi Mitchell, BA PhD during the orientation period, if they have not done so Administrative Assistants earlier. Maria Cortes Students who for any reason have not registered Anne Robertson with the department by the first day of classes should do so on that day. The Department of Anthropology offers courses in Students will also need to register for tutorials. the discipline of social anthropology. Social Announcements as to procedures will be made in the anthropology may be described as the study of human first lecture of the year and posted on the appropriate societies and cultures. Although it shares much of its noticeboard. theory and method with a wide range of social and humanistic disciplines, it remains distinct in its Advice on courses emphasis on comparison, in its interest in the full Members of staff are normally present among faculty range of human social and cultural diversity, and inits advisers during enrolment week, and many staff use of prolonged fieldwork in small communities as members are available during the orientation period. its primary research method. While often associated If students want to see a staff member before the year with the study of small scale stateless societies, begins, they should apply to the department office. Assessment Semester two Exact details of the methods of assessment to be used Polity and Economy in Highland Papua New and the balance between them will be given in the Guinea course outlines distributed at the beginning of the Dr Feil year. In general, essays count for about fifty per cent of the year's marks, and examinations for the other, A comparative look at Highland Papua New Guinea fifty per cent. societies focusing on the evolution of economic organisation, political forms and social structure. Course structure Textbook Social Anthropology 101 is a year long first year No textbook is prescribed course of twelve unit value. Social Anthropology 101 is a prerequisite for all other anthropology courses. Male and Female in Aboriginal Australia The 200 courses are senior courses and consist of a DrMerlan pool of options, all one semester long, and all of eight Surveys anthropological interpretations of relations unit value. Two of these options are 'starred courses' between men and women, and contrasts between especially designed for students intending to major in male and female, in Australian Aboriginal societies; anthropology. In addition to the 200 courses there is a examines practices relating to maturation, marriage pool of options designed for students who intend to and parenthood; and considers the transformation of proceed to fourth year honours, or are already doing all of these since European colonisation. so. These are the 390 and 391 courses, in addition to the Textbook honours level IV courses. All these latter courses take V.K. Burbanks Aboriginal Adolescence: Maidenhood in an the form of a semester-long two-hour weekly seminar. Australian Community (Rutgers, 1988) Candidates for the pass degree may count up to 44 units from Social Anthropology towards BEc(SocSc) Social Anthropology 201, 202, 203, 204, 205, degree requirements. A major in Social Anthropology will require pass marks in courses totalling at least 32 206 and 207 units at senior level. These must include at least one of Social Anthropology IV the 'starred' courses. To proceed to fourth year, For information on courses, and requirements for students must have credit results in 48 senior units completion of pass and honours programs in social including 210,211,390 and 391. Students should also anthropology, consult the Faculty of Arts Undergraduate . have completed two 'starred' courses. Handbook or check with the Department of Anthropology. Students enrolling in honours in social anthropology in the BEc(SocSc) degree should also Social Anthropology 101 12 units check with the Faculty of Economics office. Honours Classes Yr: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk courses are not available in the BEc or BCom degrees. Assessment two 2hr exams, 4 written assignments The first year course is designed to introduce students to the concepts, methods and theories developed by social anthropologistsin seeking some understanding Basser Department of Computer of the immense variety of human social and cultural forms. Students take all the following components. Science Introduction Semester one Computer science is the scientific discipline that has Discoveries in Anthropology grown out of the use of digital computers to manage and transform information. Computer science is DrFeil concerned with the design of computers, and programs This section is a general introduction to the course. It to run on them, their applications in science, business asks how scholars in the western world became and other areas, and with the theoretical principles interested in other cultures and describes how they set that govern their operation. about studying them through the fieldwork method The diversity of the discipline is demonstrated by and the formulation of concepts and theories that current research interests in the department which enables them to compare and contrast. include artificial intelligence, the design of computer Textbook hardware and networks, and the theory of parallel No textbook is prescribed computation. The department has arangeof computers and specialised laboratories for its teaching and Ritual and Symbols in Bali research. Assoc. Prof. Alexander Students who intend to major in computer science should pay particular attention to mathematical The spectacular ceremonies of 'Hindu' Bali are the prerequisites for the courses. They must enrol in context of a discussion of anthropology's contribution Mathematics 1 or Econometrics I concurrently with to the study of religion. Computer Science 101; and should take a second year Textbook mathematics subject or Econometrics IIA and IIB No textbook is prescribed concurrently with Computer Science 201, as a second year mathematics or econometrics course is a Honorary Appointments prerequisite for Computer Science 301. Students who Emeritus Professor complete Computer Science 301 and 302 are eligible to John Makepeace Bennett, AO, BE(Civ) BE(Mech& become associate membersof the Australian Computer Elec) BSc Qld PhD Camb., FTS FACS FBCS FIEAust Society. FIMA Students should note that entry to Computer Science Honorary Associates Honours requires a credit or better in both Computer Donald Herbison-Evans, MA DPhil Oxf., FRSChem Science 301 and 302. FRAS MIEE Computer science courses are Table A courses Sherman (Hsuen Ren) Hwa, BS Natnl Taiwan MS (central to the degree) in the BEc and BCom degrees Natnl Chiao Tung (Taiwan) PhD Ott. and Table B courses in the BEc(SocSc) degree. Jack R. Phillips, BMechE PhD Melb. . Mathematics courses are Table B courses in all Faculty Eric Tsui, PhD Deakin of Economics degrees. It is anticipated that entry to Computer Science 101 will be restricted by quota. General Computing Studies 6 units AKn HSC 2 unit Mathematics The courses offered by the department are described Classes (3 lec & 3 prac)/wk briefly below, and more fully in the department's [Not currently available] handbook which is available from the department's office (Room G71) in the Madsen Building. Students This course is designed for students who want an should confirm details of courses, registration understanding of computers and computing and the procedures, textbooks, etc., on the departmental application of these in the workplace and society, but noticeboards. Those in doubt should seek advice from who do not intend to study computer science further. members of the department's academic staff. It does not have a large mathematical content, and is thus of interest to many students in Arts and Economics (Social Sciences), as well as Science and other Staff disciplines. Professors The course deals with material from the following J. Ross Quinlan, PhD Wash. BSc areas: microcomputers and application packages; Appointed 1988 computing concepts and programming; programming John Rosenberg, BSc PhD Monash applications; general computer knowledge and Appointed 1991 computers in society. (Head of Department) Associate Professors Computer Science 101 12 units Allan G. Bromley, BSc PhD AKn HSC 3 unit Mathematics Norman Y. Foo, ME Cant. MA PhD Mich. Coreq Mathematics 1 or General Pure Mathematics 1 or Econometrics I Robert J. Kummerfeld, BSc PhD Classes Yr: (3 lec, 1 tut & 2 prac)/wk Senior Lecturers Assessment (assignments, written exam, prac exam)/sem Elias Dahlhaus, DrRerNat T.U. Berlin An introductory course in prograrnming (using the Alan Fekete, PhD Haw. BSc Pascal language), computing systems, and reasoning David Feng, BS MS Shanghai Jiao Tong MS PhD Calif. about programs. It is intended primarily as the first Doan B. Hoang, BE WAust. ME PhD N'cle(N.S.W.) course of the department's professional stream. This Judy Kay, MSc course is equivalent to Computer Science 1 in the Jeff Kingston, BSc PhD Faculty of Science. Ian A. Parkin, BSc PhD Aid. For further details consult the departmental Lecturers handbook. Frans Henskens, BMath PhD DipEd DipCompSc N'cle(N.S.W.) Computer Science 201 16 units Nitin Indurkhya, PhD Rutgers Prereq Computer Science 101 and either Mathematics 1 or Suleyman Sevinc, BS Istanbul MS PhD Arizona Econometrics I Antonios Symvonis, MS PhD Texas DipComp Classes Yr: (4 lec & 4 tut/prac/unsupervised lab)/wk Eng&InfoSc Patras Assessment (assignments, written exam, prac exam)/sem Michael Wise, BA BE PhD N.S.W. The topics covered include: design and data structures; Wayne Wobcke, MSc Qld PhD Essex computer systems; logic and languages; prograrnming practice with Unix; and two large programming Associate Lecturers projects. This course is equivalent to Computer Science Tony Greening, BAppSci C.Sturt 2 in the Faculty of Science. Bett Koch, BSc For further details consult the departmental Administrative Officer handbook. Helene Orr Administrative Assistants Third year courses Eileen Kemp Computer Science in third year is organised into Lynette Vincent modules, each of which involves the equivalent of — two hours of lectures and one tutorial plus unscheduled Computer Science Honours comprises coursework laboratory time — each week for a semester. At least and a project. The project involves a substantial fifteen modules, including three project modules, are development task and is written up in a thesis. It offered each year. The modules are arranged into provides a foretaste of, and a means of assessing the several overlapping streams. The streams are: student's potential for, postgraduate research work. Information Systems and Software Engineering; Students are required to participate in departmental Intelligent Systems; Programming Languages; seminars, and are encouraged to participate along Computer Systems Design. Students can either take 4 with staff and research students in all activities. They modules (by enrolling in Computer Science 301) or 6 are provided with working space, and may be modules (by enrolling concurrently inboth Computer employed for a few hours per week in undergraduate Science 301 and Computer Science 302). Taking 4 teaching. modules is sufficient to major in Computer Science; For further details, contact the Year Director of however, students are advised that doing only 4 Computer Science Honours. modules is not regarded as adequate preparation for a professional career in computing or for further study. Students are advised to balance their workload Postgraduate study between semesters. The department offers research opportunities in For further details consult the departmental several areas of the subject. Consult the department handbook. for further information.
Computer Science 301 16 units Prereq Computer Science 201, and either Pure Mathematics Econometrics 2 or Applied Mathematics 2 or Mathematical Statistics 2 or Mathematics 2 or (Econometrics IIA and IIB) or (Management Accounting A and Financial Accounting Introduction A) The department offers courses of study in Classes Yr: (4 lec & 4 tut/prac/unsupervised lab)/wk Econometrics and Operations Research. In each of Assessment (assignments, written exam)/sem these subjects students may undertake a major in a three-year pass degree, or a four-year honours degree. This course consists of four modules, which must be chosen to conform to one of the four streams (this Subject to resources being made available, a new requirement may be waived by permission of the major in Management Science will be offered in the Head of Department). Students should note that Bachelor of Commerce. The department also offers Computer Science 301 is not by itself regarded as master's and doctoral programs of study. adequate preparation for a professional career in In social sciences generally, and in economics in computing, or for honours. Students intending to particular, there has been increasing use of continue studying or working in the area are advised mathematical and statistical methods. In government to enrol in Computer Science 302 as well. Faculty of departments, banks, manufacturing and marketing Economics students who do not also enrol in Computer companies, public corporations and agencies, research Science 302 are strongly advised to choose the institutes and universities, the services of those with Information Systems and Software Engineering training in quantitative research methods are in high stream. demand. This is partly due to the increasing availability of all sorts of economic and social data, but also to Computer Science 302 8 units growing awareness of the importance of quantitative Prereq Computer Science 201, and either Pure Mathematics analysis in understanding the economy and in 2 or Applied Mathematics 2 or Mathematical Statistics 2 providing a more scientific basis for decision making. or Mathematics 2 or (Econometrics IIA and IIB) The courses offered by the departmentprovide training Coreq Computer Science 301 suitable to a wide range of career choices. Classes Yr: (2 lec & 2 tut/prac/unsupervised lab)/wk The courses in econometrics develop the theory of Assessment (assignments, written exam) /sem statistics and show how it may be applied to problems This course is only available to students who are that arise in the general area of economics. Some of the taking (or have passed) Computer Science 301. Note areas covered are probability, estimation and that Management Accounting A and Financial hypothesis testing, regression, time series analysis, Accounting,,A do not satisfy the mathematical sampling, applied econometrics, stochastic modelling, prerequisite for this course. This course consists of and decision theory. Instruction in the use of computers two modules, not included among those counted is also provided. In third year, students may take towards Computer Science 301. The combination of courses in operations research dealing with Computer Science 301 and 302 is equivalent to mathematical modelling of production, and allocation Computer Science 3 in the Faculty of Science. problems inboth the private and public sectors. Topics includelinearandnon-linearprogramming,iriventory Computer Science Honours control, decision making under uncertainty and simulation. Prereq Computer Science 301 and Computer Science 302 at credit standard or better. A third year Mathematics course The course offerings are for several types of students. is also recommended. Those who do not wish to major in econometrics or Assessment exams, assignments, prac work, presentation, operations research may nevertheless find it advan project thesis tageous to complement their majors with some courses in statistics. These students can obtain an overview in and 321 Statistical Modelling amongst their options. Econometrics I which is compulsory in the BEc and To qualify for Final Year Honours, students must BCom degrees and a corequisite course for Economics obtain credit average or better in four full semester II. Further work still for the non-specialist is available courses at the 300 level taken in the Department of in 200 level courses. Other students may wish to Econometrics. undertake a major by taking the appropriate 300 level Major in Management Science courses. Finally, for those who wish to proceed to Students enrolled in the new Bachelor of Commerce honours, the department offers a range of appropriate degree may take a major in Management Science courses. within the Department of Econometrics. To qualify Students who plan on a major within the department for this major students will be required to complete are also encouraged to take first year mathematics. Econometrics I and the following four semester courses in Management Science: 271 Management of Staff Information Systems, 272 Management Decision Professor Making, 371 Resource Allocation and Planning in Alan Donald Woodland, BA PhD N.E. Business, and 372 Operations Management. Appointed 1982 Availability of these courses depends upon staffing resources. They will not be taught in 1995. Reader Moshe Haviv, BSc Tel Aviv MA PhD Yale Associate Professors Full year course Robert Bartels, BA PhD 100 Econometrics I 12 units Denzil G. Fiebig, MComN.S.W. PhD S.Calif. (Head of Classes Yr: (3 lec, 1 tut & 1 prac)/wk Department) Assessment 3hr exam, tests, assignments Andrew R. Tremayne, BSc(Econ) MSc Lond. An introduction to quantitative methods used in Senior Lecturer economics and related disciplines is provided. Two Murray D. Smith, BEc PhD Monash separate, but related, quantitative methods are developed. The first is mathematics, which provides a Lecturers very efficient and instructive way of formulating and John G. Goodhew, MEc analysing models of behaviour. Topics include: review Ernest L. Houghton, BEc PhD of algebra, functions and logic, mathematics of finance, Programmer matrices, differential calculus, and integral calculus. Decler A. Mendez, BEng Concepcion (Chile) The second is the methodology of statistics, which is concerned with the analysis of data. Methods available Administrative Assistant for handling, analysing, and interpreting probability distributions, sampling theory, descriptive statistics Honorary Appointment (including time series and price indices), estimation, Research Affiliate hypothesis testing, simple regressionmodels, multiple Janet M. Rybak, BA DipNAAC regression, and applications. Instruction and experience are also provided in the use of electronic computers and statistical software as an aid in the Location analysis of data. Applications to economics and related The department is on Level 4 of the Merewether disciplines in the social sciences are provided. Building. Enquiries, Room 489.
Course structure Semester courses For a major in the Department of Econometrics, the Core— Econometrics minimum requirement is completion of a program consisting of the courses 100 Econometrics I, 201 201 Econometrics IIA 8 units Econometrics IIA, 202 Econometrics IIB; plus, either Prereq Econometrics I Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk 301 Econometrics IIIA and one other 300 level course, Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments or 351 Operations Research A and 352 Operations Research B. This course is concerned with regression theory and its application to problems in economics. An essential Honours in Econometrics component is the development of various For students intending to take Honours in the mathematical methods. Importantly, matrix algebra Department of Econometrics, there are no special is used extensively to present the classical multiple honours courses in second and third year. However, regression model and its extensions. Those extensions to enter Econometrics rV students must take two extra that are particularly relevant in the economic sphere semester courses at the 300 level, and must include include the treatment of autocorrelation, lagged 301 Econometrics IIIA, 302 Applied Econometrics and relationships, qualitative variables, multicollinearity 321 Statistical Modelling amongst their options. To and heteroskedasticity. Practice will be given in the enter Operations Research IV students must take two application of various methods to realistic problems extra courses at the 300 level, and must include 351 through the use of the computer and statistical Operations Research A, 352 Operations Research B software. 202 Econometrics IIB 8 units constrained programming, stochastic programming, Coreq Econometrics IIA inventory control theory, queuing theory, simulation, Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk decision theory, and stochastic processes. The Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments theoretical material is illustrated with several Illustrates how regression models can be applied to substantial case studies and a discussion of available economic data to estimate relationships, forecast and computer software. test hypotheses that arise in economics. The links between the economics and the econometrics are Optional stressed. Consequently, it is necessary to develop Not all courses will necessarily be offered in any one mathematical models for the behaviour of economic year. agents and to illustrate how they can be translated into econometric models. A fundamental component 302 Applied Econometrics 8 units of this developmentis the discussion of unconstrained Prereq Econometrics IIB and constrained optimisation problems and of Coreq Econometrics IIIA comparative statics. The theoretical and data aspects Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk of various empirical researchpapers will be discussed, Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments and students will be required to undertake related Application of simultaneous and multivariate equation empirical work. Topics may include consumption, models to various aspects of economics. Research investment, production and cost, consumer demand, papers involving empirical research will be examined labour supply, money demand, and import functions. and students will be required to undertake related empirical work. Topics may include systems of 301 Econometrics MA 8 units consumer demand functions, systems of factor Prereq Econometrics IIA demand and output supply functions, macroeconomic Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk models, empirical general equilibrium models and Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments Monte Carlo experiments. Develops the theory of simultaneous equations and 303 Forecasting for Economics and Business multivariate regression models. Central to this 8 units development is a significant component of statistics Coreq Econometrics IIA especially as it relates to principles of estimation and Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk hypothesis testing and the distinction between finite Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments sample and asymptotic theory. This facilitates the discussion of issues such as: identification, structural The need to forecast or predict future values of versus reduced form, single and simultaneous economic time series arises frequently in many equation estimation, small and large sample branches of applied economic and commercial work. properties, testing procedures, simulation and It is, moreover, a topic which lends itself naturally to forecasting, dynamic models, and policy evaluation. econometric and statistical treatment. The specific Practice will be given in the application of various feature which distinguishes time series from other methods to economic problems. data is that the order in which the sample is recorded is of relevance. As a result of this, a substantial body Core— Operations Research of statistical methodology has developed. This course is intended to provide a first course in methods of time 351 Operations Research A 8 units series analysis and forecasting. The material covered Prereq Econometrics IIA will be primarily time domain methods designed for Classes Yr: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk a single series and will include the building of linear Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments time series models, the theory and practice of univariate The theory and application of linear programming forecasting and the use of regression methods for models to economic problems is the main concern of forecasting. Throughout the course a balance will be this course. Topics include formulation skills, maintained between theory and practical application. algorithms, duality, sensitivity analysis, parametric programming, goal programming/integer program 304 Sample Design and Analysis 8 units ming with heuristics, network models and dynamic Coreq Econometrics IIA programming. The theoretical material is illustrated Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut) /wk with several substantial case studies and a discussion Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments of available computer software. The twin problems of cost and efficiency in sampling lead to the development of different methods of 352 Operations Research B 8 units sampling (stratified, cluster, multistage, replicated Coreq Operations Research A samples, probability proportional to size) and to Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk different estimators (e.g. ratio). Non-response in a Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments survey may lead to biased estimation, and procedures Theworkof 351 is extended in two importantdirections must be developed to overcome this potential bias. with the consideration of non-linear and stochastic The analysis of survey data leads to a consideration of models. Topics include quadratic programming, the estimation of the sampling variances from complex gradient methods, separable methods, chance samples. Theuse of survey datainregressionanalysis and Chi-square tests raises several problems that are Core — Management Science addressed. Special topics may include: panels, Management Science courses are not available in 1995. sampling rare populations, optimal experimental design and telephone interviewing. 271 Management of Information Systems 8 units 321 Statistical Modelling 8 units Prereq Accounting IA and IB, Econometrics I, Economics I Prereq Econometrics IIB Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk Coreq Econometrics IIIA or Operations Research A Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments Classes Sem: (2 lec, 1 tut & 1 seminar)/wk Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments The purpose of the course is to introduce students to the growing field of information systems, their role in This course is designed specifically for students who modern management and competitive business, and are considering entering the honours year in the how to use them efficiently. Department of Econometrics. It has two components. The first of these relates to the development of a Synopsis: Database systems using dBase IV: variety of skills useful in carrying out a research introduction, creating and updating database, using project in econometrics or operations research. In a entry forms, searching and querying files, reporting, seminar format, students focus on a series of exercises commands. Information systems: computers and designed to provide experience in practical research communications technology, introduction to software concepts, data organisation and database concepts, skills. In addition students will prepare talks and computer applications in business (accounting, participate in discussion. Concurrently, students will logistics, etc.), use of computers for decision making, receive instruction in basic statistical methods decision support systems, structure of data processing including the theory of distributions and statistical applications, expert systems, the process of informa inference. These will be applied to various modelling tion systems development, the use of information situations and decision making problems in business technology to improve the competitiveness of the and economics. business. Case studies: Students will be asked to prepare case 322 Numerical Analysis 8 units studies, some of which will be discussed in class. Prereq Econometrics IIB Possible case studies: the use of personal computers in Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk business, the effect of telecommunication on the Assignment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments organisation and its links with other organisations, Numerical procedures arising frequently in the the effect of a possible failure of the information solution of quantitative economic problems are system and implications for the developmentprocess. developed in the context of illustrative applications. Topics include: techniques for the solution of non 272 Management Decision Making 8 units linear equations and systems of equations, Prereq Accounting IA and IB, Econometrics I, Economics I interpolation methods including cubic spline Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk applications, procedures for numerical integration Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments and differentiation, Fletcher Powell methods for non The course presents decision theory in a business linear optimisation and generalised Scarf algorithms management context. The object is to provide up-to- for computing economic equilibria. date information on modern decision analysis techniques and their application. The course presents 323 Decision Theory 8 units decision trees and influence diagrams as an aid to Prereq Econometrics IIB understanding a specific problem; utility theory Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk provides tools for modelling personal preferences; Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments and probability is used to represent beliefs about The principles of rational choice under uncertainty uncertainty. are evaluated. Topics studied may include: the Synopsis: Decision trees and influence diagrams, foundations of expected utility theory, the analysis of spreadsheets and decisionmodels, sensitivity analysis, the value of perfect and sampling information, and subjective probability, empirical and theoretical the principles of risk measurement, diversification probability distributions, simulation, value of and management as developed in modern finance information, risk attitudes, multiple criteria. theory. 371 Resource Allocation and Planning in 324 Special Topic 8 units Business 8 units Prereq Econometrics IIB Prereq Management of Information Systems and Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk Management Decision Making Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk A specialised topic in econometrics, operations Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments research or statistics. The topic will vary from year to The course begins with a consideration of the year. Possible topics include: multivariate analysis fundamental steady state problem in business—how and Bayesian econometrics. to meet demand forecasts or aggregate production planning. This provides a background on trade-offs 402 Specification of econometric models and allows progression to the most fundamental 403 Limited dependent variables decision tool in resource allocation, linear program 404 Applied econometrics ming. Linear programming is described and illustrated 405 Time series econometrics during the first half of the course where the emphasis 421 Static optimisation is on sensitivity analysis. In the second half the focus 422 Dynamic optimisation is on capacity planning, including capacity size, 423 Special topic. optimum expansion and contraction programs, and Some courses may be taken in related departments. geographical location. The first two parts of the course are then linked by project analysis in the context of Final Honours Year in Operations Research problem solving during the period between capacity Prereq credit average in four semester courses taken in the planning and its steady state operation. Department of Econometrics at the 300 level, but including Synopsis: Aggregate productionplanningand planning 351,352and 321 orwithpermissionof Head of Department strategies. Linear programming: geometry, standard The honours year provides basic professional expertise problem types, solutions and sensitivity analysis. in the general area of operations research, through Capacity planning — level: cost function analysis, instruction in advanced theory and experience in break-even analysis, detisionmakingunder risk, zero- independent research. one programming, integer programming. Capacity Honours students are required to (a) complete four planning — location: detailed cost analysis, factor- semester courses of instruction, (b) submit a thesis not rating systems, gravity models, location heuristics, exceeding 70 A4 pages of typescript, and (c) attend the location-allocation problem. Project planning and and participate in departmental research seminars. management: critical path method and project The thesis topic must be approved by the evaluation and review technique (CPM-PERT), department and progress reports are to be presented meeting deadlines, reducing the critical path, project every semester. cost management. Courses are normally selected from the following (not all of which may be offered in any one year): 372 Operations Management 8 units 451 Simulation Prereq Management of Information Systems and 452 Applied operations research Management Decision Making 453 Game theory Coreq Resource Allocation and Planning in Business 454 Applied general equilibrium modelling Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk 421 Static optimisation Assessment one 3hr exam, tests, assignments 422 Dynamic optimisation 423 Special topic. Most of the time there are broad options as to how to Some courses may be taken in related departments. make goods or provide services and it is necessary to be open to the options and choose pro-actively to achieve competitive advantages. This course considers Joint Honours in Econometrics or the options for production and service operations. Operations Research and Economics Students may also undertake their honours year jointly Synopsis: Productivity and competitiveness, product in the Departments of Econometrics and Economics. design and process selection, waiting line theory, Interested students should consult the Head of the quality control systems, facility and equipment Department of Econometrics or the Department of selection, facility layout, inventory control, materials Economics. requirements planning, production planning and The entry requirement is that the normal conditions control, just-in-time systems, flexible management for entry to the Final Honours Year in one of the two systems. departments are satisfied and sufficient courses at the third year level have been completed at credit level in Final Honours Year in Econometrics the other department. Prereq credit average in four semester courses taken in the The joint honours program is normally by Department of Econometrics at the 300 level, but including coursework only, with coursework split evenly 301,302 and 321 or with permission of Head of Department between the two departments. The honours year provides basic professional expertise in the general area of econometrics through instruction in advanced theory, and experience in independent research. Economic History Honours students are required to (a) complete four semester courses of instruction, (b) submit a thesis not Introduction exceeding 70 A4 pages of typescript, and (c) attend The primary aim of the department is to provide and participate in departmental research seminars. students with a firm knowledge of the process of The thesis topic must be approved by the economic change in modern industrial economies department and progress reports are to be presented during the past two centuries. Courses offered at the every semester. pass degree level provide students with the Courses are normally selected from the following opportunity to study the patterns of development list (not all of which may be offered in any one year): within a number of countries and regions including 401 Statistical foundations of econometrics the United States of America, Japan, China, Southeast Asia, Australia, Germany, France and Europe in Noticeboards general. Semester courses are also offered in Urban All information likely to be relevant to students is History, Minority Studies and the Growth of Big placed on the departmental noticeboards in the Business. Merewether Building: Students undertaking a major in economic history • outside the secretary's office (Room 392) must complete Economic History LA and LB and any • outside the Faculty Office (Room 237). four second and third year semester courses. Students who do not intend completing a major in Economic History and History economic history may take any of the second and Since 1984 the Department of Economic History has third year economic history courses without having cooperated with the Department of History in a completed Economic History LA and LB. The only program making courses in either department prerequisite is any four first year semester courses. available to students registered in the other. For Students who have not previously studied history students registered in the Department of Economic or economics will not be under any particular History, this program will enable those with special disadvantage. Further, students with interests in interests in particular fields of history to take courses mathematics, the natural and physical sciences and offered by History in those fields and that complement engineering should also give serious consideration to other courses taken in the Department of Economic attending one or several of these courses, after consul History. Students who have passed History I may tation with the appropriate heads of department, as they provide a useful understanding of the economic apply to enter second year Economic History without and social processeswhichformpartof the background taking Economic History LA and IB. Second and third 'of our scientific advance. year Economic History students may apply to take some options in History LI and ID. to be considered as Honours courses are held for those who, at the end part of, or as the whole of, the second and third year of their first year, show the ability to study the subject courses in second and third year Economic History. in greater depth. These courses last for three years and Detailed information on the program should be provide a more intensive and analytical examination obtained from the department. In all cases, students of the growth process. Most of the tuitionis by seminar wishingto take advantageof this program mustobtain or discussion classes and students are expected to the permission of the heads of department of both complete some lengthy pieces of written work. Economic History and History. Emphasis here is placed on comparative and thematic approaches. Students should make use of their training in economics and other disciplines wherever relevant. Economic History IA and IB 6 units each Students who are interested in taking any courses Classes Yr: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk offered by the department for which they do not have Assessment one 3hr exam, one 3000w essay, one 1500w tut the specified prerequisite are encouraged to discuss paper each semester their proposal with the head of the department. This course provides an introduction to the economic A fairly wide range of research work is carried out history of modern Europe, the repercussions of by the members of the department, which includes economic changes on social, political and cultural life, specialists in European, American, Australian, Asian and the spread of those developments to the non- and African economic and social history. Postgraduate European world. It begins with an overview of the studies are provided for both MEc and PhD degrees. traditional European economy, then examines the changes that affected Europe, particularly the Staff industrial revolution. Various social changes — such Professor as the growth of a new middle class, the emergence of Stephen Matthew Salsbury, AB Occidental AM PhD the proletariat and the transformation of the peasantry Harv. — will also receive attention. The course will then Appointed 1977 focus on the twentieth century. The Depression and Associate Professors the two world wars, the Russian Revolution, the Robert Aldrich, BA Emory MA PhD Brandeis creation of socialist economies, the period of growth F. Benjamin Tipton, AB Stan. AM PhD Harv. after 1945, the advent of consumer society and the (Head of Department) current economic crisis will be analysed thematically. The course then examines the historical and Senior Lecturers economic processes which brought about changes in Diane Hutchinson, BA PhD N.S. W. the economies of East Asia from 1850 to 1945. An Garry C. Wotherspoon, BCom N.S.W. MEc introduction to the major themes and theories used to Administrative Assistant explainEast Asian history and economic development Julie Manley is presented. The course then considers the economic structures and the processes of development in Location Northeast Asia 0apan, Korea and Taiwan), Southeast The department is on Level 3 of the Merewether Asia and China. The balance between the traditional Building. Enquiries, Room 392. and indigenous forces of development, on the one Registration hand/and the influence of the expanding European- centred international economy, on the other, Registration for all courses takes place in the first constitutes one of the major themes of the course. lecture of each course. The economic background to relations between century from a feudal state to an industrial superpower East Asia and the new international economic order and the social consequences of industrialisation. Topics after 1945 is examined, with emphasis placed on the discussed include: pre-Meiji developments, the roles processes of political and social changes in the region. of government and private enterprise, agricultural Topics include recent economic developments in growth, international economic relations, capital Japan, China, the newly industrialising economies formation, labour supply, structural changes, and Southeast Asia, the links between these nations population increase and urbanisation, militarist and regions, and the relationship between East Asia influences, economic fluctuations, post-war reforms and Australia. and 'explosive growth', changes in labour relations The course will not be highly technical in its and consumption patterns, the costs of growth, the oil presentation of economics and no knowledge of crises. economic theory is presumed. Issues in Modern Japanese Economic History Economic History second and third year 8 units semester courses Prereq Economic Development of Modern Japan or with the consent of the Head of Department Students in these years have a broad choice of semester courses. These are listed below. (Not all courses may This course will concentrate on the 'hidden economy' be given in any one year.) To pass a semester course, of Japan. It will deal with three overarching topics students must complete all assignments and which have implications for understanding the examinations at a satisfactory level as well as achieve underside of the Japanese economic 'miracle'. The a pass overall. The classes usually consist of three three sections are: Labour; Internationalisation of the hours per week comprising two lectures and one Economy; and Socioeconomic Aspects of the Economy. tutorial. The assessment usually consists of one three- Each section will examine historical developments in hour examination and one or two assignments. the emergence of Japanese economic practices, and Students undertaking a major in economic history the impact of these developments on the contemporary must complete Economic History IA and IB and any economy. The focus will be on the informal economy four second and third year semester courses. rather than the more mainstream, or formal, economy. Students who do not intend completing a major in The labour component will focus on women in the economic history may take any of the second and workforce and on the role of subcontractors, rather third year economic history courses without than concentrating on the labour practices employed completing Economic History IA and IB. The only by big business. The labour shortage of the late 1980s prerequisite is any four first year semester courses. and early 1990s will also be discussed as will the notion of underemployment. Economic History II Honours 8 units Theinternationalisationcomponentwill investigate Prereq Economic History IA and IB at credit level some of the reasons for, and results of, large capital movements offshore. In particular we will be Honours students are encouraged to take the two courses in Australian economic history: Early concerned with the integrity of the offshore currency Australian Economic History and Modern Australian movements, and the implications these have for other Economic History. They are also required to take a nations. The basis for the continuation of the stock year long honours seminar which will focus onresearch exchange under hostile conditions in the late 1980s is in economic history. In addition to seminar papers, also examined. Official Development Assistance, and honours students are also required to write a research the relationships between Japanese companies and essay of 5000 to 8000 words and sit the pass papers in organised crime syndicates investing in infrastructural each course. and construction projects overseas will be examined. In the socio-economic component we will consider Economic History III Honours 16 units Japan's welfare policies, the introduction of the private Prereq Economic History II Honours and two options at pension scheme, and the impact these have had on credit level society. Seen within an historical framework, this provides a means for examining the qualitative Economic History III Honours consists of a year long changes which some economic policy has brought seminar course on the history of economic and social about in Japan. ideas. This will entail the writing of seminar papers. Students will also have to present a research essay of Economic Development in Southeast Asia 8000-10 000 words. 8 units Introduction to study of Southeast Asia. Patterns of Semester courses trade pre-AD 1500. Impact of Europeans AD 1500- Social Aspects of Industrialisation in the United 1800. Main emphasis of the course on period post-AD States 8 units 1800. Spread of European colonialism and capital [Not available] investment. Emergence of 'export economies'. Response of indigenous people to economic stimuli. Economic Development of Modern Japan Dualism. The plural society. Standards of welfare. 8 units Developments in the post-colonial period up to the The main concern of this course is with the economic early 1980s. Countries selected for particular study processes that have transformed Japan over the last are Burma, Thailand, Malaysia and Indonesia. Economic Fluctuations 8 units Early A ustralian Economic History 8 units [Not available] Dr Hutchinson, Mr Wotherspoon Economic and Social History of Minority Groups This course examines the growth of the Australian 8 units economy in the century from 1788. It considers first Assoc. Prof. Aldrich, Mr Wotherspoon the shift from penal settlement to capitalism; capital accumulation, immigration, rural development and This comparative course will examine the economic economic fluctuations. Then the period 1851-88 is and social position of several minority groups in examined: gold, the long boom, railways, pastoralism, modern Australian and European history. Specifically, urbanism and trade unionism. \ it will use as case studies racial and ethnic groups (Aborigines in Australia, ethnic and regional minorities Modern Australian Economic History 8 units in Europe), migrants (both long-term migrants and Mr Wotherspoon, Dr Hutchinson guest workers), and a sexual minority (homosexuals). In interpreting the historical emergence of minority This course looks at the changing socio-economic groups and their subcultures, some attention will be fabric of Australian capitalism in the period from the given to concepts of race, ethnicity, and marginality; late 1880s. It considers structural changes in the the problems of discrimination, tolerance and economy and workforce; the pattern of urban integration will also be covered. development; economic fluctuations, especially the major depressions of the 1890s, 1930s, and now; Urban History 8 units economic policy and its failures; the impact of war on Mr Wotherspoon economy and society; twentieth century urbanisation and suburbanisation; and the post-war economy. What is urban history? Approaches to urban history. Origins of cities — evidence and theories. Pre- Economic Development of Russia and Eastern industrial cities (past and present). The impact of Europe 8 units industrialisation. Urban problem areas and their Assoc. Prof. Tipton continuing nature. Social and economic structure in the Romanov, Habsburg and Ottoman empires in the early modern The Historical Development of the Chinese period, the sources of economic development in the Economy 8 units late eighteenth and nineteenth centuries, differing Introduction to study of China. The traditional responses to economic development, decline of economy before 1840. The period 1840-1949: the roles traditional social structures and rise of new groups in of Western enterprise and indigenous entrepreneurs the late nineteenth century, the relation of nationalism in early industrialisation. The economic consequences to economic development, imperialism and war in of political and monetary instability — the Taiping southeastern Europe, the First World War, the Rebellion, warlordismin the 1920s and 1930s, Japanese revolution in Russia and Austria-Hungary, the invasion, inflation 1937-49. The establishment of the establishment of the Soviet regime and economic People's Republican 1949 and the growth of the socialist developments in the Habsburg successor states, Soviet economy to the early 1980s. The Chinese economy in planning and German economic expansion in the the general context of the Third World. 1930s, the Second World War, and post-war economic development in the Soviet Union and the socialist American Economic History 1607-1865 8 units economies of eastern Europe. Prof. Salsbury This course will discuss the growth and development Economic Development of Modern Germany of the American economy from the colonial period to 8 units the Civil War. This period saw the rise of an export- Assoc. Prof. Tipton based agricultural system and the beginnings of large- The eighteenth century tradition of state intervention scale industrialisation. Topics to be discussed include in the economy, the impact of the French Revolution both institutions such as the merchant, the banks, the and Napoleonic wars, the role of central bureaucracies corporation, the factory system and the social structure in development to 1850, the economic background to including slavery, immigration and the development the 1848 revolutions, accelerated development during of a working class. Recent interpretations by the 'new the liberal period 1850-73, the Great Depression 1873- economic historians' — Douglass North and Robert 96, imperialism, the First World War, economic Fogel among others — will be examined. problems of the Weimar Republic, the rise of fascism, the structure and development of the Nazi economic American Economic History 1865-1970 8 units system, and comparison of post-war development in Prof. Salsbury market and socialist economies in central Europe. This course will analyse various strands of American economic history: the growth of Tsig business'; the Economic History of the Mediterranean Region adjustment of the agricultural sector to the corporate 8 units society; government regulation of the economy; the Assoc. Prof. Aldrich rise of organised labour; the impact of war on the The Mediterraneanbasin was the centre of the Western economy; and the economic forces behind American economy from the classical era through the 1500s, its foreign policy. power eclipsed by the colonisation of the New World. This course will look briefly at the inheritance of Topics include the emergence of the first big classical, Byzantine and early modern empires in the businesses: the U.S. railroad companies, the marketing Mediterranean and the reasons why the area did not revolution, multinational expansion, product modernise in the same way as Western Europe during diversification, the new conglomerates, accounting the 1700s and 1800s. Then it will concentrate on the innovations, the multi-divisional structure, the rise of period since the mid-1800s: the economic and social professional managers, R&D and the transition to changes in the area, similarities and differences among institutionalised invention and innovation. the regions of the Mediterranean basin, and booms It is strongly recommended that students complete and crises in the twentieth century. Continuing links Economics I before undertaking this course. among the Mediterranean nations and the hypothesis that there exists a particular Mediterranean economy Topics in Modern European Social History will receive special attention. The course will not be 8 units technical in its presentation of economics and no Assoc. Prof. Aldrich, Assoc. Prof. Tipton knowledge of economic theory is presumed. This seminar course will examine selected topics in Economic and Social Development of Modern the social history of modern Europe. The exact topics France 8 units will vary but may include such subjects as: the Assoc. Prof. Aldrich demographic revolution in Europe, the 'standard of living' debate and the industrial revolution, the link After briefly examining the economic and social aspects between economic and political power in Europe, the of the French Revolution and the Napoleonic regime, evolution of different social groups, the no tion of class the course will look at nineteenth century developments such as the changing nature of in European history, the role of women in modern agriculture, industrialisation and political upheaval. Europe and the emergence of new social movements. Then twentieth century developments will be studied. Themes to be treated include traditional and revisionist The History of Modern European Expansion: interpretations of French economic growth, the effects The Theory and Practice of Imperialism 8 units of governmentinterventionin the economy (including This seminar course will examine European overseas the policies of the current government), the end of the expansion in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. peasantry, regionalism and the relationship between It will look at the creation of formal and informal Paris and the provinces, and the repercussions of empires and the development of the possessions, the economic change in French society and culture. The ideologies behind expansion (including economic, course will not be technical in its presentation of political, social and cultural justifications for conquest) economics and no knowledge of economic theory is and decolonisation. Emphasis will be placed on critical presumed. analysis of theories of expansion and such historiographical questions as the debate on the History of the Island Pacific since the mid-1880s economic imperative behind European expansion, 8 units the issue of 'native' collaboration and resistance, and Assoc. Prof. Aldrich the areas of 'culture and imperialism'. This course examines the history of the island Pacific Textbooks (Polynesia, Melanesia and Micronesia) since the PJ. Cain and A.G. Hopkins British Imperialism: Innovation middle of the nineteenth century, concentrating on and Expansion 1688-1914 (London, 1994) and British the impact of foreign takeover and the economic, Imperialism: Crisis and Deconstruction 1914-1990 (London, social and political development of the islands. 1993) Particular attention is given to the French territories of R. Aldrich Greater France: A Short History of French Overseas the South Pacific (French Polynesia, New Caledonia Expansion (London, 1995) and Wallis and Futuna). The role of missionaries, W.O. Henderson The German Colonial Empire, 1884-1919 traders, colonists and the military will be studied, as (London, 1993) well as the role of the Pacific colonies in the formation European Studies 201 8 units of overseas empires. The varieties of decolonisation and integration of the islands will then be discussed. Interdisciplinary approaches to the study of Attention will also focus on present-day issues and contemporary Europe controversies. Assoc. Prof. Tipton This course examines the unity and diversity of Europe Strategy and Growth of Big Business 8 units in geography, politics, economics and culture. Special Dr Hutchinson attention is given to the development of European The course analyses the transition from small family economies; the transformation of old, and the firm to large managerial corporation over the last formation of new, European states; and the problems century in the U.S., Britain and Australia. The focus is of nationalism and internationalism in the twentieth on the way firms have grown. In particular it examines century. Sociological perspectives will highlight the growth strategies firms employed, and the changes in the social composition of contemporary accompanying innovations in organisational structure European countries and related changes in cultural and information systems. The course also examines values. changes in the nature of competition which have Reading material will be made available by teaching accompanied the growth of big business. staff. European Studies 202 8 units Economic History IV Honours Interdisciplinary approaches to the study of Prereq credit in Economic History III Honours and options contemporary Europe Classes 2 seminars Assoc. Prof. Tipton, Dr Shevtsova et al. Assessment three 2000w seminar papers, one 10 000-12 O00w thesis The focus is on the period since the Second World War: the German states; economic reconstruction in This course consists of a year long seminar stream on Europe; international factors facilitating economic historiography, for which seminar papers will be integration in Western Europe (e.g. the dollar-based presented, and work under individual supervision on financial system). Attention will be given to efforts to a thesis. unite Europe economically with the formation of the supranational organisations of the 1950s, leading to the European Community (EC) and the Council for Economics Mutual Economic Assistance (CMEA): the military alliances ofNATO and the Warsaw Treaty; unity and Introduction contradictions within the EC and the relation of CMEA The Department of Economics is situated on levels 3 to the latter. The course will also examine the and 4 of the Merewether Building. Initial enquiries experience of Scandinavia, Switzerland and Austria regarding the department may be directed to the (etatism and neutrality), political transformation in general office, Room 370, tel. 351 2068, or to the Portugal, Spain and Greece, and such social and Administrative Officer, Room 339, tel. 351 3071. cultural developments as May '68, the women's Students should not hesitate to consult with members movement and glasnost in the Soviet Union. of the teaching staff if they require information about their particular subject. Coordinators for first and Textbooks second year courses are shown at the end of the staff F. B. Tipton and R. Aldrich An Economic and Social History of Europe since 1940 (Macmillan) list. Other texts to be advised The department runs courses on a yearly basis, but Contemporary material on the European Community will some sections or options forming part of a course may be made available be completed in one semester. Students enrolled in year long courses cannot get a formal result for that course until the end of the year even if the work was European Studies 301 8 units completed in the first semester. Students wishing to Topics in the study of contemporary Europe take a second semester part or option of a year long Assoc. Prof. Tipton course must enrol at the beginning of the year and not Prereq European Studies 201 and 202 at the start of the second semester. Examinations may See European Studies 302 below. be given in a particular semester or in both semesters. Precise details of the examinations, essay and other course requirements will be found in the individual European Studies 302 8 units course handouts that are distributed at the first lecture. Topics in the study of contemporary Europe Any problems with the lecture or tutorial timetable should be discussed with the coordinator of the Assoc. Prof. Tipton particular course. There are no department registration Coreq European Studies 301 procedures. European Studies at third year level is intended to The courses in the Department of Economics offer students the opportunity to pursue topics in provide a general understanding of economic analysis their individual areas of interest, drawing on the and its applications. Courses allow students a choice resources of all the participating departments. of means to qualify in one of the degrees offered in the European Studies 301 and 302 each consist of options, Faculty of Economics. All candidates for the Bachelor selected by the individual student in consultation of Economics degree must complete successfully with the Director of the Program, drawn from the pool Economics I, II and III to qualify for the degree. In of options contributed by the participating depart addition, students may also enrol in Economics I ments. Options available vary from year to year (Social Sciences), Economics II(P) and Economics flT(P). depending on the offerings of the participating Candidates for the Bachelor of Economics (Social departments. The current list of options is available Sciences) degree are required to complete two from the Director. It is the intent of the Program that economics courses. This requirement may be fulfilled the selected options should constitute a coherent body by taking Economics I and II or Economics I (Social of study, related to the student's interests and previous Sciences) and Economics IIP; provision is made for work. Selected options must total at least 8 units each transfer after the firstyear between these two streams. semester. Successful completion of European Studies Students in the BEc (Social Sciences) may continue to 301 and 302 means the successful completion of all Economics III or Economics III(P) as the case may be. requirements in all of the selected options. The Bachelor of Commerce degree requires As with European Studies 201 and 202, it is strongly Economics I or Economics I (Social Sciences) as the urged that students aim to complete a sequence of minimum, but anyone wishing to pursue a career in study in a European language in addition to their economics would be advised to take as many work in European Studies. economics courses as possible. It should be noted that Economics II is a corequisite Louis Haddad, BEc course for the finance and marketing courses. Students Joseph Halevi, DottFil Rome beginning academic studies in the University of Evan Jones, BCom Melb. MA PhD Mich. Sydney should consider seriously the benefitsof taking Surinder Joson, MA MA(Econ) Punj'i PhD a major in economics whether in the regular or P Anthony J. Phipps, BSc(Econ) MSc Lond. PhD Strath. studies programs. Majors can be taken in the Faculties Stuart Rosewarne, BCom MA Melb. PhD of Arts and Agriculture as well as in the various Bruce W. Ross, BA N.S.W. degrees of the Faculty of Economics. This means Russell T. Ross, MCom Auck. MA PhD Duke considerable scope for linking an economics major with history, languages and philosophy as well as Elizabeth Savage, BSc(Arch) MSc Lond. professional topics such as accounting. Most Yards Varoufakis, BA PhD Esse* MSc Wham importantly, students with strong interests and Donald Wright, BEc Add. MEc Monash PhD Br.Col. revealed skills in the discipline should seriously Lecturers consider taking the four year honours degree in one John Carson, MEc Monash PhD or other program. Pamela Cawthorne, BSc (Econ) Lond. MSc Bath PhD Honours students are given an opportunity to study Open economics for four years and generally transfer to an Dilip Dutta, MA Calc. PhD Calif. honours course after obtaining a credit or better in the Graham K. White, BCom N.S.W. MEc PhD Melb. appropriate prerequisite course or, in special Steffen Ziss, BA W.Ont. MA PhD Qu. circumstances where such a grade is not obtained, Associate Lecturers with permissionof the Head of Department. As already Sally Auld, BEc indicated, an honours degree is well worth having Verity Carney, BEc(SocSc) and provides an excellent start for employment, Andrew Clarke, BA particularly in areas such as government and finance, Matthew Cumberworth, BCom N.S. W. MA Qu. as well as being an almost essential foundation for Peter Docherty, MEc DipBibStud M.T.C. postgraduate courses in the subject at this University Ravjeet Kaur, MA MPhil Delhi and elsewhere. Peter Kell, BEc Matriculating students who have not completed 2 Suk-Joong Kim, BEc Macq. MEc unit mathematics at the Higher School Certificate are Genevieve Knight, BEc not denied entry to any economics course but a Gabrielle Meagher, BEc(SocSc) reasonable knowledge of mathematics is assumed in first year courses. Those matriculants with strong Paul Oslington, BEc Macq. MEc qualifications in mathematics would be advised to Michael Plumb, BEc take mathematics courses because they may reinforce Matthew Smith, BCom Melb, MEc skills in economic theory and econometrics. Yu Ming Yung, BEc Honorary Appointment Noticeboards Emeritus Professor Check foyer for Economics I and II course notices; C.G.F. Simkin, MA DipSocSci N.Z. DPhil Oxf., FASSA opposite the Faculty office for Economics HI and the Social Sciences courses (as well as near room 426); or Administrative staff other designated boards throughout the year for Head of Department general information. Warren Hogan Director ofP Studies Academic staff Gavan Butler Professors Peter Diderik Groenewegen, PhD Lond. MEc, FASSA Administrative Officer Appointed 1980 Peter Clarke Warren Pat Hogan, MA N.Z. PhD A.N.U. HonDSc Administrative Assistants N'cle(N.S.W.) Eleanor Armstrong Appointed 1968 Valerie Jones Jennifer B.S. Scott Associate Professors Debesh Bhattacharya, MA Calc. PhD Computer Systems Officer DiplAdvEconDevel Mane. Chris Rauchle, BA N.E. Flora Gill, BA Jerusalem PhD Stan. Course Coordinators Jeffrey Sheen, BSc Cape T. MS Essex PhD Lond. Economics I: Peter Docherty, Room 380, tel. 351 4776 Frank J.B. Stilwell, BScS'ton PhD R'dg Economics II: Genevieve Knight or Matthew Smith, Judith N. Yates, BEc A.N.U. DrEcSc Amst. Room 358, tel. 351 3060 Senior Lecturers Economics I (Social Sciences): Frank Stilwell, Room Anthony Aspromourgos, BEc Qld MCom Melb. MA 450, tel. 3513063 Ozzc.PhD Economics II(P): Gavan Butler, Room 432, tel. 351 3666 Richard H. Bryan, MEc Monash DPMI Sus. The Australian Economy: Surinder Joson, Room 337, Gavan J. Butler, MAgrSc Melb. PhD Calif. tel. 351 3064 Economics I 12 units IA.2 Firms, Market Structures and Industry AKn HSC Mathematics 2unit course Supply and Demand (5 weeks) including: Classes Yr: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk — lectures are repeated • industry demand and supply curves; supply Economics I is a regular economics course generally elasticity covering macro and microeconomics. Economics I is a • short run and long run cost curves compulsory core course for both the Bachelor of • profit maximisation and supply curves Economics degree (BEc) and for the Bachelor of • perfect competition and monopoly; introduction to Commerce degree (BCom). oligopoly and imperfect competition As economic issues are pervasive in contemporary • applications and policy Australian society, politics and public debate, some • controversies and alternative views. would contend that economic theory provides the unifying basis for explaining all social phenomena IA.3 Income Distribution, Factor Pricing and and, therefore, also for all public policy. Hence, Employment (3 weeks) including: whatever one's career intentions, coming to grips • price flexibility, competition and equilibrium in with economic ideas is essential for understanding factor markets society, business and government. • marginal productivity theory and Euler's theorem 9 wage determination and labour markets Economics I provides a comprehensive introduction to these ideas and also prepares the student for the • capital, interest and profits; introduction to advanced study of economics in subsequent years. expectations Beginning with an historical account of ho w, during • the microeconomics of factor pricing and the last three centuries, sometimes contradictory employment, in relation to macroeconomics economic ideas were generated by economists working • applications and policy in the evolving economic environment, the student is • controversies and alternative views. introduced to the dominant contemporary theory. The examination of this theory begins with a IB.1 Aggregate Expenditures, Outputs and behavioural model of how individuals, firms, Employment (4 weeks) including: institutions, etc. make choices concerning the allocation • national accounting identities of scarce resources among competing uses. On the • 2,3,4 sector income expenditure models basis of this model, a comprehensive explanation of • macroeconomic equilibrium balances price determination and income distribution is built. • fiscal policy and other multipliers This account is interspersed with discussion of • inflation and income-expenditure models criticisms of this approach and alternative views of • applications and policy the economic problem and the determinants of income • controversies and alternative views. distribution and prices. IB.2 Output, Employment, Interest and Money (5 This is followed by an examination of the determina tion of overall levels of production and employment weeks) including: in an economy, including the influence of the public • product market equilibrium (IS) sector and foreign trade. This analysis is then integrated • money demand, money supply and interest (LM) with a treatment of money, interest rates and financial • money supply multipliers • IS-LM and inflation markets which enables a deeper consideration of inflation, unemployment and economic policy. • introduction to Phillips Curve analysis (see Module IIB.l) Finally, the course examines fundamental contro • introduction to open economy IS-LM (see Module versies in economic policy and theory, e.g. the IIB.2) respective roles of markets and governments, causes of and cures for inflation, the explanation of income • applications and policy distribution. • controversies and alternative views. A summary of the course is as follows: IB.3 Fundamental Issues in Economic Analysis Introduction (1 week) including: and Policy (4 weeks) including: • the historical background to modern economics • role of markets in relation to resource allocation; • overview of the course. competing claims and their reconciliation • role of government and governmental agencies in IA.1 Constrained Optimisation and the production, distribution, demand and inflation. Foundations of Demand and Supply (5 weeks) Textbooks and reference books including: Information will be provided at the beginning of the year • the concept of constrained individual optimisation • optimal consumer choice and individual commodity demand curves Economics I (Social Sciences) 12 units • income and substitution effects; normal and inferior Prereq and Coreq nil commodities; elasticity Classes Yr: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk — lectures are repeated • production and optimal choice of technique This is an introductory course in economics • production and cost emphasising the relationship between economic, social • applications and policy and political issues. It explores the nature of economic • controversies and alternative views. analysis and alternative perspectives on economic policy, economic class and gender inequalities and • international economic relations: trade, investment the problems of economic development. The course is and finance designed both as a self-contained course and as a basis • growth and dependency; imperialism for further studies in political economy, notably • economic development and North-Southinequality Economics II(P), Economics III(P) and Economics • economic development and the state. (Social Sciences) Honours. Tutorials: A single stream, running in parallel to the The course is not mathematically oriented. It is lectures with topics focusing on key concepts emerging based on a liberal educational philosophy, whereby in the development of economic thought: comparative students are introduced to the major competing advantage; the nature and origin of profit; consumer currents of thought within the discipline and their sovereignty; competition and monopoly; effective application to current economic problems. It also has demand and unemployment; economic growth; overall integration and coherence as a course in sustainability and economic crisis. economics from a social science perspective. Assessment: The whole course is examined at the end STRUCTURE OF LECTURE TOPICS of the second semester: there is no examination at the Part A: The Economic Problem end of the first semester. Assessment is based on a An introduction to important changes taking place in combination of coursework, tutorial performance and the world economy and the national economy and exams, with some individual student choice of the corresponding economic problems. relative weighting. • economic means and social ends; plan and market Reference books • the changing capitalist world order D. Fusf eld The Age of the Economist 6th edn (Scott Foresman • national economic performance and structural & Co.) is recommended reading for first semester. change Suggested references and sets of readings will be available • economic systems and economic analysis. at the beginning of each semester
Part B: The Development of Economic Thought The Australian Economy1 12 units An overview of the development of economics, Classes Yr: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk emphasising key concepts, important controversies, the context in which they arose and their continuing This terminating course provides a comprehensive relevance. treatment of the workings of the Australian economy. • classical political economy The emphasis in this course is on applied themes with theory introduced only where necessary to sustain the • Marxist economics • neoclassical economics analysis. The aim is to show the interdependencies • the institutionalist tradition between the main sectors of the Australian economy • the Keynesian revolution and the rest of the world. The course offers a broad • the neoclassical synthesis appraisal of how the Australian economy operates • monetarism and the economics of the new right and the main policy issues bearing upon it. • the concerns of contemporary political economy. The main sections of the course are as follows: 1. Australia in an international economic setting Part C: Contemporary Economic Policy Issues 2. National economic structure: and their Analytical Foundations (a) national income and expenditure An examination of how particular aspects of orthodox (b) financial flows economic analysis are applied to the formulation of 3. Foreign sector and the balance of payments economic policy. 4. Financial activity: institutions and markets • contemporary economic problems: how are they 5. Business sector: incorporated and unincor interpreted? porated business enterprises and their markets • the role of markets: goods markets and labour 6. Government sector: federal and state functions markets on revenue and expenditure, and the provision • the role of the state: issues of efficiency and equity. of services 7. Households: composition and distribution of Part D: Economic Inequality: Class, Gender and income and expenditure Power 8. Labour markets and wage determination An examination of distributional issues, emphasising 9. Policies for development: the interacting dimensions of class and gender, with (a) agriculture particular attention to recent structural economic (b) resources changes. (c) industry: manufacturing and services • distributional inequalities 10. Economic policy: • class and gender; capitalism and patriarchy (a) goals and instruments • domestic labour, wage labour, reproduction (b) policy issues and controversies • economic inequality and the state. 11. Prospects for development.
Part E: International Economic Relations An introduction to international economic relations ^his course cannot be counted towards a degree if taken after the and the North-South problem. completion of Economics II or Economics II(P). Reference books • comparative advantage and II-O-S Australian Year Book (ABS current edition) • applications and policy F.H. Gruen (ed.) Surveys of Australian Economics (Allen & • controversies and alternative views. Unwin, current edition) State of Play: The Australian Economy Today (Allen & Unwin)IIA. 2 Advanced Topics in Microeconomic Theory An Indecs Economics Special Report including: • choice under risk and uncertainty Economics II 16 units • expected utility theory Prereq Economics I. Students who have completed Economics • interdependent economic decisions and strategic I (SocSc) may transfer to Economics II upon passing a choice special examination arranged by the department. • oligopoly and game theory Classes Yr: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk — lectures are repeated once • applications and policy The first semester is primarily microeconomics and • controversies and alternative views. covers applications and extensions of the theory of consumer choice; firmbehaviour and market structure; HA.3 From Microeconomics to Macroeconomics factor demand and supply; general equilibrium; including: welfare economics; intertemporal choice; behaviour • microeconomics of consumption, saving and under uncertainty; and the role of government. interest (intertemporal) choice Applications of the theory will be developed during • theories of investment; the role of expectations the course to allow students to gain an appreciation of • consumption, investment and macroeconomics the way in which microeconomic theory provides • the microfoundations of macroeconomics insights into economic behaviour and market • applications and policy phenomena. Some emphasis will be given to trade • controversies and alternative views. theory, drawinguponits microeconomic foundations. The microfoundations of macroeconomics are IIB.1 Unemployment and Inflation including: explained in a way that may help you to understand • IS-LM and the labour market the widespread interest and pitfalls in theorising about • AD/ AS models aggregate phenomena. Specific macroeconomic • short run and long run Phillips Curves relationships, covering consumption, investment, • theories of unemployment money and employment, are explored. • the quantity theory, monetarism and other theories The second semester is mainly concerned with of inflation and deflation macroeconomics and begins with an overview of first • applications and policy year analysis. This part of the course develops models • controversies and alternative views. of the goods, money and labour markets, and in this context examines issues in macroeconomic policy. IIB.2 International Finance and The Open Macrodynamic relationships, especially those linking Economy including: inflation and unemployment, are considered in some • open economy IS-LM with fixed and flexible detail. Exchange rates and open economy macro exchange rates (see 1B.2) economics are addressed so introducing questions of • open economy AD/AS models both theory and policy. The lectures include an • foreign exchange markets and parities examination of Australian economic policy in relation • inflation and the open economy to balance of payments performance and foreign debt. • keynesianism, monetarism and the open economy In the last part of the course topics include the • applications and policy determinants and theories of economic growth, • controversies and alternative views. productivity and technology, the dynamics of the business cycle, countercyclical policy and the IIB.3 Growth and Economic Policy including: relationship between micro and macro policy in the • introduction to growth theory context of recent Australian experience. • structural adjustment and micro policy, in an open In each semester, you will receive separate handouts economy that give details on topics, readings and tutorial/ • pros and cons of counter-cyclical policy; rules vs. seminar questions. discretion • micro policy, macro policy and economic growth Textbooks and reference books • the relation between micro and macro policy Information will be provided at the beginning of the year • controversies and alternative views. A summary of the course is as follows: IIA.1 General, Equilibrium, Welfare and Economics II Honours 24 units International Trade including: Prereq credit or higher grade in Economics I or as otherwise • recapitulation of Module 1A.1 provided by resolution of the Faculty of Economics • 2 x 2 general competitive equilibrium This course comprises two parts. The first part is a • welfare axioms and market failure separate (but not additional) set of lectures based • social choice and Arrow Impossibility Theorem upon the curriculum for Economics II, supported by a • 2x2x2 general equilibrium with trade seminar for one hour each week. The content of lectures • trade and welfare will reflect a more comprehensive treatment of the topics providing more extensive critiques of the main economy; of gender, race and exploitation; of the themes. The seminars are intended to support this environment question. more critical appraisal of topics. The second par t of the course, being the quantitative //. Recent debates in Marxist and Neo Marxist componentof Economics HHonours, will bedescribed theory as Quantitative Economics I. It comprises one lecture • modern theories of surplus per week plus a tutorial/workshop of one hour per • the question of monopoly week. The syllabus is as follows: • forces determining distribution of income between workers and capitalists; and distribution of Revision and strengthening of knowledge of basic investible surplus between enterprises and algebra and calculus; constrained optimisation; corporations; feminist arguments regarding expansion on concepts of limit, continuity and distribution differentiability, and on set concepts and convexity, in • Neo-Marxist international economic relations: n-dimensional space. Revision: simple linear unequal exchange; neo-imperialism, dependency regression model (OLS), multiple regression; theory and underdevelopment; world systems regressionanalysis and analysis of variance (ANOVA). • crisis theories: underconsumption; the falling rate Consequences of violations of the assumption of the of profit theory; crisis in the international monetary classical linear regression model (CLR) (biased system estimators, heteroscedasticity auto correlation, • theories of the state in Marxist and Neo-Marxist multicollinearity); dummy variables; lagged variables; traditions identification; simultaneous equation models; • other currents of economic analysis: Post- forecasting. Keynesianism and the French regulationist school.
Economics li(P) 16 units The Contemporary Economy: Origins, Structure Prereq Economics I (Social Sciences). Students who have and Evolution (second semester) completed Economics I may transfer to Economics H(P) This unit introduces students to an examination of the upon passing a special examination arranged by the modern economy conceived more broadly than it is in department the first unit. It deals not only with impersonal forces Classes Yr: (3 lec & 1 seminar)/wk structured through the market mechanism and the social division of labour, but with more conscious The Surplus Approach in Political Economy social action throughkey institutions such as business, (first semester) unions, government instrumentalities and the family. Understanding the capacity of an economy to produce The activities of production, exchange and distribution a surplus is a central issue in economic analysis. How are considered within an extensive context of political is an economic surplus generated? What forms does it and cultural influences, and crisis tendencies are take, how is it distributed and for what purposes is it contrasted with the processes which have worked to used? These are key questions in analysing the func create economic stability and social order. The tioning of the modern capitalist economy, how it economic system charted in second semester is put grows, why it experiences crises, and why there are into a clear historical perspective and its dynamics are marked inequalities in the distributions of wealth and explicitly examined. Case studies are drawn upon to income bothnationallyandinternationally.Moreover, illustrate the forces at work. The three main sections of within the context of the surplus approach it is possible the unit are as follows: to explore, for example, the notion of modern capital /. Development of the economy ism and the changing role of the state in economic • evolution of the nation state, commodity production management. and the domestic sphere of the economy; the In introducing students to the surplus approach to formation of economic communities: industrial, political economy, Economics IIP builds particularly commercial and financial centres; urbanisation/ on the contribution of Marxist theory and explores suburbanisation and consumption modern developments in political economy based on • the linkages between the public and private spheres thaf tradition. The first half of the program (I) involves of the economy materials and social (class and a critical appreciation of Marxist value theory in its gender) bases of these linkages. historical context as well as in contemporary ,t application. This is followed (II) by a consideration of //. Structural dimensions of theeconomy more recent debates which have emerged within a • the organisation of production and consumption Marxist and neo-Marxist tradition, as well as of so- • institutional foundations of the economy: markets called 'post Keynesianism' which also has a clear link and the social division of labour; state, business, to-Marxism (particularly through Kalecki). A labour and unions, the family discussion of the role of the state in the generation and • cultural and ideological influences distribution of surplus will be a central consideration. • environmental constraints and the social construction of nature: regional, national and /. Value theory and its contemporary application international dimensions. • preamble: the surplus approachin political economy • the Marxian approach to history and economy ///. The evolution of the economy • capitalist production • the central significance of evolution and qualitative • particular Marxian conceptions: of the international transformation • material and social contradictions: contradictions at the application of concepts and techniques for within the accumulation process; contradictions analysis. between the public and private spheres; contra The list of options shown below is based generally dictions within the international political economy upon successful performance in Economics H though • the reconstruction of economic stability and social some options listed below provide for entry from order. Economics II(P). Not all these options will be offered Reference books in any one year or repeated in both semesters of an There is no textbook for this course. Suggested references academic year. The available options will be and sets of readings will be available at the beginning of announced prior to the beginning of the academic each semester year and any changes prior to the start of the second semester. Economics ll(P) Honours 24 units Option Prerequisite Prereq Economics I (Social Sciences) (pass with credit or HI.01 International Trade: Theory and Policy — better) or as otherwise provided by resolution of the 02 International Finance and Open — Faculty of Economics Economy Macroeconomics — Classes Yr: (3 lec, 1 tut & 1 seminar)/wk 03 Business Enterprise — The course Economics II(P)Honours consists of the 04 Corporate Structure and Strategy — normal course Economics II(P) plus an additional 05 History of Economics: Classical seminar program and an additional long essay. The Economics — additional seminar program involves a seminar of 06 History of Economics: Modern one hour per week throughout the year. While there is Developments 1860-1960 — no additional examination of material covered in the 07 Financial Economics — seminar program, contributions to the program are 08 Applied Corporate Finance HI.07 assessable, as is the additional essay. 09 Industrial Organisation — This course is designed for those students who 10 Australian Industry Policy — wish to proceed eventually to the fourth (honours) 11 Contemporary Economic Issues — year in Economics (Social Sciences), or who simply 12 Capital and Distribution — wish to do more advanced work in political economy 13 Monetary Economics — in their second and third years of study. In general the 14 Economic Growth — course is taken only by students who have obtained a 15 Public Finance A: Taxation and pass at credit level or better in Economics I (Social Revenue — Sciences), but other students may make application 16 Public Finance B: Public Expenditure 111.15 for special entry through the Director of P courses. 17 Labour Economics A — The seminar topics are designed to introduce 18 Labour Economies B HI.17 students to some of the major debates in theories of 19 Economic Systems — contemporary political economy and economic policy. 20 Strategy, Risk and Rationality — 21 Bargaining, Contracts and Social Economics III 16 units Choice IH.20 Prereq Economics II unless otherwise shown with each 22 Health Economics — option 23 Housing Economics — Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk per option 24 Monetary Policy and the Australian Candidates are required to take/our options from the Financial System — list of options approved for this course. 25 Financial Markets and Instruments — The purpose of this course is to offer students scope 26 Financial Intermediation in.25 for developing interests in particular spheres following required courses in the first two years. Each option Note: For each course semester timing will be comprises two one-hour lectures per week for one announced at the beginning of the academic year. semester. Each candidate will be expected to satisfy examiners at an examination, held at the end of each Students who have completed Quantitative semester. Economics I as part of Economics II Honours may be Subject to restrictions imposed by prerequisites, a permitted to take Quantitative Economics II, being candidate may take the necessary number of options part of Economics III Honours in lieu of two options to qualify for completion of Economics III during one for Economics III, should they not be enrolled in or other semester. The recommended procedure is to Economics III Honours. take two options in each semester. Students may substitute one option in the list of Some options are linked by a prerequisite of an options for Economics III(P) for two options in option in Semester 1 before attempting an option in Economics III. Semester 2. Other options may be linked in a sequence These provisions for substitution apply for 1995 but there is no compulsion to follow that pattern. but may not apply in subsequent years. The treatment of policy themes is a requirement for Any two of these Economics III options are all the options wherever the subject lends itself to such equivalent to one option in Economics III(P). The interpretations and development of ideas aboutpolicy. descriptions of these options are shown in the This approachis deemed central to the ways of looking Economics III(P) section of this handbook. Economics III options in 1995 system and the mechanism of international The position with options in 1995 will be as follows: adjustment; the number of options to be offered will be determined 5. macroeconomic policy in an open economy on an administrative basis reflecting priority in and issues in international economic policy. allocation of staff to maintain required courses at the Textbooks undergraduate and postgraduate levels. To be advised Economics 111.01: International Trade: Theory Economics 111.03: Business Enterprise and Policy Prereq Economics II or II(P) This course provides a systematic analysis of the theory of international trade and trade policy. It This course is concerned with the economics of business addresses some fundamental questions. Why do enterprise. It begins with an examination of classical countries trade and what are the gains from trade? Is and modern analyses of the role of the entrepreneur there a role for protection? What is the role of GATT and attributes of the entrepreneurial personality. It and what are the effects of the world dividing up into then considers theories of business organisation and regional trading blocs such as the EC and possibily the concept of agency, focusing on the resolution of APEC? conflicts between managers and shareholders. Contests for corporate control are the theme of the Initially, differences between countries are concluding section of the course, with emphasis on emphasised as the source of trade and the gains from the motivation for and effect of hostile takeovers and trade. Models which are examined include the leveraged buyouts. Classical-Ricardianmodel,fheHeckscher-Ohlinrnodel and the Specific-Factors model. Next, economics of scale and imperfect competition are introduced as Economics 111.04: Corporate Structure and sources of trade and gains from trade. The section on Strategy the theory of international trade concludes with an Prereq Economics II or H(P) examination of empirical studies aimed at testing This course commences with a discussion of the trade theories. The analysis of trade policy begins evolution of the modern business enterprise, with with a discussion of the instruments of trade policy, in specific attention to U-f orm, M-f orm and conglomerate particular, tariffs and quotas and their effect on welfare. organisational structures. It then examines aspects of This discussionis then extended to the case of imperfect strategic decision-making, including issues of internal competition and strategic trade policy. The course vs external growth and diversification vs strategic concludes with an analysis of trading blocs. focus. The final section is devoted to Asian corporate structure and strategy. The major focus here is on Textbooks distinctive features of the Japanese corporation, with To be advised attention also given to corporate forms and strategies Economics 111.02: International Finance and in other Asian economies. Open-Economy Macroeconomics This course examines the international economy with Economics III. 05: History of Economics: particular reference to: Classical Economics 1. the principles governing the operation of the Prereq Economics II or H(P) international monetary system; and This course deals with the classical economics system 2. the role, significance and methods of as it emerged during the seventeenth and eighteenth international finance. centuries to come to fruitionin England in the contents It is designed to provide an understanding of of Smith's Wealth of Nations (1776), Ricardo's Principles macroeconomic analysis and policy in an inter of Political Economy (1817) and ultimately, Marx's nationally integrated economy; global economic Capital (1867). Two weeks of lectures each are devoted adjustment; and international money and globally to these major authors. Theremainingfourteenlectures integrated financial markets. Current issues of are devoted to the foundations of classical economics significance for discussion may include: Australia's in mercantilism and in moral/political philosophy, to current account deficit and foreign debt; the choice of some specific forerunners (Petty, Locke, Cantillon exchange rate regime; the EuropeanMonetary System and Hume, Quesnay, Turgot and Stuart) and some and the international debt crisis. major writers between Smith and Ricardo (namely, Topics covered include: Malthus and James Mill). Emphasis in lectures is on 1. the variety of international financial their contributions to the theories of value, distribution instruments; the behaviour of international and growth. This course provides a useful introduction financial flows and their relation to foreign to History of Economics (Modern Developments 1860- exchange markets and exchange rates; 1960) and supplements work done by students in 2. the absorption, elasticities and monetary European and English economic history. approaches to the determination of the balance of international payments, under fixed and Textbook There is no suitable text for this course. A detailed reading flexible exchange rates; guide is provided at the start of lectures. Students 3. portfolio balance approaches to exchange rates intending to take the two History of Economics courses and the current account balance; could usefully purchase William J. Barber A History of 4. the organisation of the international monetary Economic Thought (Penguin, 1967) — still in print Economics 111.06: History of Economics: Modern 3. Capital structure and the cost of capital Developments 1860-1960 4. Dividend policy: theory and evidence Prereq Economics II or II(P) 5. Mergers, restructuring and corporate control This course examines the modern developments in 6. International financial management. economics flowing from two major shifts in research Textbooks programs which took place after 1860. The first is the Copeland and Weston Financial Theory and Corporate Policy marginalist theory which gained ascendancy from the 3rd edn (Addison-Wesley, 1988) 1890s; the second is the development of Copeland and Weston Student Solutions Manualfor Financial macroeconomics which grew out of the Keynesian Theory and Corporate Policy 3rd edn (Addison-Wesley, revolution of the 1930s. The former attempted to 1988) provide a general theory of prices in the goods and factor markets as well as of the level of output as a Economics 111.09: Industrial Organisation whole within a general supply/demand framework. The semester will reflect the following topics: This was developed within a general equilibrium 1. Theory of the firm (Walras/Pareto) and partial equilibrium framework 2. Competition, monopoly and externalities (Marshall/Pigou). Its starting point in England was 3. Dominant firm with a competitive fringe criticism of the classical system as developed by John 4. Cartels Stuart Mill in his Principles of Political Economy, 5. Non-cooperative oligopoly revealing some inconsistencies in that framework 6. Product differentiation and monopolistic which became the point of departure for Jevons and competition Marshall. The course examines these developments 7. Limitpricing,predationandstrategic behaviour and subsequent work in capital theory, distribution 8. Price discrimination theory, welfare economics and the theory of the firm. 9. Nonlinear pricing In addition, it looks at the Keynesian revolution in its 10. Vertical restrictions and vertical integration various manifestations and developments in growth 11. Information, advertising and disclosure and cycle theory by the writers (Schumpeter, Hicks/ 12. Durability Harrod). Although History of Economics (Classical 13. Patents and technological change Economics) provides a useful introduction to this 14. Regulation and antitrust policy. course, it is not a prerequisite. The course is free Textbook standing and suitable for all those interested in learning D.W. Carlton and J.M.Perloff Modern Industrial Organization about the intellectual foundations of contemporary (Harper Collins, 1990) economics. Economics III. 10: Australian Industry Policy Textbook There is no suitable text for this course. A detailed reading This course examines aspects of industry policy in the is provided at the start of lectures. Students taking the context of the international competitiveness of two History of Economics courses may usefully purchase Australian industry. It examines industry assistance William J. Barber A History of Economic Thought (Penguin, and the prevalence of foreign multinationals in 1967) — still in print Australia. Attention is also given to industry regulation, trade practices legislation, privatisation Economics 111.07: Financial Economics and microeconomic reform. A distinctive feature of The semester will reflect the following topics: the course is the strong emphasis on the changing 1. Inter-temporal choice and capital markets: the structure of Australian industry and on policies aimed certainty case at developing high-technology industries. 2. Investment decisions and capital budgeting: the certainty case Economics 111.11: Contemporary Economic 3. Theory of choice under uncertainty Issues 4. State preference theory This option treats contemporary economic issues 5. Mean — variance uncertainty emphasising the Australian experience though not to 6. Asset pricing models the exclusion of international economic issues. 7. Contingent claims Attention is devoted to policy issues and experiences 8. Futures contracts and markets. so that economic performance is matched against Textbooks policy prescriptions. This means a heavy reliance on Copeland and Weston Financial Theory and Corporate Policy official papers to explore the policy announcements 3rd edn (Addison-Wesley, 1988) and books and journals for critical appraisals. Copeland and Weston Student Solutions Manualfor Financial Topics to be treated in this option reflect concerns Theory and Corporate Policy 3rd edn (Addison-Wesley, for macroeconomic features of the Australian 1988) experience including historical perspectives on contemporary issues. With such a setting the current Economics 111.08: Applied Corporate Finance economic position may be placed in the context of Prereq Economics 111.07 policy developments over previous decades. The semester will reflect the following topics: Other topics may include employment and 1. Efficient capital market unemployment, balance of payments on current 2. Tests of semi-strong and strong form capital account and capital account including matters about market efficiency debt and equity financing, the role and function of international capital markets, the free trade and policy are analysed in tandem. Throughout this course, protection themes, investment and structural change, we relate the development of the theory of empirical trading structures with exports and imports, issues in studies and the evolution of financial institutions. banking and financial markets, and immigration and The following textbooks have been used in recent population. years: F. Mishkin The Economics of Money, Banking and Financial Economics III. 12: Capital and Distribution Markets 3rd edn (Harper Collins, 1992) Prereq Economics II or II(P) M. Kohn Money, Banking and Financial Markets 2nd edn (The Throughout the history of economics, theories about Dryden Press, 1993) the forces which govern income distribution in a with a supplementary reference being: B. McCallum Monetary Economics, Theory and Policy (Maxwell capitalist economy have been intimately bound up Macmillan International Editions, 1989) with the concept of 'capital'; in particular, its definition and measurement and how this concept relates to the Economics III. 14: Economic Growth determination of prices in a capitalist economy. The Prereq Economics II or II(P) purpose of this course is to examine the modern This course deals critically with growth economics. version of the classical approach to capital and The complexity of economic growth is so great that a distribution and also to draw out its wider implications single approach which tries to incorporate all the for the theory of output and employment and for dynamic and structural complications would be economic policy. incomprehensible. Accordingly, a variety of growth The major topics covered are: models have been constructed, each examining some 1. The Modern Classical Approach to Capital, small selection of dynamic forces. A critical review of Distribution and the Rate of Profit: circular some of those economics and models will be provided production processes; the relation between with major emphasis on 'new' growth theories which relative prices, the rate of profit and the real attempt to accommodate structural change, innovation wage; income distribution and the choice of and human learning. The current revival of growth technique; economics, after an eclipse of almost two decades, is 2. Extensions of the Modern Classical Approach both timely and important. It is now increasingly to Capital and Distribution: rents and non recognised that intelligent macroeconomic policies renewable resources; joint production, fixed have to be formulated in the context of a growing capital and distribution; exogenous influences economy over the medium or long-term period. The on distribution; disequilibrium pricing and course is recommended to students interested in stability of equilibriumin the classical approach growth economics, structural change and to value and distribution; macroeconomic policy. 3. Capital, Distribution and Economic Theory: A Wider Perspective: mar ginalist views of capital General references and distribution and the choice of technique; L.L. Pasinetti Structural Economic Dynamics (CambridgeU.P., controversy in capital theory and the critique of 1993) demand and supply approaches to distribution; J. Halevi etaZ. (eds) Beyond the Steady State (Macmillan, 1992) capital, distribution, effective demand and the G.M. Crossman and E. Helpman Innovation and Growth in the theory of output and employment; value, Global Economy (MIT Press, 1991) distribution and economic policy. Economics 111.15: Public Finance A: Taxation Textbook and Revenue To be advised The semester will reflect the following topics: 1. Welfare economics and public finance Economics III. 13: Monetary Economics 2. Taxation: theory This course surveys the role of money in historical and 3. Public utility pricing modern theories of monetary economics. The main 4. The Australian revenue system. focus is on monetary aspects of macroeconomic modelling and policy. We begin with some micro Textbook foundations of money demand and supply. We J.E. Stiglitz Economics of the Public Sector 2nd edn (Norton, describe popular macro models, showing how money 1988) manifests itself through interest rate, wealth and Economics III. 16: Public Finance B: Public inflation effects. This leads to an analysis of the causes Expenditure and consequences of inflation and then to a discussion Prereq Economics 111.15 of the theory of expectations and their use in various models, e.g. Monetarist, New Classical and New The semester will reflect the following topics: Keynesian. Various issues may be considered such as 1. Welfare economics and public finance debt neutrality, fiscal policy and inflation, credibility 2. Public goods in the context of optimal monetary policy, the efficiency 3. Public choice theory of asset markets, the theory of the term structure of 4. Externalities interest rates, and the problem of instruments, targets 5. The Australian expenditure system. and goals of monetary policy. The course integrates Textbook closed and open economy issues — for example, J.E. Stiglitz Economics of the Public Sector 2nd edn (Norton, interest rate policy and foreign exchange intervention 1988) * Economics III. 17: Labour Economics A The course is divided into two major parts. Part I Prereq Economics II or II(P) consists of a general theoretical framework for This is a practically oriented course which aims to classifying and analysing economic systems, using as provide an understanding of labour markets issues— far as possible a system-free terminology (free from work conditions, pay and employment levels. Whether bias). The aims of this part of the course are to define you are interested in the functioning of the individual precisely the nature and structure of contemporary firm, the national economy or issues of equity and economic systems and to develop an alternative social justice, an understanding of how labour markets classification of the world's economies to the work is essential. A range of economic theories will be conventional classifications which have become examined, some of which also draw on industrial increasingly obsolete labels for describing the relations. The emphasis will be on practical issues, on fundamental properties and modus operandi of modern the realities of the Australian situation, and current economies. Part II examines the dynamic development issues. Among these are the complexissue of enterprise of economic systems and their chronological bargaining, what role if any should more centralised relationship, focusing on the evolution of market wage fixing systems have, skill acquisition and access economies and the transition from centrally planned to jobs, efficiency and equity functions of labour unions to market-oriented economies. and employer associations, and the question of how to The course is highly recommended for those design a sustainable highly productive work students who wish to acquire a deeper understanding environment. Although the course centres on the of the systemic changes that are currently taking place Australian experience, overseas experience is in Eastern Europe and elsewhere. addressed when relevant. General references As the lectures do not follow the general pattern of the Economics III. 18: Labour Economics B conventional comparative economics literature, no single Prereq Economics IH.17 textbook is set for this course. However, students are . Using material introduced in Labour Economics A, strongly advised to consult the following references: this option develops a number of themes concerning J.M. Montias The Structure of Economic Systems (Yale, 1976) the functioning of the Australian labour market and S. Pejovich The Economics of Property Rights: Towards a Theory the relationship to the labour market of a range of of Comparative Systems (Kluwer Academic Publishers, demographic groups within Australian society. 1990) Particular attention is given to the problems of J. Kornai Anti-Equilibrium: on Economic Systems Theory and persistent unemployment and consequences flowing the Tasks of Research (North-Holland, 1971) from it. A profile of unemployment in Australia since F. Seton Cost, Use and Value: The Evaluation of Performance, the 1950s is presented, as is an assessment of the Structure and Prices Across Time, Spaceand Economic Systems competing theoretical explanations as to why (Clarendon, 1985) unemployment has become such a persistent problem. J.M. van Brabant Remaking Eastern Europe: On the Political This is followed by an examination of the labour Economy of Transition (Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1990) market status of particular demographic groups, e.g. youth, migrants, older workers, Aborigines, sole Economics 111.20: Strategy, Risk and Rationality parents, and the links between labour market status The semester will reflect the following topics: and poverty. 1. Introduction: history, role and uses of game theory. Its place in social theory. The second part of the semester is devoted to examination of policy prescriptions designed to 2. The elements of game theory: agents' improve the functioning of the labour market and /or motivation, rationality and beliefs. the labour market outcomes of disadvantaged 3. Risk: parametric and strategic uncertainty. individuals. Attention is given to, among other things, Expected utility theory and alternatives. (i) the links between the education system and the 4. The first models of equihbrium behaviour: labour market, (ii) the links between immigration dominance, stability and John Nash's policy and the labour market, and (iii) specific labour equilibrium. market programs designed to assist the process of 5. Unavoidable uncertainty: probabilistic skills acquisition and retraining of the labour force. strategies, bluffing, indeterminancy, hesitation and multiple equilibria. Economics III. 19: Economic Systems 6. Repeated games and backward induction: Prereq Economics II or II(P) introducing time in interactions. Agents The primary purpose of this course is to show that an choosing strategies before and after they observe economy will function and perform in the way it does others' behaviour. partly for reasons of the environment, partly as a 7. The prisoner's dilemma and the problem of result of policies, decisions and actions of its cooperation: game theory and the debates in participants, and partly for 'systemic' reasons. social theory about the role and necessity of Although much emphasis will be placed on systemic collective agencies (e.g. the State). factors, the student will be made aware of the common 8. Evolutionary game theory: the emergence of features of modern economic systems in order to conventions when social and economic avoid the tendency in the conventional comparative interactions are repeated. The birth of norms economics literature of giving undue importance to and links with moral philosophy as well as those factors. evolutionary economics. 9. Laboratory experiments in game theory: Economics 111.22: Health Economics . evidence on how people choose between risky Prereq Economics II or II(P) strategies. This course will provide a general introduction to 10. Game theory: its place in social science. health economics and to the use of economics in Textbooks understanding current health issues in Australia. S. Hargreaves-Heap and Y. Varoufakis Game Theory: A Amongst the topics covered will be the following: Critical Guide for Social Scientists (Routledge, 1993) scope of health economics; health care as a commodity; D. Kreps Game Theory and Economic Modelling (Clarendon, market failure in health care; the Australian health 1990) care system; the concept of health and need; health E. Rasmusen Games and Information: An Introduction to Gamecar e insurance and its failure; the utilisation of health Theory (Blackwell, 1989) care; demand for health; the supply of medical services; K. Binmore and P. Dasgupta The Economics of Bargaining alternative methods of paying doctors; the hospital as (Blackwell, 1987) a firm; paying hospitals; economic evaluation in health care; costing health care; measuring health effects Economics 111.21: Bargaining, Contracts and (economics and epidemiology); valuing human life; Social Choice QALYS—a measure of benefit; designing an economic Prereq Economics 111.20 evaluation; disease costing in policy; equity in health The option will reflect the following topics: care; different approaches to health care systems; and 1. Introduction: (a) the bargaining problem, (b) the Australian health strategy review. contracts between individuals, (c) social At the end of the course students should be able to contracts. describe the key features of health economics as a sub- 2. Axiomatic and procedural (i.e. explicit) models discipline, discuss health careissuesfrom aneconomics of bargaining. perspective and discuss some of the current 3. The first solutions to the bargaining problem: controversial issues within health economics. During the early contributions of John Nash, Kalai and the course students will be introduced to some of the Smorodinski and Luce and Raiffa. 'classic' articles in health economics and will learn 4. A procedural approach to the bargaining something of the other disciplines with which problem: Rubinstein's solution. economists have to become familiar when working in 5. Bargaining uncertainty of a parametric kind: health. the problem of not 'knowing' one's opponent. Textbook 6. Conflict and contract: what do game and A. McGuire etal. The Economics of Health Care: An Introductory bargaining theory have to offer in terms of a Text (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1988) theory of why people, firms, countries, unions, etc. fight? Economics 111.23: Housing Economics 7. Game theory, the pure theory of contract and Prereq Economics II or II(P) social choice: how does a collective agency This course will cover some of the economic analysis (such as the State) mediate between competing used to provide an understanding of housing markets interests? Arrow's impossibility theorem in the and housing policy. Where possible the Australian light of strategic analysis. situation will be placed in a broader context by 8. Voting strategies: why vote? what does it mean comparing the outcomes here with those in other to vote strategically? The limitations of countries. democracy as a result of strategic voting. The first part of the course will concentrate on 9. Theories of justice: the notion of justice within providing background information. It will cover such the framework of voluntary associations topics as the nature, structure and operation of housing between citizens with conflicting objectives. markets, including the determinants of the demand John Rawls, Robert Nozick and Amartya Sen for and supply of housing, factors affecting house on fairness, entitlement and justice. prices, rents and tenure choice. The second part will 10. Social contracts, socialisation and the market: a focus on the interaction between housing and finance reinterpfetation of Rousseau's social contract markets and on the nature and effect of the ways in and of Adam Smith's invisible hand (or its which housing is financed. The third part of the course more modern version: general equilibrium) will concentrate on the institutional framework within along the lines of game and bargaining theory. which Australia's housing policies are implemented. 11. The market, the bargaining process and liberty: It will examine the characteristics of the various liberal, conservative and Marxist perspectives. housing tenures or sub-markets which exist; viz. owner-occupation, private rental and public rental, Textbooks provide an overview of the types of policies directed S. Hargreaves-Heap and Y. Varoufakis Game Theory: A towards each of these tenures in the post-war period Critical Guide for Social Scientists (Routledge, 1993) in Australia, examine the outcomes of those policies D. Kreps Game Theory and Economic Modelling (Clarendon, and discuss the policy options being considered by, 1990) and available to the government. E. Rasmusen Games and Information: An Introduction to Game Theory (Blackwell, 1989) At the end of this course, you should have a clear K. Binmore and P. Dasgupta The Economics of Bargaining understanding of the complexities involved in (Blackwell, 1987) analysinghousingmarkets;youshouldhaveincreased your ability to apply the theoretical constructs of first intermediaries emerge in the process of savings and second year to analysing real world issues; you allocation among investment possibilities. The various should understand the meaning and implications of types of intermediaries, their precise functions and housing tenure; youshouldbe able to critically evaluate behaviour, are considered within the context of the current housing policies and policy proposals. Australian economy. Some considerationis also given Textbook to the prudential regulation of these institutions and Currently, there is no text book which is suitable for this the problems regulation poses for them and the course. The two references below are recommended as a financial system as a whole. starting point: Topics covered include: National Housing Strategy Australian Housing: The 1. Overview of the financial system Demographic, Economicand Social Environment (NHS Issue2.s Theory of financial intermediation Paper No.l) (Canberra: AGPS, 1991) 3. Commercial banks and thrift institutions L. Smith et al. 'Recent Development in Economic Models of 4. Money market corporations and finance Housing Markets' journal of Economic Literature, 1988, companies V26,pp 29-64 5. Insurance and superannuation Economics 111.24: Monetary Policy and the 6. Brokers, mutual funds and collective Australian Financial System investments Students are provided with an opportunity in this 7. Regulation course to examine the impact and operation of 8. Information, disclosure and supervision. monetary policy within the context of the Australian financial system. The course focuses on the institutions through whichAustralian monetary policy is affected. Economics III Honours 32 units Topics covered include: Prereq A credit or higher in Economics II Honours; or as 1. Overview of the Australianmonetary/financial otherwise provided by resolution of the Faculty of system Economics (This course is a calendar year course.) 2. The operation of monetary policy 3. The Reserve Bank of Australia The course comprises three parts: 4. The short term money market and authorised (1) Economic Analysis: Theory and Policy dealers This generally includes lectures on four topics (about 5. The role of commercial banks 18 hours each), which may 'include: (a) general 6. Other providers of investment finance equilibrium theory; (b) income distribution — 7. The impact of deregulation functional distribution and problems of inequality; (c) 8. Recent policy experience. inflation and unemployment; (d) pricing and Economics 111.25: Financial Markets and investment decisions for resource allocation. Instruments Each student also takes part in a seminar group Prereq Economics II or II(P) (about 36 hours) for study of economic policy topics, not necessarily oriented to Australian issues. The purpose of this course is to provide an analysis of the behaviour and performance of markets in financial (2) Quantitative Economics II assets and liabilities. This includes both direct and Lectures and classes, two hours per week, which may indirect forms of financing. The emphasis is on the deal with: economic dynamics; further studies in microeconomic functioning of these markets with optimisationin economic analysis; economic decisions particular attention to the range and characteristics of under uncertainty; studies in applied economics using instruments traded. The range of instruments econometric techniques. considered includes basic instruments such as bonds NOTE: Students who have successfully completed contracts, options, swaps, etc. The types of markets Econometrics HA and HB are required to take one considered include equity markets, debt markets and Economics HI one-semester option instead of the foreign exchange markets. econometrics semester of Quantitative Economics II. Topics covered include: 1. The nature and role of financial markets in the (3) Two options (two hours each per week for one economy semester) drawn from the list of options provided 2. The essentials of portfolio management for Economics III. 3. Basic or underlying instruments in financial markets Students who obtain a credit level or better in this 4. Derivative instruments in financial markets. course are qualified to enter the final honours year. Economics 111.26 Financial Intermediation Prereq Economics 111.25 Economics III Supplementary 8 units Financial Intermediation attempts to examine the Prereq Economics II economic function and theory of the workings of the Coreq Economics III or Economics III Honours financial system from an institutional point of view. It This course consists of any two options (two hours begins with the theory of intermediation, how the size each per week for one semester), not already taken, and form of financial flows are determined and why from the list of options provided for Economics III. Economics III Additional 16 units 3. Political Economy of Cities and Regions Coreq Economics III or Economics III Honours (one semester) This course consists of four options (two hours each This course examines the process of urban and regional per week for one semester), not already taken, from development with particular, but not exclusive, the list of options provided for Economics III. One reference to Australia. It studies the forces shaping the option from Economics III(P), which is equivalent to economy and the implications for its spatial structure. two options in Economics III, may be included. It explores the associated socioeconomic problems, such as urban socioeconomic inequalities, unemploy ment, housing and congestion. It examines the role of Economics lll(P) 16 units the state in respect of urban and regional policies. _ Prereq Economics II(P) Throughout the course there is reference to the This course comprises a number of options of which contributions of competing paradigms in economics, two may be taken. None of these is compulsory. The and the role of interdisciplinary studies in under options set out below are of 4 hours per week for one standing urban and regional issues. semester. 4. Political Economy of the Environment (one semester) Options The course introduces students to an appreciation of 1. Australia and World Capitalism the nature of environmental problems and how (one semester) economists and political economists theorise economic This course deals with the major forces presently interactions with the environment. The object of the restructuring the world economy, with particular program is twofold. Firstly, the program contrasts reference to the institutions involved, and the and develops a critical appreciation of the intellectual implications of this restructuring for the Australian foundations and analytical bases of the different economy. The first part of the course examines the approaches within the broad field of study of development of capitalism in Australia in its environmental and ecological economics. Secondly, international setting and the institutional organisation attention focuses on how these different theories of capitalism, of transnational corporations, the nation inform an appreciation of environmental problems in state and various international organisations. Different contemporary industrial economies, the formulation theories of international economic relations are then and application of policy guidelines and environ compared with a view to situating Australia mental economic management, and social and political internationally and particularly in the context of struggles over the environment. These concerns are economic restructuring and crisis. The second part of developed concretely by exploring different policy the course considers the process of the restructuring measures adopted to date as well as a range of struggles of the Australian economy in the past twenty years, over particular issues, locally, nationally and both domestically and internationally. Attention is internationally. paid to policy debates which arise in response to the The program is divided into two reasonably distinct restructuring process — particularly pertaining to components. The first concentrates on debates within issues of foreign debt, investment and the balance of environmental and ecological economics within a payments; industry and trade policy; and monetary neo-classical economic framework, and examines how policy. the different emphases affectpolicy. The second section of the program will focus on a range of theories that 2. Economic Conflict and the State conceptualise environmental problems as systemic to (one semester) contemporary industrial economies. This course examines conflict and power within contemporary capitalist economies and, against this 5. Political Economy of Women background, a range of state economic policies. The (one semester) modern state is considered capable of resolving or at This is an option which is also available as a Faculty of least containing economic conflict, although in a Economics interdepartmental course offered by manner which may reflect its partial dependence on members of the Departments of Economics, Fine Arts the more powerful parties to conflicts. The course and Industrial Relations. The topics covered in lectures canvasses a number of analytical approaches to include: the experience of Aboriginal and immigrant conflict, which differ according to their versions of the women; women's role in the Australian economy locus and character of economic power. Care is taken from the late nineteenth century to the present (unpaid to acknowledge thatthe arena of any conflictis typically work, paid work, childcare, women in trade unions); broad and complex. Given that the nature of economic images of women presented in the media. conflictis historically determined and differs between nations, the examination of state economic policies is 6. Political Economy of Development undertaken partly by means of case studies of (one semester) significant periods in the development of some of the This optionis intended to provide a broad appraisal of major capitalist economies. The overall object of the the problems of economic development with an course is to establish the principles on which the emphasis on international economic influences on efficacy of various state economic policies depends. developing economies. The performance of developing economies over the past three decades is reviewed Economics lll(P) Honours 32 units and major features in recent experiences are examined. Prereq Economics II(P) Honours or as otherwise provided Attention is given to the major factors in the by resolution of the Faculty of Economics development process reflecting both domestic and In general this course is only taken by students who international influences.on developing economies. have obtained a credit or better in Economics II(P) The common features in the development challenge Honours but other students may make application for are treated but characteristics identifiable with special entry through the Director of P courses. This individual economies are also taken into account. course comprises three of the options from the list for While the main focus tends to be on the economies of Economics IH(P) plus an additional seminar of two South and East Asia and thePacific, this is notexclusive; hours per week which runs for the full year. The three experiences and problems in Latin America and Africa options must include at least two from the options are also treated during the lectures. The Australian listed above (1-6). connections with developing economies especially in The seminar is on the theme 'Research in Political East Asia and the Pacific will be assessed and policy Economy'and comprises: issues related to these connections reviewed. (i) Methodology in political economy, The initial part of the course will be taken up with (ii) Critical evaluation of research in political concepts of the development process and the recent economy. This is a vehicle for learning about experiences of developing economies. The main thrust the process of research while simultaneously of this section is the analysis of theories of growth and studying important contributions to the development in an international setting and then a understanding of economic issues, review of what has taken place. (iii) Preparation for thesis writing. ■■ . The next main section of the course examines the Students will be required to submit additional resources appropriate to anappraisal of development. seminar papers and essays in conjunction with the This is not only a matter of issues such as population seminar program. growth but also organisational arrangements, including the role of government, and technology. The next section treats development strategies Economics lll(P) Additional 16 units potentially available to developing economies. This Coreq Economics III(P) or Economics III(P) Honours encompasses questions of priorities and choices in This course consists of any two options, not already policy as well as constraints arising in trade, size of taken, from the list of options provided for Economics economies arid institutions. III(P). The final section of the course is concerned with policy issues. It is linked to the wide coverage of domestic and international issues in the preceding Economics lll(P) Supplementary 8 units section. This section will include an appraisal of Coreq Economics III(P) or Economics III(P) Honours Australian policy problems in relation to developing This course consists of any one option, not already economies, especially those of the ASEAN group, taken, from the list of options provided for Economics Papua New Guinea and the South Pacific. Reference books mo?). To be advised In addition the following options in Economics III Economics IV are available to students enrolled in Economics III(P). Prereq Economics III Honours with a grade of credit or If selecting from this list then two options must be better, or as otherwise provided by resolution of the taken, but no more than two: Faculty of Economics ni.03 Business Enterprise 1. Candidates for final honours may complete ni.04 Corporate Structure and Strategy requirements in one of three ways: 111.05 History of Economics: Classical Economics (a) by taking four subjects, each of about HI.06 History of Economics: Modern Developments two hours lecture or seminar per week; 1860-1960 (b) by taking three subjects and submitting m.12 Capital and Distribution a minor thesis not exceeding 15 000 HI.14 Economic Growth words; rn.19 Economic Systems (c) by taking two subjects and submitting a HI.17 Labour Economics A (1995 only) major thesis not exceeding 30 O00words. IH.18 Labour Economics B (1995 only) 2. The subjects offered this year will be drawn ni.22 Health Economics (1995 only) from the following schedule though some may not be ffl.23 Housing Economics (1995 only) available: in.25 Financial Markets and Instruments (a) Macroeconomic Theory III.26 Financial Intermediation. (b) Microeconomic Theory Any two of these options are equivalent to one (c) Economic Development option in Economics III(P). See the Economics III (d) Economic Planning section in this handbook for descriptions of these (e) Economic Classics courses. (f) Australian Macroeconometric Model Building Note: Not all options will be available in any one year. (g) Finance (h) General Equilibrium Theory The tutorial program is used for detailed considera (i) Public Economics. tion of reading materials which form the basis of the In addition there is an examinable seminar for all course. students covering Australian current policy issues. The lecturer will post notices relating to the course on the Fisher Stack noticeboard. Economics (Social Sciences) IV Prereq Economics III(P) Honours with a grade of credit or Legal Research and Writing 0 units better, or as otherwise provided by resolution of the This course is designed to develop students' capacity Faculty of Economics in legal research and writing. The course has two components: legal research (including instruction in Students contemplating Economics (Social Sciences) computer assisted legal research) and legal writing. Honours are advised to consult the Director of P Each component must be completed for a pass grade Courses in Economics after the publication of third to be obtained. The course is conducted on a pass/fail yearresults in order to discuss the course requirements, basis. Both components are integrated in law subjects thesis topic and appointment of a staff supervisor. taught in the first three years of the combined degree. All students are required to undertake a thesis and coursework during their final honours year. The Constitutional Law 8 units coursework requirement is three semester length Classes Yr: (2 lec &1 tut)/wk courses or the equivalent (where the student chooses a full year course). The semester length courses include The aim of the course is to give students an under- the following: Marxist Economic Theory; Feminism standing of State, and especially Federal, constitutional and Economics; Capital Accumulation, Policies and law. In the latter area, the aim is to give an overall Institutions in the Post-War period; State and Economy appreciation, complemented by a more detailed in East Asia; Theories of Social Formations; Industrial examination of selected topics. Restructuring and Small-scale Industry Policy; and The State content includes the Constitution Act Particular Issues in Political Economy. 1902 (N.S.W.) generally, particular provisions (e.g. Not all of these courses will be available in a given peace, welfare and good government, manner and year. The principal full year course is Economic form, terri toriali ty, separation of powers), the Australia Development. Acts 1986, the State Constitution as affected by, and as Students may choose one semester length course or compared with, the Commonwealth Constitution. one full year course from among those on offer in The Federal content includes introductory material other programs in the BEc (Social Sciences) degree, (e.g. Federation, characterisation, severance, outline subject to the agreement of the relevant department of judicial review and interpretation), selected federal and the Director of P courses. Some of the full year legislative powers, the judicial power and jurisdiction, courses within Economics Final Honours Year (shown prohibitions on power, inconsistency of laws, above) are in this category. Commonwealth-State relations. Torts 8 units Economics/Law Classes Yr: 2 lec/wk & 1 tut/fn The law of torts is concerned with common law and For an introductory statement on the Economics, statutory liability for non-contractual civil wrongs. Economics (Social Sciences) or Commerce/Law This course is directed to providing students with a course, see chapter 1. comprehensive understanding of the principles upon which liability is based through detailed study of a Location number of tort actions including trespass, negligence The Faculty of Law is based at the Law School, 173-5 and nuisance. In the tort actions selected for study, the Phillip Street, Sydney 2000. However, lectures in the course will examine the various forms of conduct and following subjects which are part of the combined law states of mind which may give rise to liability for degrees are given at the main University site. damage ranging from physical injury to person or property, to purely economic loss. Limitations on Legal Institutions 12 units liability will be examined critically. Classes Yr: (3 lec & 2 tut)/wk The course includes a study of the historical evolution of tort liability and a detailed analysis of An introduction to law which explores the origin and causation and remoteness of damage, the assessment development of law in Australia, and the institutions of damages, fatal accidents and other injuries to through which it is promulgated and administered relational interests, concurrent and vicarious liability, today. Attentionis givenin this regard to the processes the action of breach of statutory duty and liability for of government — parliamentary, executive and animals. administrative, and the constitutional framework in Successful completion of this course is a prerequisi te which these operate. The courtstructureis also studied, to the option Advanced Torts. along with the role of the judiciary in shaping the law. Major theories about the nature and purpose of law will be discussed, and students will be encouraged to Criminal Law 8 units evaluate critically the way in which legal institutions Classes Yr: 2 lec/wk & 1 tut/fn work. This course seeks to provide a knowledge and critical understanding of the criminal law in the context of the Australian criminal justice system. Educational Psychology, The subject-matter covered in the course is Measurement and Technology essentially as follows: (a) Crime and the criminal justice system Social and Policy Studies in (b) Offences against the person Education (c) Offences against property (d) General principles of criminal liability Introduction (e) Criminal procedure The School of Educational Psychology, Measurement (f) Sentencing. and Technology and the School of Social and Policy The lecturers will post information relating to the Studies in Education offer a wide range of courses. course on the noticeboard in Fisher Stack. These are not designed to prepare students for teaching but rather seek to promote the understanding of Administrative Law 8 units education as a social phenomenon. As such they open Classes Yr: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk up for analysis the complexities of education through study in a number of fields. For example, there are the This course is concerned with the powers and study of the nature/context and processes of education procedures of administrative agencies, and the through historical, psychological, philosophical and avenues for review of their decisions. Non judicial sociological perspectives; of human growth and avenues which are considered include the development and their implications for education; Commonwealth Ombudsman, the Federal and, across different societies and cultures, of the Administrative Appeals Tribunal, freedom of relationship between education and politics, social information legislation and public consultation under organisation and economic development. rule-making procedures. The statutory and common Details of diploma and degree courses supervised law procedures for seeking judicial review are studied, by the Faculty of Education such as the BEd, DipEd together with the grounds of judicial review and and DipTEFL, may be found in the Faculty of Education remedies. Policy issues which arise throughout the Undergraduate and Diploma Studies Handbook. course are considered by reference to political and legal theory, and are pursued in greater depth in the Pass courses context of the tutorial component of the course and There are two pass courses in education — Education the research assignment. II and Education III, second and third year courses respectively. Students who have completed Education Contracts 8 units II may proceed to Education III. Education II and III Classes: Yr: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk are offered jointly by the School of Educational Psychology, Measurement and Technology and the Contract law provides the legal background for School of Social and Policy Studies in Education. transactions involving the supply of goods and services and one means, arguably the most significant means, Prerequisites by which the ownership of property is transferred A student may only enrol in a course in education from one person to another. It vitally affects all after successful completion of Sociology I or Social members of the community and a thorough knowledge Anthropology I or Philosophy I or Prehistory I (a of contract law is essential to all practising lawyers. In Table B course) or Psychology 101. the context of the law curriculum as a whole, Contracts Any student who has completed Sociology I or provides background which is assumed knowledge Social Anthropology I or Philosophy I or Prehistory I in many other courses. (a Table B course) or Psychology 101 may. take It necessarily follows from the above that the aims Education II as a single qualifying course. of the course are composite in nature. Perhaps the Any student who has completed two or more central aim is to provide an understanding of the basic courses in anthropology or philosophy or psychology principles of the common law and statutes applicable may take Education III as a single qualifying course, to contracts and to provide a grounding in one of the on application to the Faculty. most important areas of law in practice. A second aim is for students to be given the means to evaluate, to Honours course make normative judgements, about the operation of Students wishing to graduate with honours in the law. This leads to a further aim, admittedly fairly education must, except as provided in the by-laws, modestinscope, to make some examination of contract gain a pass with credit in Sociology I or Social law in other countries. As Contracts is basically a case Anthropology I or Philosophy I or Prehistory I (a law subject, the final aim of the course is to provide Table B course) or Psychology 101, and before experience in problem-solving by application of the proceeding to Education IV (Honours) must have principles provided by the decided cases. completed Transition Honours Education II and Successful completion of this course is a prerequisite Education III Honours. to the option Advanced Contracts. The lecturers will post information relating to the Noticeboards course on the Law noticeboard in the Carslaw Building. For location of noticeboards for Education II, III and IV students will need to check noticeboards in the JohnEklund, BEd W'gong GradDipEdStud S.C.A.E. foyer of the new Education Building Complex (A35). Graham Hendry, BA W'gong Gillian Morgan, DipTeach Syd.Teach.Coll. ASCM BA Course Coordinators Administrative Assistant Education II: Mr Darcy Anderson Claire Kendall, BEd S.C.A.E. Education HI: Ms Dianne Butland Honours Social and Policy Studies in Education Educational Psychology, Measurement and Professor Technology: Clifford Turney, BA MEd PhD, FATEA Mr Richard Walker Appointed 1976 Social and Policy Studies in Education: Associate Professors Dr Stephen Crump Phillip W. Jones, BA PhD Geoffrey E. Sherington, MA N.S.W. PhD McM. BA Advice on courses (Head of School) Members of staff will be available in the Education Building Complex (A35, A36, A22) before the Senior Lecturers commencement of the academic year to give advice Stephen J. Crump, BA DipEd Macq. MEd PhD on planning units and sequences of units. Students Christine B. Inglis, MA A.N.U. PhD Lond. BA should consult the relevant noticeboards for details of Marjorie O'Loughlin, MA Macq. PhD N.S.W. appropriate advisers. Anthony R. Welch, HigherDipTeachMeft. C.A.E. MA PhD DipEd Lond. Registration Robert E. Young, BA PhD Monash MA P.N.G. Students will be assigned an adviser with whom they Lecturers will complete registration. Dianne L. Butland, BA Lai. MEd N.E. James D. Mackenzie, BA Monash MA PhD N.S.W. Evening students John Roe, BD MEd MA DipEd Macq. ThL A.C.T. ThC, Evening students are advised that it is possible to MTCMACE complete a full sequence of Education II, III and IV Ralph Sadler, BA, MACE only if some classes held from 4.15 pm are attended. Joanne F. Travaglia, GradDipAdultEd I.T.A.T.E. Otherwise, evening students may need to combine CertTESOL BSocStud day and evening units. Associate Lecturers Nigel Bagnall Staff Craig Campbell Educational Psychology, Measurement and Kathleen Robinson, BA Technology Maria Varbaressos, DipEd Syd.Teach.Coll. BA MEd Associate Professors Administrative Assistants Raymond L. Debus, PhD III. BA DipEd Lorraine Wildman Bruce D. Keepes, BS S.Calif. MALong Beach EdD Stan., Teresa Wise MACE MACS Kenneth E. Sinclair, EdM PhD III. BA Courses in Education (Head of School) Students must take a series of options within the one Ian D. Smith, MA PhD Stan. BA academic year in completing either Education II or Senior Lecturers Education III. All options are of one semester's Darcy R. Anderson, BA MScSoc N.S.W. MEd MA, duration. Each option entails some combination of MAPsS MACE lectures, tutorials and/or seminars. Normally, Michael Bailey, BA Oxf. MEd DipEd Brist. PhD Macq. students take two options in each semester but, in Neville Goodwin, BA MEd special cases, permission may be granted to do JohnM. Harvey, DPhil Sus. GDipEdSt Mitchell C.A.E. otherwise. MA A measure of specialisation Is required in that Lecturers students must select a sequence from within one of the Jennifer Bowes, PhD Macq. BA, MAPsS two programs. To this end, each program contains four levels as shown in the table available in the Walter E. Glynn, BEdSt Old. DipEdSt Syd.Teach. Coll. Faculty of Arts Handbook. A student who takes GDipEdSt Riv.M.I.H.E. MA, MASET Education II followed by Education HI would be able Sandra H. Nicholls, BA N.S.W. PhD Macq., MAPsS to complete a full 'major' sequence of four across the MBPS two years, and this is obligatory for Educational David J. Reid, GDipEdSt S.C.A.E. GDipCommMgt Psychology sequences. For Social and Policy Studies Kuring-gai C.A.E. MA DipEd, MACE MASET the 'major' sequence need only consist of three options Alexandra Rivers, BA DipTeach N.Z, MA across the two years. Richard Walker, BA DipEd N'cle(N.S.W.) MEd N'cle(N.S.W.) & Syd. Education II 16 units Associate Lecturers Students must take three options: two will be 2001, Eveline Chan, GradDipTeach(TESL) S.A.CA.E. BEd 2002; and the other will be 2100. Honours Course 1: The Socialisation of the integrate a variety of practical applications along with Child the essential theory and financial reasoning skills. As This is a full year course consisting of two hours' class a result, students should be well-equipped to embark time per week plus assignments. It is designed for on a variety of careers in the financial sector. Possible intending honours candidates, and would normally career avenues include the major financial houses and be taken concurrently with Education III. banks and financial intermediaries, financial areas The course is focused uponresearch concerning the within corporations, corporate advisory work, broking major socialisation agencies: the family, the school, and dealing in securities markets, portfolio manage the media, the peer group, the law, etc. Students will ment with large institutions and financial and be required to participate in a group research project investment analysis. as part of their assessment. In addition to these sorts of avenues, students may wish to combine finance with related studies in other Education III 16 units commercial and economics areas. Possible combina Students who have not completed Education II must tions include finance and accounting, finance and select 2001, 2002 and 2100, unless your previous marketing and finance and economics. university studies qualify you, in the opinion of the To satisfy the professional accounting bodies the depar tment(s) concerned, for study at the higher levels. department provides an introduction to finance for The general coordinator should be consulted in this accounting students. In addition, students interested regard. In the particular case of Educational in a career in financial accounting are encouraged to Psychology, a student who has completed Psychology complete the finance major as a means of enhancing 201 or Psychology 350 (developmental) is permitted their career prospects in the financial sector. to take level 3 options in the Educational Psychology Increasingly, prospective graduates in both program, thus by-passing levels 1 and 2. marketing and economics are finding it valuable to obtain a sound knowledge of finance by adding a Honours Course II: Current Issues and finance major to their primary discipline. For example, Research in Education financial viability must be established before a new This will be a whole year course consisting of two product launch. A whole host of new and innovative hours' class time per week plus assignments. Designed financial products need to be marketed. A knowledge for intending honours candidates, for whom it is of financial economics and finance is expected of most obligatory. economics graduates employed by industry. A The course will focus uponresearch and participants combination of finance and commercial law is useful, will be called upon to engage in the critical review of not only for careers in the corporate sector but also selected examples of recent investigations in the major with respect to regulatory bodies such as the Australian research areas of education. As part of assessment Securities Commission. students will carry out a research project, either The department offers a major in the Bachelor of individually or in groups. Economics and Commerce degrees at both pass and honours levels. The major commences in the second Education IV (Honours) year of the undergraduate program and is completed Education IV is a full-time, one-year honours course, in the third year. Students must do both economics which can be taken only after completing Education II and econometrics as well as accounting in their first and HI. Students are required to undertake two areas year. of work: . Undergraduates may also proceed to an honours (a) a supervised investigation of a special problem degree by undertaking the honours components, relating to the theory and practice of education; commencing in the second semester of second year (b) participation in seminars as prescribed by the and continuing in both Semester 1 and Semester 2 of head of the appropriate department. third year. Students who have performed well in Students intending to proceed to Education IV these honours courses may then proceed to the fourth should consult the relevant honours coordinator as honours year to obtain an honours degree in finance. early as possible, preferably when enrolling for This will involve both coursework and a thesis. This Education II and III options for intending honours would normally be done on a full-time basis. The candidates. honours program is primarily designed to provide students with the requisite research skills in finance to proceed to postgraduate study via research but honours students are also in high demand in the Finance financial sector. Postgraduate studies are provided for by research Introduction for the MEc and PhD degrees. A coursework Master of The new Department of Finance is located in the West Commerce degree and Diploma in Commerce will be Wing of the Institute Building on City Road adjacent available from Semester 2 1995. to the Merewether Building. Enquiries: Room N350. The research interests of the staff cover a wide The department offers a variety of interesting and range of fields. Especially prominent is an relevant courses in finance /financial economics which understanding of just how security markets operate are designed to be both challenging and to have a (financial market microstructure) and how strong career focus. The courses are designed to corporations are structured and controlled so as to ensure optimum performance (corporate governance Finance 201, Finance 202, either Finance 302 or Finance and control). 303 and either Finance 304 or Finance 305. Members of the department have attracted in excess of $1 million in current research funds from major BEc degree sponsors such as the Commonwealth Government Year Semester 1 Semester 2 (Australian Research Council), the Australian Stock 1 Economics I Economics I Exchange and the Sydney Futures Exchange. The Econometrics I Econometrics I strong research profile of the department, combined Accounting 1A Elective with outstanding support from the financial or Financial community including the National Australia Bank, Accounting indicates both the strength and practical relevance of Concepts the department. Elective Elective The Securities Industry Research Centre of Asia- 2 Finance 201 Finance 202 Pacific (SIRCA), which is a cooperative venture Economics II Economics II between a number of leading universities and the Elective Elective financial community, has been established within the Elective1 department to undertake research into securities markets. The research and related activities undertaken 3 Finance 302 or Finance 304 or by SIRCA is overseen by a board which includes Finance 303 Finance 305 luminaries from the financial sector and a number of Economics HI Economics III universities. Finance 302 or Finance 304 or Finance 3022 Finance 3052 or Elective or Elective Staff Elective1 Professor 'May be taken either semester Peter L. Swan, BEc A.N.U. PhD Monash 2Depending on the Finance choice above Appointed 1994 (Head of Department) BCom degree Associate .Professors Year Semester 1 Semester 2 Michael J.^Aitken, MBS Massey PhD N.S.W., ASCPA 1 Economics I Economics I (Executive Director of SIRCA) Econometrics I Econometrics I Gerald Garvey, BEc MA PhD Calif. Accounting 1A Accounting IB Elective Elective Lecturers Alex Frino, MCom W'gong MPhil Camb. 2 Finance 201 Finance 202 Michael McCorry, BA Oral Roberts MBA PhD Memphis Economics II Economics II State Elective Elective Elective1 Associate Lecturer Julianne Wright, BEc 3 Finance 302 or Finance 304 or Finance 303 Finance 305 Professorial Fellows Elective Elective Peter Marshman, BCom Melb., FSIA FAIM Finance 302 or Finance 304 or Bryce Wauchope, FICAA Finance 3022 Finance 3052 or Elective or Elective Administrative Assistants 1 Sheilah Whyte Elective Lisa Woodland, BEc Macq. ■May be taken either semester SIRCA Research Fellows 'Depending on the Finance choice above Mathew Duffy Structure of the Finance major in 1995 Elvis Jarnecic, BCom W'gong Year 2 of the Undergraduate program in 1995 (1st Robert Maurich, BEc W.Aust. year of the Finance major) Roland Winn, BEc Unit SIRCA Analysts value Tim Cooper, BA Semester 1 Finance 201: Corporate Finance I 8 Tom Jones, BA Semester 2 Finance 202: Corporate Finance II 8 Geoff Swaverly, BSc N.S.W. Finance 202 Honours 4
Finance program Year 3 of the Undergraduate program in 1995 (2nd Students may undertake courses on a wide range of year of the Finance major) subjects such as Corporate Finance, Corporate Control, Unit Derivative Securities, Advanced Corporate Finance value and Trading and Dealing in Securities Markets. Semester 1 Finance 302: Derivative Securities 8 For the purposes of the BEc and BCom degrees a Finance 303: Corporate Control 8 major in finance comprises four semester courses: Finance 303 Honours 4 Unit A weekly workshop/seminar which deals with more value advanced topics in corporate finance and the operation Semester 2 Finance 304: Trading and Dealing of financial markets. in Securities Markets 8 Entry to Finance 202 Honours is competitive and Finance 305: Advanced depends on the applicant's grade point average as Corporate Finance 8 well as performance in prerequisite courses. Finance 304 Honours 4
The Finance major would constitute Finance 201 Finance 302: Derivative Securities 8 units and Finance 202, plus one of the options Finance 302 Prereq Finance 201 and 202, Economics II Classes Sem 1: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk, one workshop session (not or Finance 303 in the first semester and one of the every week) options Finance 304 or Finance 305 in the second Assessment one 3hr exam, assignments semester. Entry to the Fourth Year Honours program would depend upon performance in Finance 202 Options, futures and swaps are derivatives of Honours, Finance 303 Honours and Finance 304 underlying securities such as equities and bonds. Honours. Finance honours will be taken in both the These -relatively new and rapidly growing types of firstsemester (Finance 303 Honours) and in the second securities are increasingly used to manage risk semester (Finance 304 Honours). Approval of the exposure and as a relatively low-cost-way of taking a Head of Department would be required to treat two positionin a security or portfolio. They are also being courses in the one semester as fulfilling the require used as par t of senior management compensation as a ments for the finance major. way of attempting to align the interestsof shareholders with that of management. Finance 201: Corporate Finance I 8 units The course is designed to provide an introduction Prereq Accounting IA or, Financial Accounting Concepts, to this important area of finance without requiring on Economics I, Econometrics I the part of students a high level of mathematical Classes Sem 1: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk sophistication. Students will gain exposure to the Assessment one 3hr exam, assignments operations of the Sydney Futures Exchange (SFE) and This course provides an introduction to corporate the Options Exchange and some may even choose to finance, including investment decision-making. The enhance their learning experience by investing small first part of the course deals with the analytical sums on these exchanges. techniques necessary to make investment decisions, both when cash flows are known and when they are Finance 303: Corporate Control 8 units uncertain. The second part of the course deals with the Prereq Finance 201 and 202, Economics II corporation and the Australian capital market, the CZasses Sem 1: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk raising of capital, including equity versus debt, and Assessment major practical assignment, several small allocating capital, including dividends, internal exercises, one 3hr exam investments and takeovers. As far as possible, the The finance sector requires many professionals to course will attempt to link theory to practical advise and assist in the process of new company applications via examples, exercises and assignments. formation and listings on the stock exchange, acquisitions, mergers, restructurings, issuance of new Finance 202: Corporate Finance II 8 units debt and equity, board structure and composition Prereq as for Finance 201 including outside directors, structuring of executive Coreq Finance 201 compensation packages and the like. These activities Classes Sem 2: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk generally fall under the rubric of corporate control, or Assessment one 3hr exam, assignments in more modern academic parlance, 'corporate This course builds on Finance 201: Corporate Finance governance', I, but is more applied in that it is concerned with the This course will focus on how corporations are actual workings of financial markets. It examines the formed, how ownership and control is allocated, and operation of financial markets from both a theoretical howitchanges hands through takeovers, bankruptcies, and practical perspective, concentrating mainly but and reorganisations. The following are provided as not exclusively on Australian financial markets. The examples of the sorts of topics to be covered: how the course deals with the economic role of capital markets internal labour market and 'pay for performance' and theories of capital market behaviour. The within firms impinges on the firm's capital structure; operations of equity and derivative markets in the role and nature of takeover bids and corporate Australia, including options and futures, are examined restructuring; the questionable condemnation of along with foreign exchange and debt markets. A new 'management entrenchment'; the packaging of and important area of study known as 'market cashflow and control rights; the 'dual class' share microstructure' is introduced and a number of issues controversy and 'super-voting' shares; leveraged incorporate governance and take-overs are examined. buyouts; employee ownership and profit-sharing; the choice between debt, equity, and more complex Finance 202 Honours 4 units securities; corporate governance including boards, Prereq credit or higher grade in Finance 201 active investors and regulators; and Anglo-American Coreq Finance 202 style firms versus the 'main bank' systems of Japan Classes Sem 2 and Germany. Assessment assessment of advanced topics covered References preference given to students with a high grade point G. Garvey and P. Swan The Economics of Corporate average. Preference is also given to students who have Governance: Beyond the Marshallian Firm' Journal of completed or are enrolled in Econometrics IIA and are Corporate Finance, 1 (1994), 139-174 undertaking two units of Finance in the second B. Holmstrom and J. Tirole The Theory of the Firm', in R. semester. Shmalencee and R. Willig (eds) Handbook of Industrial Organization (North Holland,1989) Finance 305: Advanced Corporate Finance Finance 303 Honours 4 units 8 units Prereq credit or higher grade in Finance 202 Honours or Prereq Finance 201, Finance 202, Economics II Finance 202, and Economics II Classes Sem 2: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk, one workshop session (not Coreq Finance 303: Corporate Control every week) Classes Sem 1 Assessment one 3hr exam, assignment, tests Assessment assessment of advanced topics covered. This subject covers some of the topics introduced in A weekly workshop/seminar which deals with more Finance 201 and 202 such as the Capital Asset Pricing advanced aspects of finance, particularly corporate Model (CAPM), the Arbitrage Pricing Theory (APT), control and governance. dividend policy and corporate policy, in greater depth Entry to Finance 303 Honours is selective with and sophistication while at the same time extending preference given to students with a high grade point the analysis to a number of new areas. Moreover, average. Preference is also given to students who have some of the empirical evidence is also closely examined. completed or are enrolled in Econometrics IIA and are The course draws more heavily on the analytical, undertaking two units of Finance in the first semester. quantitative and statistical skills of students. It is designed for students who wish to be well-equipped to join the corporate financial world and for those who Finance 304: Trading and Dealing in are preparing themselves for more advanced degrees Securities Markets 8 units in finance or financial economics. Assoc. Prof. Aitken Prereq Finance 201, Finance 202, Economics II Classes Sem 2: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment likely weightings: 20% based on a mid-term Geography examination; 20% based on assignment work which will be based on literature analysis; 60% based on a final 3hr Introduction examination The Department of Geography offers a wide range of The purpose of this course is to provide students with courses in each of the years Geography 1,2,3 and 4. It a detailed working knowledge of Australia's exchange is possible to take up to four years of courses in based securities markets. The emphasis is on geography including the honours year and count understanding: them towards Faculty of Economics degrees. • patterns of trading behaviour within and Geography E and M courses are Table A courses for between markets; the BEc and BEc(SocSc) degrees. Geography P courses • the three main features of the markets, namely are Table B courses for both degrees. All geography transaction costs, liquidity and volatility; courses are Table B courses in the BCom degree. • the roles played by: Geography 2 consists of one of three courses (i) institutional versus private investors (Geography 2P, 2M, 2E) extending over two semesters. (ii) brokers and market-makers The course Geography 3 consists of one of three (iii) principal and agency trading courses (Geography 3P, 3M, 3E) extending over two (iv) informational technology semesters. Within each course there is a set of options (v) regulation. of half semester length from which a student can The broad aim of the course is to provide students choose. with both a practical appreciation of the institutional Students who wish to qualify to proceed to the final structure of exchange-based securities markets and a year honours course in Geography are required to thorough research grounding in the techniques which take special courses in second and third year. Students lead to this understanding, namely the relatively new in those special courses will be required to undertake discipline known as 'security market microstructure'. additional work.
Finance 304 Honours 4 units Staff Prereq credit or higher grade in Finance 303 Honours or Professor credit or higher in either Finance 302 or Finance 303 Coreq Finance 304: Trading and Dealing in Securities Markets Classes Sem 2 Associate Professors Assessment assessment of advanced topics covered John Connell, BA PhD Lond. Robin F. Warner, BA Birm. PhD N.E. (Head of A weekly workshop/seminar which deals with more Department) advanced aspects of finance, particularly security market microstructure. Senior Lecturers Entry to Finance 304 Honours is selective with David E.M. Chapman, MEngSc N.S.W. BA PhD Colin Davey, BA Phd Macq. preliminary reading before courses begin. In addition, Deirdre Dragovich, MA Add. PhD consistent reading is necessary throughout the year, Philip Hirsch, BA Oxf. MPhil Dundee PhD Lond. not only of book-length texts but also of periodical Andrew D. Short, MA Hawaii PhD Louisiana State BA literature. Reading lists will be supplied. Lecturers Students are urged to consult members of the Peter J. Cowell, BA PhD department before purchasing textbooks; a single book will rarely meet the needs of any given course and it Adam J. Gough, BA DPMI Oxf. MPhil Lond. is likely that some older texts will be superseded to Charles Greenberg, MA PhD Br.Col. meet the requirements of changes in course structures. Martin C. Thorns, MSc N.Z. PhD Lough. Though every effort is made to ensure that at least Associate Lecturers one copy of all work cited for courses is available in the William Pritchard, BA A.N.U. department's library, students are encouraged to make Chris Parker, BSc use of other libraries in the University (especially the Chief Cartographer/Map Custodian main Fisher Library) as a source of reference material. John E. Roberts They are also encouraged to use Fisher Library for information as to where material not available within Honorary Appointments the University may be obtained. Emeritus Professor T. Langford-Smith, BA Melb. MSc Mel. PhD AN. Li. Assigned work and examinations BSc In first, second and third years, semester assignments Honorary Associates and examinations will contribute to final marks for P. Roy, PhD DIC Lond. BSc the year. J. Rutherford, BA PhD A.N.U. T. Wheelwright, DFC, MA St.And. Conducted field excursions Research Affiliate In first year, students are required to attend two one- P.D. Tilley, BA CertEd Birm. DPhil Bonn MSc day excursions to localities within about 150km of Sydney. In each of second and third years, students Location are required to take part in a long excursion of about The department is in the Institute Building, adjacent one week's duration, based on a centre remote from to the Merewether Building. The Enquiry Office is on Sydney,or,in physical and environmental geography, the third level (Room N421). The department's office there may be the chance of substituting for this remote telephone number is 351 2886 and the facsimile number excursion by having a number of days each semester is 351 3644. in the field (up to 5 days each semester). It is expected that basic costs per student will be around $250 per Noticeboards year. Students who wish to apply for an interest-free First, second and third year noticeboards are between loan to enable them to meet the costs of excursions the respective teaching laboratories on the second and should consult the SRC. third levels in the Institute Building. A general Excursion work will be assessed by written noticeboard is in the corridor of the Institute Building assignment and/or examination. Exemption from on the ground floor. Students should consult their excursions will be granted only in exceptional respective noticeboards regularly for details of circumstances. Requests for exemption should be made excursions, course outlines, etc. in zoriting to the Head of Department. Further details of departmental activities, courses, Registration excursions and other relevant material are contained In addition to complying with enrolment procedures in the Geography Department Handbook available from required by the University, all students must register the Secretary, Institute Building. with the department in the Geography Conference Room, Institute Building, during the orientation Note: Some courses may be rescheduled to allow for period. expected staff changes.
Advice on courses Students may consult with members of staff at any Geography 1 12 units time concerning their course. During the latter part of Morning or afternoon course the summer vacation, enquiries as to staff availability The course extends over two semesters with three should be made at the Enquiry Office. lectures and two hours of laboratory work weekly. Morning lectures are repeated'in the afternoon. All Tutorials and practical work students do the same course. First year students must attend one 2-hour practical session per week (see timetable). All students in second First semester: Understanding physical and third years are required to attend tutorials each environmental processes week. A systematic approach to modern physical geography with emphasis on processes in geomorphology and Reading interactions of climate with weathering, soils and Students in all years are required to undertake vegetation, alongside coastal processes. Second semester: Introduction to Human systems: soil erosion and natural hazards. Resource Geography management problems are investigated at a range of An introduction to the principles of human geography scales with some emphasis being given to the changing illustrated by an analysis of development problems in relationship between people and environment in the southwest Pacific, a study of the location and tropical areas. distribution of economic activities including resource use and environmental management. Geography 2E: Principles of Human Geography A two-semester course introducing concepts Geography 2 16 units concerned with explaining the peopling of the earth The course extends over two semesters with three by examining processes at various scales and the lectures and the equivalent of five hours' assignment dynamics of systems over time. work (whichmay comprise tutorials and /or individual course work including fieldwork) weekly. The Option: Economic and Social Structures and following courses are offered: Regional Systems 2P Principles of Geomorphology Levels of human activity, from the global through to 2M Environmental Geography and Resource the urban, are considered through an examination of Management basic economic and social processes. 2E Principles of Human Geography. Students may choose to undertake one of the three Geography 3 16 units courses 2P, 2M, 2E. This course extends over two semesters with three In addition, all students doing Geography 2 must lectures and the equivalent of nine hours' assignment undertake a field methods course which will examine work (which may be comprised of tutorials and/or skills associated with the acquisition, manipulation individual coursework including fieldwork) weekly. and presentation of data used in geographical analysis All students are required to attend a 5-day field of a region. The region will be studied in the field excursion. The traditional excursion may be replaced during a compulsory one-week excursion. Skills with fieldwork (up to 5 days in each semester) developed within courses studied in the first semester conducted locally in association with courses being will be applied to the collection and analysis of data offered in 3P and 3M. obtained during the excursion. Three courses are offered: Geography 3P (Physical), Geography 3M (Environmental) and Geography 3E Geography 2P: Principles of Geomorphology (Human). It would be assumed that those doing A two-semester course designed to introduce students Geography 3P would have undertaken Principles of to the principles of geomorphology. It involves an Geomorphology (Geography 2P) in second year; those examination of the major earth surface landforms and doing Geography 3M would have undertaken the theories which have been developed to explain Environmental Geography and Resource Management landform genesis. Earth surface processes are (Geography 2M) in second year; and those doing examined; there is an emphasis on systems theory to Geography 3E would have undertaken Principles of provide an understanding of the processes over a Human Geography (Geography 2E) in second year. wide range of spatial and temporal scales. Students in the Faculty of Economics need Faculty Option: Fluvial and Coastal Geomorphology permission to takeGeography 3P (a Table B course). This course provides: To complete Geography 3 a student must select (1) an introduction to hydrogeomorphology and four options, two per semester. Individual courses, is concerned with processes and morphologies selected from options within 3P, 3M and 3E, are to be associated with rivers; and chosen from themes or sequences which are related to (2) an introduction to the principles of coastal the systematic development of research skills in the geomorphology assessing the role of endogenic department. There are seven sequences which may be (lithosphere) and exogenic (atmosphere and followed, three for 3P, two for 3M and two for 3E. ocean) forces in shaping coasts. These sequences constitute a guide for the selection of courses. Students should consult with the course Geography 2M: Environmental Geography and coordinator before selecting options. Not all options Resource Management are offered in any given year. A two-semester course designed to evaluate the Students who wish to qualify to proceed to the final interaction of the physical environment and human year honours course (Geography 4) are required to use of the earth's surface. The first part of the course undertake the honours equivalent course in examines the role of the physical environment in Geography 3.»This will involve an additional tutorial influencing human activities. The second studies hour per week, and/or some additional practical/ resources from social, political and economic field work depending on the nature of the course. perspectives. Students enrolled in such a course will be designated as undertaking Geography 3M(H) or 3E(H). Entry Option: Physical Systems and Environmental into the honours course will require at least a credit or Management better in Geography 2. It is not possible to do honours Particular attention is given to two aspects of physical in Geography 3P in the Faculty of Economics. Geography 3P: Advanced Geomorphology Geography Honours The course examines the evolution of the landscape Students contemplating Geography Honours in their involving the history of landforms and vegetation in fourth year are required to consult the Head of association with tectonic forces, climatic change and Department as soon as possible after the publication biological factors. Physical, chemical and biological of third year results concerning the choice of topic and weathering processes are studied and there is an the appointment of a staff supervisor. Entry into fourth emphasis on coastal management and hydrology. year honours will require completion of honours courses in Geography 2 and Geography 3 (to be passed Option: Coastal Systems at credit or better). Preliminary work should begin The course deals with the relationships between coastal shortly after the publication of these results. morphologies and the processes responsible for them. Honours students are required to undertake formal The focus is on the general principles of morpho- coursework during first semester and to participate in dynamic adjustment, particularly as applied to the seminars through the year as arranged. They will be coastal boundary layer operating on the inner shelf, required to study original problems, working as shoreface and in estuaries. Form and process appropriate in the field, the laboratory, libraries, and relationships that generate the world's major coastal in some instances in conjunction with other university depositional environments are studied. or government departments. A dissertation of not more than 20 000 words must be submitted during Option: Fluvial Systems second semester, followed by an examination that The focus is on short-term development and changes may include both written and oral work. in fluvial systems; channel stability and instability, adjustments or channel metamorphosis, and the role of fluvial thresholds are considered. Government and Public Geography 3M: Advanced Environmental Administration Geography The course focuses on: coastal zone environmental management and environmental geomorphology. Introduction Critical physical systems and natural hazards in the This departments concerned with the study of politics coastal zone are examined and the ways in which in its broadest sense. It focuses mainly on the decisions are made about resource management are institutions of government, the processes of decision studied. The practical uses of geomorphological making and theideas thathave been central to classical concepts to solve problems are discussed. and contemporary political thought. As politics takes place not only in parliaments and parties but also in Option: Environmental Geomorphology and the family, in private organisations and in social Information Systems movements, it must also study how politics interacts Geomorphological concepts are applied to solve with the surrounding society. It also studies the problems where landforms are transferred and where international dimension of politics. there is some use of or change to surhcial processes. Courses in Government are available in the BEc, The techniques of geographic information systems BEc(SocSc) or BCom degrees, pass or honours. The analysis are illustrated and applied. courses are listed below. The first year courses provide an introduction to politics. In later years students can specialise, choosing options from the main strands of Geography 3E: Advanced Social and Economic the subject: Australian politics, international politics, Geography politics and society, comparative politics, public policy The course examines the contemporary economic and administration, and rights, justice and democracy. geography of the richer capitalist countries. It examines For honours students there are special seminars and the social and economic dynamics of industrial change an additional honours year in which students write a in a regional context. research thesis. Option: Dynamics of the Asia-Pacific Region The department is part of both the Faculties of Arts and Economics, but its courses are available in some The general structure and growth patterns of the other faculties, as well as to students taking the region are considered. Special topics include combined Arts/Law and Economics/Law, Economics agricultural processes, population, migration and (Social Sciences)/Law or Commerce/Law degrees. urbanisation. For career purposes, the study of politics is particularly Option: Urban and Regional Geographic useful for economists, journalists, public servants, Systems lawyers and those interested in administration within firms and voluntary organisations. Development theories and their relationship to rural development and natural resources development, the role of aid, the structure and role of international Staff capital flows are examined. Social structures and their Professor relationship to resolving conflicts over development Graeme J. Gill, MA Monash PhD Lond. aims and environmental management are studied. Appointed 1990 Professor in Chinese Politics (Personal Chair) and Comparative Politics I and, in second and third Frederick C. Teiwes, BA Amherst PhD Col. year, four specialist options. Subject to availability, Appointed 1992 the first year courses may be taken in either order. Professor in Government and Public Administration Normally, unless department permission is given, the (Personal Chair) six courses are taken in consecutive semesters over Michael W. Jackson, BA Nebraska MA PhD Alta three years. Appointed 1993 The two first year introductory courses are prerequisites for all later year courses. The second and Professor and Academic Director, International College— third year specialist options are of one semester's Penang duration. They may be offered in either first or second Michael B. Leigh, BA Melb. PhD C'nell semester, but not both. Reader The list of options includes all those offered from Patricia M. Springborg, MA Cant. DPhil Oxf. time to time by the department. Not all options are offered every year. The department reserves the right Associate Professors to make amendments and withdraw or add options Michael C. Hogan, BA PhD according to circumstances. Terence H. Irving, BA PhD Trevor V. Matthews, BEc PhD Government in First Year Helen G. Nelson, BA W.Aust. MA PhD First year Government is organised into two semester (Head of Department) courses. They are both introductory courses, and are Martin J. Painter, MA Sus. PhD A.N. U. essential prerequisites for later year courses in the Rodney E. Tiffen, BA PhD Monash department. Both must be passed before a student Senior Lecturers may proceed to second year Government. They will Deborah Brennan, MA Macq. BA PhD not necessarily be offered in the order set out below. Ernest A. Chaples, MA Mass. PhD Kentucky Classes normally consist of two lectures and one G. Ross Curnow, PhD C'nell MA tutorial per week. Robert F. Howard, BA N.E. PhD A.N.U. G. Peter King, BA Melb. PhD A.N.U. Introduction to Australian Politics I 6 units Diarmuid Maguire, BA N'cle(U.K.) MA Johns H. MA This course aims to introduce students to debates PhD C'nell about the nature and limits of Australian democracy, Barbara Page, MEc to the major institutions of Australian politics, and to Randal G. Stewart, BA Qld PhD A.N.U. the distribution of power in Australian society. Major Lex Watson, BA institutions and forces such as parliament, executive Linda Weiss, BA Griffith PhD Lond. government, the federal system, political parties and the media willbe examined as arenas of power, conflict Lecturers and consensus. Who rules? How? Which groups are Ian Bell, BEc LLB Monash excluded? Lisa Hill, BA Tas. DPhil Oxf. Qingguo Jia, MA PhD C'nell Introduction to International and Comparative Ivan Molloy, BA Monash MA Qld PhD Lai. Politics I 6 units Felix Patrikeeff, BA Essex This course aims to introduce students to the major Roderic Pitty, BA Macq. PhD A.N.U concepts and approaches in international and Associate Lecturers comparative politics. It will examine the role of the Louise Chappell, BA N.E. state and of non-state actors in interactions—military, Christopher Green, BA Qld MSocSc Griffith economic and political — between states. It will also introduce the variety of non-Western political systems Gillian McDonald, MA Georgetown BA and the uses and problems of comparative methods. Administrative Officer The course will examine the interactions between the Jennifer McCallan, BA Open internal and external influences on state behaviour, and how these can interact to produce radical change Administrative Assistants in both spheres. There will be a strong emphasis on Roslyn Conyngham theoretical and normative issues in international and Sue Loader comparative politics. Shereen Matthews Maria Robertson Government in Second and Third Years Location Students who intend to complete a major in The department is on Level 2 of the Merewether Government normally complete one option each Building. Enquiries, Room 269. semester over three years, including Introduction to Australian Politics I and Introduction to International and Comparative Politics I, as prerequisites for later Course structure courses. A three-year major in Government consists of six To pass a semester course, students must complete semester courses: in first year, Introduction to all assignments and examinations at a satisfactory Australian Politics I, Introduction to International level, as well as achieving a pass overall. Classes normally consist of two lectures and one tutorial per reforms together with policy formulation and week and assessment comprises usually one implementation in some key areas of public policy. examination, essays and class work. Students who intend to complete a major may also (Hi) Australian Political and Electoral Behaviour take additional semester courses in second and third 8 units years and count them towards their degree. All Dr Chaples students may count single-semester courses towards The focus of this course is the increasing amount of their degree, so long as the prerequisites are satisfied. literature on electoral behaviour and mass-based In any given year some of these courses will be political behaviour in Australia. There will be a unavailable. Before enrolling, students should check concentration on the processes by which Australians with the department. acquire their political attitudes, express them as public opinion, and put them into practice through different Government II Honours 8 units forms of political participation. Part of the course is Prereq Government 1(1) and 1(2) at the level of credit or concerned with the methodology of the behavioural better, or with the consent of the Head of Department study of politics, and students will be expected to take Coreq Government 11(1) and 11(2) part in some survey-based project as a key element in the course. Government III Honours 16 units (iv) The A ustralian Political Party System Prereq Government 11(1), 11(2) and 11(H) each at the level of credit or better, or with the consent of the Head of 8 units Department Mr Watson, Assoc. Prof. Hogan Coreq Government 111(1) and 111(2) The course will look at the Australian political party system in a number of ways: historically — the Final Honours Year development of parties and the explanations for Students work as far as possible under individual periods of hegemony, decline, splits, etc.; supervision. Courses to be attended will be arranged organisationally — the differing views, and their with the Head of Department. Besides a substantial evolution, of models of organisation, and their relation thesis, students will normally take two seminars from to the wider body politic; philosophically — the such areas as Australianpolitics,internationalpolitics, presence or absence of philosophical and ideological politics and society, comparative politics, public policy bases for the parties, and the importance of this for and administration, and rights, justice and democracy. electoral purposes; sociologically — the presence or absence of class bases for parties, the end of class parties; functionally — interest aggregating and Options articulating, parties or pressure groups, the role of Australian Politics minor parties and their prospects, the 'independent' phenomenon. (i) Human Rights and Australian Politics 8 units Mr Watson (v) Religion in Australian Politics 8 units The course focuses on the recent and growing political Assoc. Prof. Hogan debate and policy initiatives in Australia aimed at The course will concentrate on Australian politics in implementing human rights policies in a number of the twentieth century, especially the institutional areas. The emphasis of the course is distinctly aspectsof Australian politics,includingpoliticalparties Australian and concerned with public policy aspects and pressure groups. Issues to be discussed may of human rights. It will however touch on the question include: of what are human rights and where do they come • ideological links between the labour movement from. It will also be set in the context of the various and various religious value systems (Roman international instruments (UN Covenants and Catholic, Protestant, secularist, Islamic, Judaic); Conventions, International Labour Organisation • the extent of a Protestant ascendancy among non- instruments and the European Bill of Human Rights) labour parties — the conservative tradition and as standards for the Australian debate, and pay wowserism; attention to the role of governments to protect human • a secularist world view as manifested in the 'old rights in addition to the traditional concern of left', the 'new right' and the Australian Democrats; individualrightsbeingprotected against governments. • the religious left in Australia — justice, peace, feminism, ethnic minorities and anti-racism; (ii) Australian State Politics 8 units • the religious right — Festival of Light, Call to Ms Page Australia, anti-abortion, anti-feminism; A comparative study of the Australian states, with • the role of confessional groups in issues such as a special reference to New South Wales. Topics include Bill of Rights and anti-discrimination legislation; the institutional rules of the game (constitutional • the impact of religion in the process of political development, parliamentary procedures, electoral socialisation in Australia; methods). Considerable attention will be given to the • is religion an electoral issue in contemporary role of political parties and interest groups in state Australia? politics. Attention will also be given to state • the impact of newer sects and alternatives to bureaucracies, new developments and proposed mainstream religions; • a religious dimension in the struggle for Aboriginal also cover the superpower role in regional conflicts rights; and conflict resolution in the Third World—especially • the links between religion and other politically in South and Southeast Asia and the Middle East. The important social cleavages such as ethnicity, gender, Australian role in global and regional balances will age and education. receive some attention. The basic methodology inspiring the course will be an historical one (although largely dealing with (iv) Peace Studies 8 units contemporary history). Nevertheless, there will be The course will cover in some depth such topics as: some discussion of the value of behavioural conflict resolution; the causes of war and peace; the approaches, especially in the interpretation of public politics of arms control and disarmament; the opinion poll and survey data. At the end of the course consequences of nuclear war; the role of non-violent there will be an attempt to evaluate the role of religion resistance in national defence; the moral dimension of in Australian politics in the light of a number of more global politics; human rights in armed conflict; the theoretical approaches to the study of religion in just war tradition and nuclear war; and the history society. and role of pacifism, peace movements, peace research and peace education. international Politics (v) Australian Foreign and Defence Policy (i) Introduction to International Politics 8 units 8 units The course will introduce students to international Dr Howard politics. After surveying major concepts and This course is designed to provide students with a approaches in international politics (such as power broad understanding of the formation, execution and and the balanceof power, sovereignty^ anarchy, order, nature of Australian foreign and defence policy. The intervention, imperialism, the role of force and course will commence with an examination of the morality), the course will turn to the role of the state aims and objectives of Australian foreign and defence andits instruments in theinternational arena. Attention policy and of the global and regional environments in will be focused upon the system, and hierarchy, of which Australia is required to operate. It will provide states and the interaction between these states. The a detailed analysis of the policy-making process by role of non-state actors (like transnational corporations) examining the role of all relevant factors such as and the making of foreign and defence policy within parliament, the political parties and the various states will also be analysed. government bureaucracies. The largest section of the course will concern itself with a number of major (ii) Politics of International Economic Relations issues in Australian foreign and defence policy such 8 units as the defence debate (ANZUS or non-alignment), the Mr Bell Australian-Indonesian-Papua New Guinea triangle, This option will provide an overview of the principal and the problem of Australia's relations with the theoretical approaches to international political Third World. economy and how these shape the principles and practices of a number of substantive issue areas: (vi) International Communism 8 units international trade relations; the activities of multi Development of International Communism from the national corporations; the logic of the accumulation of 19th century to the present. Brief examination of 1st capital on a world scale; the restructuring of global and 2nd Internationals. Study of relations of non- labour markets; international patterns of investment ruling Communist parties with Soviet Union during and financing; the international aid industry. Comintern period. Relation of Soviet foreign policy and Comintern strategy. Interaction of Soviet Union (Hi) The Superpowers and After 8 units and new Communist states after World War II. The course will survey the major diplomatic and Disintegration of world movement after 1956, inclu strategic issues in the recently concluded superpower ding Sino-Soviet conflict and disarray in the Warsaw conflict. Beginning with a study of the Cold War and pact. Relations among the remaining state socialist its origins, the course will proceed to investigate the regimes and between them and former Communist rise, decline, rise and triumph of detente, focusing states following the collapse of Communism in East closely on the reasons for the collapse of the Soviet Europe and the Soviet Union in 1989-91. Union as a superpower and state. Emergent international relations within the former U.S.S.R. will (vii) Politics of Globalism 8 units be explored, together with the sources of nationality The course will consider a range of problems which conflict and ways of resolving it. The course will then are regarded as 'global' in character and the record of assess the prospects of the post-Cold War world — attempts by international organisations and multipolarity, unipolarity, and a United Nations 'with movements to cope with these problems. teeth'. There will be a review of 'globalisf thinking — The course will cover the following areas of especially the ideas of Falk and the World Order superpower conflict and cooperation in the Cold War Models Project — and the organisations (UN organs, period: alliance management in Europe, relations with conferences, etc.) convened to meet global problems. China, arms control, strategic doctrine, military The main part of the course will deal with particular intervention and crisis management. The course will issues in this area: • ecological decline, pollution, resource depletion revolution or evolution; cultural change; methods of • anti-terrorist activity mass organisation, (c) The institutions and political • promotion of human rights/protection of refugees sociology of labour, socialist and social-democratic • 'common heritage' issues — Law of the Sea, parties: leadership; composition; electoral support; Antarctica current problems (the social contract; technocratic • The New International Information Order —issue labourism; middle-class radicals, etc.). of UNESCO, etc. The aim of the course would be to reveal basic (Hi) Politics of Information 8 units tendencies in contemporary world politics — more Assoc. Prof. Tiffen particularly, the extent to which such tendencies This course focuses upon news — its production, continue to frustrate Utopian solutions. Such issues contents and impacts, the special demands of different might include the continuing relevance of power news organisations and of different news areas, the politics and sovereignty /nationalism; the limited interests and strategies of various groups in affecting cohesiveness of the Third World; problems of cultural news content, and policy issues in regulating it. It will relativism, etc. also focus upon the structures of Australia's media institutions and how these impinge on the processes (viii) The International Security Problem in the of news production. Twentieth Century 8 units Dr Howard (iv) Australian Labour: Politics and Culture 8 units The course will examine the causes of major Assoc. Prof. Irving international conflict and efforts to promote international security this century. There will be an This course explores the changing political culture of emphasis on comparative perspectives and Australia, focusing on the ideas and culture of the consequently the material will be divided into three labour movement. The three main areas of discussion sections: pre-1914; the interwar period; the Cold War. are labour movement traditions, the changing Major themes will include: the causes of wars, with character of the working class, and the culture of special references to the debates about the causes of mateship in labour politics. Among the topics are World Wars I and II and the Cold War; the nature and masculinity and labour; violence and terror in working perception of threats; the dynamic and outcomes of class politics; labour populism; socialism and the Labor conflicts; the nuclear revolution, deterrence, and the party; respectability arid larrikinisminlabour politics; future of war; conventional and revolutionary ethnic and sexual politics in the labour movement; the (peoples) wars; and an examination of measures new labour right; the new middle class and labour; designed to contain international violence such as the elegies for communism; and the politics of post- balance of power, international law, crisis manage fordism. ment, disarmament, arms control and collective security (the latter to United Nations). The course will (v) Social Movements and Politics: Theory and conclude with an examination of the current debate Practice 8 units about the meaning of security. Assoc. Prof. Irving This course begins with a discussion of social movement theory in sociology (particularly collective Politics and Society behaviour and resource mobilisation approaches) and (i) Politics and Society 8 units of the historical setting within which this theory The course will introduce students to the study of developed. We thenmove on to 'new social movement' political sociology in Western, industrialised theory in radical social thought and its critique of democracies. Particular emphasis will be put on the industrialism, paying special attention to the work of analysis of Australian society. Four major topics will Touraine, Habermas and Cohen. This body of thought be covered: the relationship of the social structure to is also situated historically. The third part of the the exercise of power; political culture and political course deals with the labour movement as an 'old socialisation; parties, movements and groups in social movement'. Lastly, the course will examine the Western democracies; and the nature of social and empirical literature on recent social movements, political change in such societies. concentrating on ecology, youth and peace move ments. The aim is to develop a comparison of new and (ii) Socialist and Labour Politics 8 units old social movements and theories associated with Assoc. Prof. Irving them. This course undertakes a comparison of Australia, Britain and the United States within three areas: (a) (vi) Women and Politics 8 units Background history: the making of the working class; Do women and men today occupy the same place in bourgeois radicalism and socialism; early political political life? What is the significance for our activity; parliamentary reform; working class understanding of 'politics' of the fact that for so long mobilisation and party formation; the revolutionary politics has been seen as a man's world and that tradition; the first labour governments; depression almost all great political theorists argued that women and war; the welfare state; the end of the second long were unfitted for political activity and citizenship? boom, (b) Socialist and labourist political strategy: The course will introduce students to the new and problems of social change and social structure, rapidly growing body of research on women and especially the nature of the state; bureaucracy; politics. Issues to be discussed may include why it took women so much longer than men to win the the underlying values that support the American franchise; women's political activities before system of liberal democracy. Particular attention will citizenship; the manner in which women have been be paid to America's superpower role in world affairs, discussed in political science; the representation of to U.S. hegemony in Australia and to the significance women in parliament and the bureaucracy; policies to of recent U.S. election results. improve women's social position; the question of the 'gender gap'; the political significance of the women's (vi) Soviet and Post-Soviet Politics 8 units movement past and present; women and the welfare Prof. Gill state; women and the politics of personal life. The main focus of this course will be the collapse of Sovietpower at the end of the 1980s and the emergence Comparative Politics of new political structures on the territory of what was (i) Japanese Politics 8 units the U.S.S.R. It will begin by surveying the course of Soviet development from 1917, paying particular Assoc. Prof. Matthews attention to exploring why the crisis engulfing Soviet A study of the politics and government of postwar society at the end of the 1980s came about. The attempts Japan. Main topics will include: the governmental to deal with that crisis will be studied as a prelude to structure, the bureaucracy and policy making, the the emergence of new political structures and states in political party system, the relations between business the early 1990s. and government, and recent issues in domestic and foreign policy. Emphasis will be given to examining (vii) Revolution, Nationalism and Modernity various interpretations of the character of contem 8 units porary Japanese politics: a society structured in a The course examines two forms of social and political hierarchy of patron-client relations; the causative role change which have shaped the modern world - of traditional attitudes and cultural values; the revolution and nationalism. It traces some of the social manipulation of those values in the interest of the and political processes which have helped produce capitalist state; modernisation theory; 'Japan revolutionary and nationalist movements, identifies Incorporated'. and evaluates the role of various actors (classes, individuals, institutions), and studies and evaluates (ii) Government and Politics of Modern China the role of ideas and ideologies in revolutionary and 8 units nationalist movements. It examines how some of the Drjia ideas which characterise 'modernity' have been Introduction to government and politics of modern produced and used for legitimation. Examples will China. Brief examination of traditional background focus on the French, Russian and Chinese revolutions and modern revolution from 19th century to 1949. and the Indian and Indonesian nationalist struggles, Primary focus on ideology, leadership, institutions and themes include the role of peasants in revolution and political processesofthePeople'sRepublic. Covers and emergence of 'mass' politics. politics of social groups, major issue areas, the Cultural Revolution and the politics of reform. (viii) Southeast Asian Politics 8 units This course provides a comparative analysis of political (Hi) Politics of Development 8 units change, and the political consequences of economic An analysis of changes in political systems which and social development. The main focus will be on have accompanied economic development of these processes in two states, Indonesia and Malaysia. contemporary less developed countries. We will Singapore, Brunei and the Philippines willbe examined consider the utility of the principal theoretical in a comparative context. It is envisaged that approaches to the politics of development and the participants will also consider: the political dimensions actual experience of selected industrialised and of religious and ethnic conflict, insurgency, regional industrialising countries. ism, poverty and militarism; the dynamics of recent economic change and political power; authoritarian (iv) Problems of Transition in European Politics rule and the growth of democratic processes. 8 units Dr Maguire (ix) South Pacific Politics 8 units This course will examine the problems of transition in DrMolloy European politics in three key areas: the shift towards The course covers contemporary politics in the Pacific advanced capitalist democracy in the southern and the interaction between the Island Pacific and Mediterranean; the steps towards transnational unity major states of the Asian-Pacific rim. Particular (through the EC) by northern European nations; and attention is given to the processes of change in the the slow process of economic and political reform in Pacific, and what some regard as the 're-Asianisation' eastern Europe. Different theoretical approaches will of the Pacific as Western influence recedes in the post- be used to examine these phenomena and these will Cold War years. include perspectives that stress the role of the world economy, political institutions and social movements. (x) Authoritarian Politics 8 units (v) American Politics 8 units Prof. Gill The major national institutions in the U.S.A., like the This course will compare a range of different types of Presidency, the Congress and the Supreme Court, and authoritarian regimes. Traditional authoritarian political structures will be contrasted with what one course will examine the reasons for conflict and change author calls 'modern authoritarianism' before looking in the region. It will focus especially on: why it has in more detail at the types of political systems which been considered a political and economic centre of would fall into the latter category. Among the types of gravity, whether there are unifying strands of ideology systems to be covered will be single party regimes or common interest that would allow the region to (both narrow and broad), military regimes, police rival the emerging European/Atlantic bloc, what are states, fuhrerist systems and corporatist structures. the potential sources of disharmony in the region, These will be compared principally in terms of their what are the politics of resources and development in institutional configurations, modes of operation, the region, what place is there for Westerninfluence in legitimating ideologies and conditions making for its political/economic evolution, and does Big Power and sustaining them. Major concepts, such as politics or a new co-prosperity notion best sum up its authoritarianism, totalitarianism, militarism, future. praetorianism and corporatism will be investigated in the context of particular states. Public Policy and Administration (xi) States and the Politics of Economic (i) Public Policy and Administration 8 units Development 8 units The course provides an introduction to the field of Dr Weiss public policy and administration. It focuses principally upon the structures and processes of policy-making. The course examines the role that states have played Attention will be devoted to inputs into decision in economic change, concentrating on the task of making, the personnel and machinery of decision explaining how and under what conditions the structure, interests and policies of the state have making, and the processes and machinery of policy impinged on economic processes. Four principal areas making and evaluation. of controversy are covered: the relation between (ii) Policy Analysis 8 units political forms and economic advancement, the This course examines Australian public policies in the international and domestic sources of capitalist context of modern theories and techniques of policy development, the political conditions of growth and analysis. Policies in areas such as social welfare, decline, and the limitations and capacities of state immigration, foreign policy, broadcasting and the bureaucracies. For each one of these areas, the course environment will be discussed in the framework of considers alternative theoretical perspectives and the main themes and their application. The course selected comparative-historical studies touching upon also examines stages in the policy cycle, including a range of topics in different times and places. policy initiation, formulation and allocation, implementation, evaluationand termination. Students (xii) South Asian Politics 8 units will be encouraged to specialise in specific policy The course aims at developing an understanding of areas. the nature and functioning of 'politics' in the post- colonial nation-states of the Indian subcontinent, (Hi) Organisational Analysis 8 units focusing upon India, Pakistan and Bangladesh, and Dr Curnow with material occasionally drawn from Nepal. The This course is an introduction to some of the main course includes some colonial background, concepts in the field of organisational studies. The independence, the political institutions, issues and development of these concepts will be traced through problems such as national integration, the roles of the works of major writers in the field, such as Weber, civilian and military authorities and religion. Michels, Blau and Crozier. Some questions considered (xiii) The Comparative Politics of Ethnic Conflict are: why and how do people combine to form organisations? What is the nature of organisational 8 units authority? What is the role of organisational culture or Dr Maguire style? How useful are organisational concepts in the The course examines the role that ethnic conflict plays analysis of government bodies, private corporations, in national and international politics. One key issue to political parties, trade unions, the churches and be addressed is the persistent and destructive nature voluntary associations? Is the bureaucratic form of of this form of political conflict. Settler societies, former organisation inevitable? colonies, ex-communist nations and liberal democracies have all had to deal with the political (iv) Comparative Federalism 8 units consequences of ethnic tensions. How each regime The course comprises a comparative analysis of type has managed this task will be the empirical focus cultural, political and institutional aspects of federal of this course. Among the nations to be studied are systems of government, and policy-making processes Northern Ireland, South Africa, Israel, the United in such systems. The topics to be covered will be States, Australia, Sri Lanka and Jugoslavia. The course drawn from the following areas of study: federal is comparative and covers competing theoretical theory, the notion of a federal society and how this approaches (such as Marxist and liberal). influences federal institutional arrangements and policy decisions, federalism in multilingual societies, (xiv) Northeast Asian Regional Politics: Conflict federal and 'constitutional' reform, judicial review, and Change 8 units second chambers, federal financial arrangements, Concentrating on Korea, Taiwan and Hong Kong, the intergovernmental relations, and various policy area case studies. Federal systems to be compared include interpretation. Among questions that may be Australia, Canada and the United States of America, considered are those of justice, the relation of the with the comparative framework extended to other citizen to the city-state, war and peace and the good federal systems where appropriate. life, the place of men and women in political life and the relation of the public and the private. (v) Politics of the Australian Welfare State 8 units (ii) Political Theory: Early Modern 8 units Dr Brennan Political theorists in the early modern period were This course will provide an introduction to the major writing when the modern state was developing and theoretical approaches used to explain the the ideas of individual freedom and equality were development of the welfare state and will also give an becoming widely influential, and the claims of reason overview of the key substantive debates surrounding were advanced. Arguments to be considered include the provision of welfare in Australia. Attention will be those of the social contract theorists, controversies given to the role of political parties, the labour about sovereignty and political obligation, ideas of movement, business interests, welfare lobby natural law and natural rights and the political morality organisations and other pressure groups which of rulers. The focus of the course is on reading and attempt to influence welfare policy. The course has analysing the texts. both an historical and contemporary focus, and will (Ill) Political Theory: Modern 8 units consider critics of welfare on the right and left. This course examines the arguments of selected (vi) The Politics of Government-Business theorists from the late eighteenth century to the present Relations in Australia 8 units day. Theorists in this period have been concerned Dr Stewart with questions that arise in the context of the consolidation of capitalism and the nation state, the The course will focus on the patterns of relations development of universal suffrage and the welfare between government and business in theory and state and the emergence of modernideologies. Among practice in Australia. A key question will be 'who the problems that have preoccupied theorists are those controls whom?' Does the state and the public control of freedom, justice and equality, the relation of the the market, or is the state an instrument of the private individual to the state and the relation of the state to power of business? In the first part of the course, society, power, legitimacy and revolution. The focus economic and political models of the relations between of the course is on reading and analysing texts. government and business will be examined. In the second part of the course, these models will be applied (iv) Democratic Theory 8 units to various policy arenas in Australia. Topics for One of the major controversies among democratic discussioninclude: business developmentin Australia, theorists is over the meaning of 'democracy' itself. the Australian financial system, business law and The course will examine conflicting conceptions of taxation, tariffs, arbitration and industrial relations, democracy and other major debates among manufacturing and rural industry. The course will contemporary theorists. These include questions conclude by discussing corporatism and industry concerning citizenship and forms of political policy in Australia in a changing global economy. participation; problems of consent, political obligation and the position of minorities and majorities; the (vii) Australian National Internship Program question of representation; the issue of workplace 8 units democracy; the problem of social inequality and Second and third year students may apply for entry democracy. The focus of the course will be on recent into the national internship program located in contributions to democratic theory but, where Canberra. The program comprises a one-semester appropriate, reference will be made to classic texts. internship with the Commonwealth Parliament and enrolment in the 'Public Sector Internship A' course, (v) Marxism 8 units conducted at the Australian National University. Marxism has been a major influence on the course of Students undertaking the internship will be required political events and movements in the twentieth to complete a substantial supervised research project century. The course introduces students to the writings equivalent to at least one or two months of full-time of Karl Marx and his collaborator Frederick Engels work. See the Head of Department for further details. and examines their arguments about capitalism, the state and communism, private property, the fetishism of commodities, classes and class struggle, alienation Rights, Justice and Democracy and ideology and revolution. The theories of other (i) Political Theory: Classical 8 units prominent Marxists may also be considered including Many familiar political ideas and concepts were Lenin, Bernstein, Luxemburg, Gramsci and discussed and debated in the ancient world of the contemporary theorists such as Althusser and Greek polis and other city-republics. This course Poulantzas, together with wider questions about the introduces students to some of the writings of political development and social and political context of theorists in the classical period, the most famous of revolutionary movements. Recent feminist criticisms whom were Plato and Aristotle. The focus of the of Marxism, the controversy over Marxism and course is upon reading the texts so that students can morality and rational choice Marxism may also be become familiar with some of the problems of discussed. (vi) Ethics and Politics 8 units undertake fourth year thesis work. Areas covered If being ethical is hard, is being ethical in a political include the selection of a thesis topic, research design context possible? Politics has always been one of the and the organisation and writing up of research. primary expressions of a nation's ethic, yet the Students are required to prepare a thesis prospectus. relationship between ethics and politics has never been clear or comfortable. Does politics produce immorality? Can politics be moral? Such questions as Industrial Relations these can be examined regarding two of the most serious aspects of political life: violence and Introduction technology. Historically, violence has always been a part of politics. But can violence ever be ethical? More Industrial relations is a relatively new and fast- recently the development of technology has raised expanding social science area. The department, numerous ethical questions that defy political answers. founded in 1976, aims at providing students with a These and other related questions are examined in well-rounded understanding of industrial relations, this course. and fundamental knowledge for the commencement of professional training in the field. Honours seminars The overall program reflects a two-fold approach All students in Government II Honours are required to the systematic study of industrial relations. First, to take the seminar Tolitical Analysis'. All students in the field embraces what is popularly known as Government HI Honours must take the course Tolitical 'industrial relations', namely, an understanding of Power: Concepts and Methods' and the Research the institutions and process of job regulation and Seminar; together, these two components of evolving concepts of basic rights in industry. This Government HI Honours comprise 16 units. involves studying the theory and practice of relations between employers, employees, unions, the state and Political Analysis 8 units the future of industrial society. Secondly, fundamentals The course aims to help honours students develop the of professional training are also offered through disciplines and skills which they will need to excel in disciplines such as industrial sociology, labour law, any area of substantial political inquiry. It will include labour history, labour economics, and labour theory, attention both to theoretical approaches (problems of which have contributed successfully towards a deeper conceptualisation, explanation, comparing contending understanding of contemporary problems. theories and ideologies) and to empirical data (the The department offers a limited work experience uses and limits of different research designs including program for third year Industrial Relations students the use of statistical data). More than in most courses, during vacations, with placements in local unions, nearly every week students will have to do specific employer organisations and companies. Graduates preparation for the tutorials, or do an exercise during can find employment in the areas of personnel the tutorial. administration, union research and organisation, Political Power: Concepts and Methods industrial advocacy, human resource management, 16 units industrial relations, management, and inpublic service departments. Additionally students who have Power is one of the central concepts in the social combined a study of industrial relations with a law sciences; indeed, it is often argued that political science degree often find specialist practice in industrial law. can be defined as the study of power. Power is also extremely controversial: theoretically, methodo logically and empirically. One of the major debates in Staff political science has been about the way to investigate Professor community power and what the investigations show Russell Lansbury, MA DipEd Melb. PhD Lond. about its distribution. This is the debate about the Appointed 1987 pluralist, elitist and class conceptions of power (Head of Department) structure. Another controversy exists about the meaning of power and its relationship to other cognate Associate Professor concepts such as influence, authority, coercion, force, Ron Callus, MEc persuasion or manipulation. The course will examine Senior Lecturers these debates. This will permit us to look at a number Mark Bray, MA Warw. PhD N.S.W. BEc of central analytical issues in the social sciences: Suzanne Jamieson, BA LLB N.S.W. contending approaches to social explanation (func GradDipPubSectMgt U.T.S. LLM tional, causal and intentional); the essential Jim Kitay, MA Well. PhD A.N.U. contestability of key political concepts; the agency/ Gregory Patmore, BEc PhD structure debate. We will also look at the way the concept 'power' has been used in the political science Lecturer literature dealing with such fields of study as John Campling, BA Sus. MA Qu. PhD Camb. international relations, state theory and business/ Associate Lecturer government relations. Mark Westcott, BEc Research Seminar Administrative Assistant The seminar focuses on skills necessary in order to Vera Differding Honorary Appointments This course introduces conceptual problems and Honorary Associates applied issues in the world of labour and industry that Pauline Griffin, AM, PhD Macq. BA sociologists have attempted to illuminate. The course Peter Harley, MCom MBA N.S.W. DipLabRelations begins with a brief introduction to general sociological and the Law principles, and then proceeds to the deeper analysis of The Hon. J.T. Ludeke, QC, LLB the central topics of industrial sociology. These include The Hon. James Macken, HonLLD the effects of technology on worker attitudes and Sir John Moore, BA LLB HonLLD behaviour, the problems of job satisfaction and Vic Techritz, AM, DipElectEng S.A.I.T. alienation, the analysis of the occupational structure and sociological approaches to the study of industrial Location society. Institute Building Labour History 4 units Industrial Relations First Year Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial The first year is designed as a comprehensive intro Relations I duction to the field and as a foundation for the second Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk and third years. This course concentrates on developments in Australia Macro Industrial Relations I 6 units prior to 1972. It draws on research and concepts from Classes Sem 1: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk business, labour and economic history as well as industrial relations. Topics addressed include convict A broad introduction to the institutions and processes labour; management strategy and union responses; of Australian industrial relations beyond the level of the foundations of arbitration, unions and politics. the individual organisation. Topics will include: • introduction to industrial relations theory; • historical and legal background to Australian Legal A spects of Industrial Relations 4 units industrial relations; Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial • trade unions; Relations I • employer associations; Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk • the role of the state; This course examines the Australian legal framework, • industrial relations processes, such as conciliation, the scope of industrial law, the employment arbitration and collective bargaining; relationship, the Federal-State division of legislative • industrial relations issues and outcomes: including power in industrial relations and the industrial industrial conflict, wage determination; arbitration systems; courts, tribunals and awards. • recent trends in Australian industrial relations. Current developments in the law and politics of the systems will be referred to throughout the course. Micro Industrial Relations I 6 units Coreq Macro Industrial Relations I Classes Sem 2: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk Economics of Labour Markets 4 units Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial A broad introduction to organisations in Australia Relations I and industrial relations (including human resource Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk management) within those organisations. Topics will include: This course examines the manner in which labour • theoretical perspectives on organisations; economists have analysed some of the key issues • historical and legal background; relating to the employmentrelationship and industrial • the nature of Australian enterprises; relations. Emphasis is placed on applied topics of • management structures within the enterprise; special relevance to the contemporary Australian • management strategies; labour market. • workers and work groups; • workers and union organisation within the business Industrial Relations Policy 4 units enterprise; Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial • human resource management activities: including Relations I job design and unilateral control, analysis, planning, Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk recruitment, selection, performance appraisal, remuneration and training. This course will be concerned with a range of policy areas in the public and private sectors. Primary consideration will be given to current Australian Industrial Relations Second and Third Year debates, although parallels will be drawn withoverseas The second and third years of Industrial Relations experience. Attention will be given to the formulation comprise eight courses chosen from the following. and implementation of industrial relations policies, Not all will be available in any one year. the approach of the parties to particular issues, and Sociology of Industry and Labour 4 units the evaluation of the consequences of industrial Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial relations policies. Relations I Substantive areas to be covered in the course may Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk include: award restructuring; the emerging enterprise focus and its implications for workplace industrial Discrimination and Equality in Employment relations; management and union structures for 4 units collective bargaining; the role of industrial tribunals Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial in wage determination and dispute resolution; the Relations I Accord and labour politics; union amalgamations; the Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk use of penalties in resolving industrial conflict. A multi-disciplinary analysis of discrimination in employment and initiatives designed to address such Human Resource Management 4 units discrimination and promote equality at work. Topics Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial will include: Relations I • origins of discrimination in employment; Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk • reaction by the state in the U.S.A., the EEC and Australia; This course will build upon concepts and materials • EEO, Affirmative Action and Anti-Discrimination covered in earlier courses by examining human legislation in Australia, including its resource activities and the place of human resource implementation and effectiveness; function in the context of work organisations and the wider environment. Topics will include: • case studies: sex discrimination, physically disabled, HIV; • product markets, competitive strategies and • case studies in the public sector. employment practices; • strategic HRM; • staffing practices (including equal employment Comparative Industrial Relations 4 units opportunities); Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial • job evaluation, performance evaluation and Relations I payment systems; Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk • human resource development; An introduction to comparative industrial relations • workplace and organisational governance; (within the enterprise and beyond) in Western • new production concepts and work arrangements. developed economies. The countries and the topics covered will vary over time and according to the staff Work Safety 4 units member in charge, but will normally include: Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial • introduction to comparative method; Relations I • an historical and contemporary survey of industrial Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk relations institutions in each country; • exploration of the broader economic, political and Work Safety is an examination of the industrial social environment of industrial relations in each relations implicationsofoccupationalhealth and safety country; issues. The course will be taught so as to bring out the • the role of the state in industrial relations; interdisciplinary nature of an appropriate study of • the structure and strategies of unions and employer occupational health and safety by drawing on organisations; industrial law, labour history, sociology, economics • management and union organisation and strategy and the physical sciences. A major area of study will within the enterprise; be the role of the state over the past 150 years, especially • bargaining structures. in its attempts to deal with the prevention of accidents and disease and the compensation and rehabilitation of the victims of accident and disease at the workplace. Industrial Relations II Honours 8 units Classes Yr: 2 lec/wk Organisational Analysis and Behaviour 4 units Intended primarily for students who wish to proceed Prereq Macro Industrial Relations I and Micro Industrial to final honours Industrial Relations. The honours Relations I program involves two courses, one in each semester. Classes Sem: 2 lec/wk A disciplinary introduction to organisational behaviour and a survey of its usefulness for the study Industrial Relations III Honours 16 units of industrial relations. Topics will include: Classes Yr: 2 lec/wk organisational theory motivation The honours program consists of two courses, one in groups each semester. Students proceeding to fourth year leadership honours must take a course in Research Methods. organisational structure culture power Final Honours Year Coursework, thesis conflict in organisations control The primary focus is on an original dissertation of decision-making approximately 20 000 words. In addition, students organisational change. must undertake coursework as specified. but critical consumers of sodal science techniques. It Interdepartmental courses and is taught as two simultaneous streams each of two programs hours per week. One stream deals with general issues of method in the sodal sdences and the other with statistical techniques, there being a degree of COURSES interconnection between the subject matter of the two Political Economy of Women 8 units streams. Students must take both streams. Classes Prereq any 4 first year full semester courses take the form of integrated lecture/workshop sessions, Classes Sem: (one 2hr lec & 1 seminar)/wk varying the form of presentation according to the Assessment one exam, one 2000w essay, class work, 1000w material being taught. film diary This is a Faculty of Economics interdepartmental, Stream A. Methods in Social Science interdisciplinary course offered by members of the 1. Social Science Methods: introduction to critical Departments of Economics, Fine Arts, Government perspectives: alternative frameworks for and Industrial Relations. analysis; case studies of controversy in sodal This course seeks to explore some of the reasons explanation. why women have been, and still are, economic 2. Economic Statistics — Use and Abuse: the sodal subordinates and dependants of men. It looks at the context and conceptual underpinnings of development of ideologies of female subordination economic data; construction and interpretation and inferiority, and at the evolution of male-dominated of 'facts'; case studies, e.g. national income political and economic structures. Specific topics accounting, balance of payments and include the experience of Aboriginal and immigrant unemployment statistics. women; femininity and masculinity; gender and 3. Survey Methods, Design and Analysis: collecting education; upaid work; paid work (especially information through sodal survey; how samples questions of skill and professional status); women are designed and how survey results can be and the law. analysed. 4. Historical Method: interpretation of historical Contemporary Economics and Politics of information; documentary sources; oral and South Asia 8 units visual sources. Assoc.Prof. Bhattacharya Stream B. Statistics in Social Science Prereq any 4 first year full semester courses Summarising data: tables, charts. Classes Sem 2:2 lec/wk Descriptive statistics: central tendency; spread; Assessment one 3hr exam/one essay: 5000w or two 2500w correlation and regression. The study of political and economic developments in Bangladesh, Bhutan, India, Maldives, Nepal, Pakistan References and Sri Lanka. The course will follow a multi D. Freedman etal. Statistics (Norton, 1978) A series of selected articles to be read for the methods disciplinary approach to the study of contemporary component of the course South Asia, and lecturers from Indian Sub-Continent Studies of the School of Asian Studies and the Departments of Economic History, Economics and INTERDEPARTMENTAL PROGRAMS Government and Public Administration will Asian Studies participate in the teaching of this course. Problems of Courses in Asian Studies are concerned with the poverty, unemployment and underemployment, study of Asia or parts of Asia employing a range of unequal distribution of resources and lack of human methodological approaches. The aim is to develop development in South Asia will be examined together interdisdplinary and comparative examination of the with the nature of the internally regimented and historical, cultural, economic, political and religious differentiated socioeconomic systems in these aspects of Asian societies. Consequently, while based countries; the roles of cultures, religions, languages, in the School of Asian Studies, Asian Studies courses political systems, economic management and the draw on the expertise of Asian spedalists from other military in the contemporary period, will be the main departments and faculties in the University. focus. International political and economic relations between these countries and the rest of the world will Althoughstudy of an Asian languageis encouraged be analysed with a special emphasis on Australia's in conjunction with Asian Studies courses, it is not relationship with South Asia. required as all courses are conducted in English and utilise English language texts. No prior study of Asia is required for entry into the first year course, which Methods and Statistics in Social Science introduces students to the study of Asia through an Assoc. Prof. Stilwell (convenor), Mr Goodhew, Dr Jones, Dr emphasis on comparative themes and concepts. A Patmore wide pool of options for senior level courses is available Classes Sem: (3 lec & 1 prac)/wk for completing a major in Asian Studies, made up of [Not currently available] Asia-related courses in the departments of Economic This is aninterdisdplinary course available to students History, Government and Public Administration, and in the BEc(SocSc) degree. History, as well as the School of Asian Studies. The course aims to help students become competent The courses available are: Asian Studies 101 6 units general office, Room 369, tel. 3514283. Students should Classes Yr: 2hrs/wk not hesitate to contact members of the teaching staff if Note: AsianStudies 101 may notbe taken with Japanese they need information about their particular subject. A101 or Indonesian and Malayan Studies A101 or It is intended that the department's location will change A102. in 1995 to the rear of the Institute Building nearest the Merewether Building (the northeast corner). Asian Studies 201, 202, 203 and 204 The two-year program in marketing commenced in each 8 units 1994 for second year students in the Bachelor of Prereq 12 units in Asian Studies 101 (6 units) and/or an Commerce and Bachelor of Economics degrees. It is Asian language (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Indonesian, built on three one-semester core courses, followed by Indian Studies, Thai), Economic History, Government or options. The major consists of the three core courses History plus two options. The core courses include Marketing Classes Sem Principles offered in Semester 1; Marketing Research Each of the courses Asian Studies 201,202,203 and 204 I offered in Semester 2; and Marketing Research II consists of one semester course (8 units) chosen from offered in Semester 1 of the third year. The options are the pool of options listed below. Not all options listed Consumer Behaviour, offered in Semester 2 of the will be available in 1995. Consult the participating second year; and Marketing Communications, Retail department for details, or the Faculty of Arts Handbook, and Services Marketing and New Products Marketing or the Faculty of Economics Timetable for Economic offered in year three. Options are available to all History and Government options. students who have completed the three core courses, as well as Economics I and II and Econometrics I. The Asian Studies level 3 courses may be available from 1996. program in marketing emphasises critical and Semester options analytical thinking and the practice of marketing as an applied science. Students are expected to have a School of Asian Studies options reasonable level of knowledge in mathematics and Contemporary Indonesia Program econometrics; and emphasis is placed on analytical Early Modern Japanese History skills and the application of principles inmostcourses. Economic Change and Religious Conversion Modern Japanese Social History At the time of writing, the department intends to Southeast Asian Politics participate in a Master of Commerce and Diploma in The Meiji Restoration. Commerce program currently being developed within the Faculty of Economics. PhD students will be Economic History options accepted subject to the availability of supervisory Economic Development in Southeast Asia members of the department. PhD programs will be Economic Development of Modern Japan tailored to eachindividual, but generally will constitute Issues in Modern Japanese Economic History a combination of coursework and research. Both full- Historical Development of the Chinese Economy. and part-time students will be accepted. Government options Government and Politics of Modern China Staff Japanese Politics Professor Northeast AsianRegionalPolitics: Conflict and Change Jordan Joseph Louviere, BA S.W. Louisiana MA Revolution, Nationalism and Modernity Nebraska PhD Iowa South Asian Politics. Appointed 1994 (Head of Department) History options Indian Civilisation and Social Change — from the Senior Lecturer Indus Valley Civilisation to Gandhi Pamela D. Morrison, BEc Qld MCom PhD N.S.W. Modern Southeast Asia Associate Lecturers Protest, Dissent and the State in Modern Japan 1860- Jeffrey D. Brazell, BA Utah 1960. Thomas J. Crook, BS MBA Utah
European Studies Marketing 201: Marketing Principles The descriptions of the courses European Studies 201, 8 units 202, 301 and 302 are given in the Economic History Prereq Economics 1, Econometrics 1 section of this Handbook. Classes Sem 1: (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment two 2hr exams, assignments Introduction to the terminology and functions of Marketing marketing in modern business practice. Market forces and opportunities, with reference to the role of social, Introduction economic, political and global influences and trends. The Department of Marketing is currently situated on Macro (societal) and micro (individual and firm) level 3 of the Merewether Building. Initial enquiries implications of the market process and marketing regarding the department may be directed to the decision-making. Marketing 202: Consumer Behaviour marketing issues involved in these organisations. 8 units Course includes case study and research practicum. Coreq Marketing 201: Marketing Principles Classes Sem 2: (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Marketing 304: New Products Marketing Assessment two 2hr exams, assignments 8 units Introduction to and overview of economic, Prereq Marketing 201: Marketing Principles, Marketing 203: psychological and sociological bases of consumer Marketing Research I, Economics II behaviour as they relate to the purchase and Coreq Marketing 301: Marketing Research II consumption of goods and services. Marketing Classes Sem: (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk implications of consumer behaviour and the Assessment two 2hr exams, assignments interaction of consumers and the marketing process Development and marketing of new consumer and of organisations. industrial products and the role of the marketing function in that process. Identification of potentially Marketing 203: Marketing Research I profitable target markets and demand estimation. 8 units Dynamics of new product introductions. Course Coreq Marketing 201: Marketing Principles includes case study and research practicum. Classes Sem 2: (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment two 2hr exams, assignments Introduction to marketing research and the marketing School of Philosophy research industry. Basics of problem recognition, formulation, research design and reporting. Philosophy is a Table A course in the Bachelor of Qualitative research methods. Survey design and data Economics (Social Sciences) degree and a Table B collection. Data entry and coding. Introduction to course in the Bachelor of Economics and Bachelor of basic quantitative analysis. Research practicum. Commerce degrees. The School of Philosophy consists of two Marketing 301: Marketing Research II departments: General Philosophy (GP) and Traditional 8 units and Modern Philosophy (T&M). First, second and third year courses are offered by Prereq Marketing 201: Marketing Principles, Marketing 203: Marketing Research I, Economics II the two departments jointly. Classes Sem 1: (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk There is a separate IV (Honours) year for each Assessment two 2hr exams, assignments department, but with the same pool of courses. Intending honours students should note the entry Quantitative marketing research methods, including requirements mentioned in the fourth year section. multivariate research methods and models. Analysis The General Philosophy office is located in the and interpretation of data, report preparation and southeast corner of the main quadrangle (by the presentation. Applications to market segmentation, jacaranda tree) up one floor (Room S432, phone targeting, positioning and demand forecasting. 351 2225). The Traditional and Modern Philosophy Advanced research methods and overview of current office (Room S241, phone 3512466) is in the same area, state-of-the-art. Research practicum continued from but on the ground floor. Noticeboards adjoin the Marketing 203: Marketing Research I. offices. The General Philosophy office administers matters Marketing 302: Marketing Communications concerning first year (Professor Markus, Room S442, 8 units phone 351 2467). Prereq Marketing 201: Marketing Principles, Marketing 203: The Traditional and Modern Philosophy office Marketing Research I, Economics II administers matters concerning second year and third Coreq Marketing 301: Marketing Research II year courses (Dr McDermott, Room S503, phone Classes Sem: (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk 351 2370). Assessment two 2hr exams, assignments Introduction to and overview of current theory and Staff practice in advertising, sales promotion and personal selling. Course includes case study and research General Philosophy practicum. Professors Paul J. Crittenden, DD Catholic Inst.Syd. BLitt Oxf. Appointed 1991 Marketing 303: Retail and Services Marketing 8 units Gyorgy Markus, DipPhil Moscow CandSciPhil Prereq Marketing 201: Marketing Principles, Marketing 203: Hungarian Acad.Sci. (Personal Chair) Marketing Research I, Economics II Appointed 1994 Coreq Marketing 301: Marketing Research II Senior Lecturers Classes Sem (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Moira Gatens, BA N.S. W. PhD Assessment two 2hr exams, assignments Paul Patton, MA DU Paris The role of marketing and the marketing function Paul Redding, BA PhD (Head of School) within retail and service organisations. Special Denise Russell, BA PhD Lecturers handed in to the department during Orientation Week. Stephen Buckle, MA Macq. PhD A.N.U. Descriptions of second and third year Philosophy John Grumley, BA PhD courses are given in the Faculty of Arts Undergraduate Damien Byers, BA Macq. PhD Melb. Handbook. Administrative Assistants Danielle Frances Philosophy 101 6 units Margaret Walters Semester 1 Philosophy 101 consists of the following two Traditional and Modern Philosophy Components: Challis Professor of Philosophy Keith Campbell, MA N.Z. BPhil Oxf. PhD, FAHA Philosophy and Society Appointed 1992 Dr Buckle Readers Classes Sem 1: (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk John Bacon, BA Wabash MA PhD Yale Assessment one tutorial paper, one essay Stephen W. Gaukroger, BA Lond. MA PhD Camb., An introduction to central themes and methods in FAHA political philosophy. The course will have three main Senior Lecturers components: an introduction to the beginnings of Michael McDermott, BA PhD political thoughtinPlato's Republic; and an examination Huw Price, BA A.N.U. MSc Oxf. PhD Camb. of the two dominant modern alternatives, social contract Lloyd Reinhardt, BA Calif. theory and utilitarianism. The aim of the course will be to show the distinctively different answers given to key Lecturers issues — such as the nature of justice, the value of Eugenio Benitez, BA W.Md PhD Texas democracy, and the competing claims of freedom and Jean Curthoys, BA authority — by the three types of theory. Adrian Heathcote, BA Add. PhD LaT. Textbook Visiting Scholars Readings will be available from the Department of General Kevin Mulligan, MA Camb. PhD Mane. Philosophy Peter Godfrey-Smith, PhD Calif. BA Epistemology Administrative Assistants Dr Heathcote Anthea Bankoff Classes Sem 1: (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Veronica Leahy Assessment one 2hr exam Honorary Appointment An introduction to the theory of knowledge. What is Emeritus Professor knowledge and what can. we know? What is the role David Mallet Armstrong, AO, BPhil Oxf. PhD Melb. of (a) observation, (b) reason, in the acquiring of BA, FAHA knowledge and/or reasonable belief? Plato's defence of objective truth and Descartes' treatment of Registration scepticism will be discussed. Philosophy 101,102 and 103 A first year information sheet and a registration form Textbook will be available during Orientation Week. Please Notes available from the Department of Traditional and complete the form and return it during your allotted Modern Philosophy. Tapes a variable from the Department registration time (see below). of General Philosophy Philosophy 101,102 and 103 students are advised to register with the Department of General Philosophy Philosophy 102 6 units in the southeast corner of the main Quadrangle (behind Semester 2 the jacaranda tree) at the following times during This course consists of two components, one chosen Orientation Week: from Option Pool A and one chosen from Option Pool • Wednesday 22 February B. Surnames A-H 10 am to 4 pm • Thursday 23 February Surnames I-R 10 am to 4 pm Option Pool A All evening students 4.30 pm to 6.30 pm Introduction to Metaphysics • Friday 24 February Prof. Campbell Surnames S-Z 10 am to noon Classes Sem 1:(1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment one 2hr exam Second and third year Philosophy Intending second and third year students should An introduction to problems concerning the general register during Orientation Week at the Department character of Reality. Topics will include Nature and of Traditional and Modern Philosophy. A booklet Supernature, Mind and Matter, Space and Time, containing details of courses and other relevant Substance and Property. information will be available from the department in Textbook January, and the last page of this booklet will comprise Notes available from the Department of Traditional and a registration form which should be completed and Modern Philosophy Elementary Logic Central to this will be the very current debate concern Dr Bacon ing feminism and 'political correctness' embodying Classes Sem 1: (2 lec & 1 tut)/wk the charge that feminism has itself become a repressive Assessment one 2hr exam, class work movement. Logic is the science of valid reasoning. Systematic Reading criteria of validity are developed and applied to A course booklet consisting of a collection of readings will deductive arguments as translated from English into be sold a streamlined notation. Both the logic of truth functional connectives and the logic of quantifiers Foundations of Social Theory will be covered. Ms Curthoys Classes Sem 2: 2hr/wk Textbook Assessment one essay J.B. Bacon Basic Logic (available from the Department of Traditional and Modern Philosophy) The course will discuss the emergence of modern social theory with reference to philosophy. It will be Option Pool B divided into three sections: Marx and the beginnings of 'critical theory'; Weber's sociology and the method Aesthetics of understanding (Versiehen); Burkheirnand the seeds Dr Redding of structuralism. In this way we shall examine the Classes Sem 2: (1 lec & 1 tuf)/wk historical foundations of what are still three of the Assessment one essay major streams in social theory. The reference to This option will examine some of the ways in which philosophy will be twofold. We shall look at the philosophers from the period of the Greeks to the emergence of social theory out of philosophy, and present have thought about the arts. These philo examine the philosophical assumptions of these three sophical conceptions will be examined in the broader social theorists. context of the changing roles played by the arts in society and their relations to other cultural domains. Textbook Readings will be available from the Department of Textbook Traditional and Modern Philosophy Readings will be available through the Department of General Philosophy Philosophy 103 6 units Criticism and Argument This course has Philosophy 101 and Philosophy 102 as Dr Russell corequisites. It comprises any two components from Classes Sem 2: (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Option Pools A or B not taken for Philosophy 102. Assessment coursework Students should note that no individual results This course aims at developing practical skills in given throughout the year canbe regarded as definitive detecting flaws in arguments and in presenting good and that adjustments to grades may be made at the arguments. The emphasis is on informal reasoning Board of Examiners' Meeting of the Faculty. rather than formal logic. Textbook Senior courses — 200 level Available from the Department of General Philosophy Descriptions of the courses are given in the Vacuity of Arts Undergraduate Handbook. Feminism 1 Ms Curthoys Courses Classes Sem 2: (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk The following second year courses will be available: Assessment one essay Philosophy 201,202,203,204 This course will discuss the major developments in Philosophy 201 is a corequisite for 202; 202 is a feminist theory of 'the second wave' by situating them corequisite for 203 and so on. within the context of the changing nature of the Each course is an eight-unit course. However, 201 women's movement itself. It will begin with the and 202 must be completed before either canbe counted analysis of the psychological dimensions of power of towards the BEc (SocSc) degree. Philosophy 201,202, the early Women's Liberation movement which etc. are Table B courses in the BEc and BCom degrees. provides the assumed background for much of the later theory and then move on to the 'feminism of Options difference' which was developed as the movement Each of the courses Philosophy 201, Philosophy 202, became more successful. Although the idea of sexual etc. consists of two components, or 'options', selected difference was developed in terms of a number of from the list below. different theories which refer to each other, the Some options are offered in the first semester (2 discussion will focus on its implications for philosophy hours per week), some in the second semester (2 hour s and particularly on the debate over whether there is per week). All Philosophy courses are designated 'full 'male' and 'feminist' philosophy. But another kind of year' courses—you can choose options from either philosophical question will also be raised. As an semester as components of any course. exercise in evaluating the nature of the feminist Some options are assessed by an essay and an movement which provides the context for such exam, some by two essays; logic options have exercises debates, it will be an exercise in political philosophy. and an exam. In certain circumstances students may choose to be assessed by a single essay of double the Senior courses — 300 level normal length. All options count equally in calculating The following third year courses will be available: course results. Rules governing choice of options Philosophy 301, 302,303, 304 (i) Philosophy 201 comprises any two options, The prerequisite for Philosophy 301 is 16 Senior units (ii) Philosophy 202 must include one of the of Philosophy. Philosophy 301 is a corequisite for following options: Philosophy 302; Philosophy 302 is a corequisite for Plato and Aristotle Philosophy 303; and Philosophy 303 is a corequisite Descartes and 17th Century Continental for Philosophy 304. Philosophy Each course is an eight-unit course. However, 301 Locke and Empiricism, and 302 must be completed before either canbe counted (iii) A student doing 201, 202 and 203 must do at towards the BEc (SocSc) degree. Philosophy 301,302, least one option from each program.* etc. are Table B courses in the BEc and BCom degrees. (iv) Intending honours students should note the entry requirements to Philosophy IV(T) and Options rV(G) set out in the fourth year sections. It is Each of the courses Philosophy 301, Philosophy 302, advisable for such students to attempt 201,202 etc. consists of two components, or 'options', selected and 203, at least, in the second year. from the list below. *Optionsareclassifiedinto three groups,or 'programs': Some options are offered in the first semester (2 History of Philosophy; Epistemology, Metaphysics hours per week), some in the second semester (2 hours and Logic; Moral, Social and Political Philosophy. per week). All Philosophy courses are designated 'full year' courses — you can choose options from either List of options semester as components of any course. History of Philosophy: Some options are assessed by an essay and an Descartes andl7thCenturyContinentalPhilosophy exam, some by essay and take home exam and some Locke and Empiricism by two essays; logic options have exercises and an Plato and Aristotle exam. In certain circumstances students may choose Philosophies of Progress. to be assessed by a single essay of double the normal length. All options count equally in calculating course Epistemology, Metaphysics and Logic: results. Elementary Logic Intermediate Logic Restrictions on choice of options Philosophical Logic (i) Philosophy 301 must include one of the History and Philosophy of Science A following: History and Philosophy of Science B Kant Philosophy of Biology Hegel's Philosophy of Right Analyses of Perception Origins of Analytic Philosophy, Epistemology 2 (ii) Your second and third year courses must Critical Epistemology together include at least one option from each Kinds of Objectivity program.* Hume and the Problem of Causation (iii) Intending honours students should note the Philosophy of Mind entry requirements for Philosophy IVG and Knowledge, Understanding and Interpretation IVT in the fourth year sections. Classical Phenomenology *Options are classified into three groups, or 'programs': Philosophy of Religion. History of Philosophy; Epistemology, Metaphysics Moral, Social and Political Philosophy: and Logic; Moral, Social and Political Philosophy. Arendt List of options History of Ethics History of Philosophy: Moral Psychology Kant Philosophy of Law History of Aesthetics 1 Women, Madness and Medicine History of Aesthetics 2 Contemporary French Philosophy Hegel's Philosophy of Right Critical Feminist Theory Origins of Analytical Philosophy. Philosophy of Economics Philosophy and Literature. Epistemology, Metaphysics and Logic: Classical Phenomenology The list is provisional only. Before enrolling, consult Critical Epistemology the booklet obtainable from the Traditional and Epistemology 2 Modern Philosophy Office. History and Philosophy of Science A Students should note that no individual results given History and Philosophy of Science B throughout the year can be regarded as definitive and Hume and Causation that adjustments to grades may be made at the Board Introductory Logic of Examiners' Meeting of the Faculty. Intermediate Logic Kinds of Objectivity are nominated each year as the Philosophy IV seminar Knowledge, Understanding and Interpretation (one in each semester), and students are expected to Perception take these options. Philosophical Issues in Cognitive Science The entry requirements for Philosophy IVT are: Philosophical Logic students must have passed six senior level Philosophy Philosophy of Biology courses including Philosophy 301, 302 and 303 and Philosophy of Mind must have gained an average of a credit mark for Philosophy of Physics 1: The Rise and Fall of Philosophy courses taken at 300 level; at least two Mechanism options from each of the three programs (History of Philosophy of Physics 2: Modern Physics Philosophy; Epistemology, Metaphysics and Logic; Philosophy of Religion Moral, Social and Political Philosophy) should have Wittgenstein. been passed. Elementary logic, or equivalent, is also a prerequisite for IVT. Moral, Social and Political Philosophy: Arendt Contemporary French Philosophy Critical Feminist Theory Psychology History of Ethics Moral Psychology Introduction Philosophy of Economics Psychology is the study of behaviour. As a study it is Philosophy of Law approached on a scientific basis, with provision for Philosophy and Literature professional training at the postgraduate level. The Women, Madness and Medicine. research activities of the department cover almost all This list is provisional only. Certain options offered of the main branches of the subject. by the School of Studies in Religion and Indian Studies (in the School of Asian Studies) may also be available Registration and noticeboards to Philosophy students. Before enrolling, consult the Students in all years must register during the booklet obtainable from the Traditional and Modern orientation period. Psychology 101 students register Philosophy Office. by going to the Carslaw Building during orientation and collecting a personalised computer-generated Students should note that no individual results given timetable, which will indicate the lecture stream and throughout the year can be regarded as definitive and the tutorial group to which they have been allocated. that adjustments to grades may be made at the Board Further information will be posted at the Enrolment of Examiners' Meeting of the Faculty. Centre and on the first year Psychology noticeboard on the 4th floor of the Griffith Taylor Building. Philosophy IVG Honours Information about registration meetings for The requirements are six options together with a Psychology 201 and 350 students will also be posted at thesis on an approved topic (10 000 to 15 000 words, the Enrolment Centre and on the departmental equivalent of three options). The thesis is supervised noticeboards on the 5th floor of the Griffith Taylor byamemberoftheDepartmentofGeneralPhilosophy. Building. The entry requirements for Philosophy IVG are: students must have passed six senior level Philosophy Enquiries courses including Philosophy 301, 302 and 303 and The main enquiry office of the department is Room must have gained an average of a credit mark for 416, Griffith Taylor Building (telephone 3512872), Philosophy courses taken at 300 level; at least two where details may be obtained of the staff members options from each of the three programs (History of available throughout the year to discuss particular Philosophy; Epistemology, Metaphysics and Logic; courses. Moral, Social and Political Philosophy) should have been passed; and students must complete at least four Courses options from the History of Philosophy program by Undergraduate courses range from a general the end of Philosophy TV. introductory course (Psychology 101) to a wide range of options in Psychology 350, and a specialist additional Courses honours year (Psychology IV Honours). After completing Psychology 101, students seeking See list of courses below under Philosophy IVT to major in psychology should enrol in the Psychology Honours: no restriction on choice. 201 course, which is the prerequisite for Psychology 350. Philosophy IVT Honours Psychology courses are Table A courses in the The requirements are six options together with a BEc(SocSc) degree and Table B courses in the BEc and thesis on an approved topic (10 000 to 15 000 words, BCom degrees. The BEc(SocSc) degree is accredited equivalent of three options). The thesis is supervised by the Australian Psychological Society. by a member of the Department of Traditional and Modern Philosophy. Some of the options may be Honours chosen from those offered by the Department of Because of lack of resources, entry to Psychology rV* General Philosophy. However, two of the six options Honours is limited to 50 students. Honours courses in psychology are not available in Stuart Smith, BSc the BEc or BCom degree. Lynne Sweeney Fiona White, BA Examinations Administrative Officers Undergraduate courses are examined at the end of Annette Fraser, BA Tas. each semester and include class work by way of Helen Loughlin, BA essays or reports of practical or laboratory work. At the beginning of each course or section of a course, Honorary Appointments students are advised of its relative weight and the Emeritus Professors contributions of examinations and class work for Richard Annells Champion, MA, FASSA assessment purposes. Phillip Ley, BA Mane. PhD Liv. MPsychol Lond. John Philip Sutcliffe, MA PhD, FASSA Textbooks Check departmental noticeboard before buying Psychology 101 12 units prescribed texts. Prereq nil Classes Yr: (3 lec & one 2hr prac/tut)/wk Staff Assessment Sem 1: one 3hr exam, one 1000w essay, tut test; Professor Sem 2: one 3hr exam, one 15 500w prac report, tut test; Robert Alan Boakes, BA Cant. PhD Harv. 6hrs experimental participation/yr Appointed 1989 The course is intended to be a general introduction to (Head of Department) the main topics and methods of psychology, and is the basis for advanced work as well as being of use to Readers those not proceeding with the subject. Dale M. Atrens, BA Windsor MA Hollins PhD Rutgers The course covers the following areas: subjectmatter Ian S. Curthoys, PhD Monash BA and methods of psychology; basic statistics and Lazar Stankov, MA Belgrade PhD Denver measurement; psychobiology; sensory processes; Associate Professor social psychology; personality theory; human Helen C. Beh, BA PhD N.E. development; human mental abilities; learning, motivation and abnormal psychology; visual Senior Lecturers perception; cognitive processes. Brian D. Crabbe, BA PhD Alan E. Craddock, BA PhD Textbooks R.F. Soames Job, BA PhD To be announced David J. Kavanagh, BA PhD Stan. DipPsychol Cyril R. Latimer, BA PhD Psychology 201 16 units David J. Livesey, BSc PhD WAust. Prereq Psychology 101 Roslyn H. Markham, MA PhD Classes Yr: (4 lec & 4hr prac/tut)/wk Terence McMullen, BA PhD Assessment two 2hr exams, two essays, prac/sem Joel B. Michell, BA PhD Psychology 201 is an extension of the introductory John M. Predebon, BA PhD material covered in Psychology 101 and covers material David E. Schotte, MS PhD Virginia relating to basic and complex psychological processes. Robyn Tate, MA MPsychol N.S.W. PhD N'cle(N.S. W.) Topics covered are: individualdifferences, personality, Alison M. Turtle, MA neuroscience, perception, cognitive processes, Michael B. Walker, BSc WAust. BA Adel. DPhil Oxf. learning, psychological statistics, social psychology. Lecturers Pauline M. Howie, PhD N.S.W. BA Psychology 350 16 units Iain McGregor, MA Oxf. PhD Prereq Psychology 201 Stephanie Whitmont, BA MPsychol PhD Classes Yr: (4 lec & up to 4-6hr of prac/tut)/wk Assessment Sem 1: one 3hr exam, one 1hr exam, essay, prac; Associate Lecturers Sem 2: one 3hr exam, one 1hr exam, essay, prac Laurel Bornholt, BA Melb. PhD Macq. Maitland M. Bowen, BSc BPsych WAust. MPsychol The detailed arrangements for each semester are as Robert M. Buckingham, BA Cant. MA Auck. follows. Students wishing to proceed to Psychology Julie Carroll IV Honours must complete History and Philosophy Margaret Charles, BA PhD of Psychology and the options in Measurement and Psychometrics, and Statistics and Research Design, Yvette Dennis plus two options in each semester. Robert H. Kerr, BBSc LaT. Justine Lum, BA Students not wishing to proceed to Psychology IV Honours must complete History and Philosophy of Simon Milton, BA Psychology plus three options each semester. Agi O'Hara, BA Janette Perz, BA Note: All Psychology options are offered subject to the Agnes Petocz, BA availability of staff and on the condition that they are Sandra Rickards, BA chosen by an adequate number of students in each Richard Roberts, BA case. The topics include: Semester 1 Personality Abnormal Psychology Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment one 1hr exam, assignment Assessment one 1hr exam, one 1500w essay, tut paper Behavioural Neuroscience Cognitive Processes: Recognition, Search and Classes (1 lec & up to 2hr of prac/tut)/wk Memory Assessment one 1hr exam, prac report Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment one 1hr exam, prac reports Statistics and Research Design (required of all students wishing to proceed to Psychology History and Philosophy of Psychology IV Honours) (required of all students) Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment one 1hr exam, prac report Assessment one 1hr exam, tut paper Students should note that entry to Psychology IV Intelligence Honours is restricted to students who have gained at Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk least a credit in Psychology 201 and 350 and who have Assessment one 1hr exam, one prac report, tut paper completed the appropriate options. Learning and Motivation Classes (1 lec & up to 2hr of tut/prac)/wk Psychology IV Honours Assessment one 1hr exam, prac report Prereq Credit or better in each of Psychology 201 and 350 as well as fulfilment of conditions as specified for Psychology Measurement and Psychometrics 350 for students intending to proceed to honours. (required of all students wishing to proceed to Psychology Entry will be limited to 50 students and will be IV Honours) determined by academic merit. Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment one 1hr exam, prac report Students are required to (a) devise, conduct and report upon an empirical research project, (b) write a Social Psychology theoretical thesis, (c) attend one lecture course and Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk two seminar courses throughout the year, and (d) Assessment one 1hr exam, prac report attend lecture courses in psychological methods. Human Performance Books Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Book lists will be supplied by staff handling the numerous Assessment one 1hr exam, prac report special fields that are available Theoretical Bases of Development Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk School of Studies in Religion Assessment one 1hr exam, one 1500w essay Religious Studies is a Table A course in the Bachelor of Semester 2 Economics (Social Sciences) degree and a Table B Environmental and Organisational Psychology course in the Bachelor of Economics and Bachelor of Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Commerce degrees. Descriptions of Religious Studies Assessment one 1hr exam, one prac report courses are given in the Faculty of Arts Undergraduate Child A bnormal Psychology Handbook. Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment one 1hr exam, one 1000w essay, tut paper Developmental Issues Social Work and Social Policy Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Assessment one 1hr exam, assignment Registration Students must register with the Department of Social History and Philosophy of Psychology Work and Social Policy of the same time as their University (required of all students) enrolment, by completing a registration card. It is also Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk necessary to register for tutorials in the first week of Assessment one 2hr exam, one 2500w essay, tut paper lectures. The Nature/Nurture Controversy in Psychology Classes (1 lec & 1 tuf)/wk Location Assessment one 1hr exam, one 1500w essay, tut paper The Department of Social Work and Social Policy is in the R.C. Mills Building on the lower floor. Language and Communication Classes (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Staff Assessment one 1hr exam, assignment Professor Perceptual Systems Stuart John Rees, BA DipSocShid CertSoc Casework Classes (1 lec & up to 2hr of tut/prac)/wk S'ton PhD Aberd. Assessment one 1hr exam, prac report Appointed 1978 Professor of Sociology and Social Policy (Personal Chair) grounded in the social and organisational context of Bettira Cass, AO, BA PhD N.S. W., FASSA Australia's welfare system, and the implications for Appointed 1990 contemporary debates, and the effects on social, occupational and fiscal welfare are examined. Associate Professor Michael D. Horsburgh, MSW N.S.W. BA DipSocWk Readings (Head of Department) S. Garton Out of Luck: Poor Australians and Social Welfare 1788-1988 (Allen & Unwin, 1990) Senior Lecturers A. Forder el al. Theories of Welfare (Routledge & Kegan Paul, Alan G. Davis, BA Sheff. MScSoc N.S.W. 1984) John S. Freeland, BEcon BEd DipEd Qld Janet E.G. George, BA N.E. MPhil H.K. PhD John Hart, MA Brad. DiplSocAdmin Lond. PhD SOCIOLOGY Jude L. Irwin, BSW N.S.W. MA Macq. Sociology is the study of human societies. The subject Mary Lane, BA MSW DipSocStud matter of sociology includes human.behaviour in Alec Pemberton, BSocSt MA Qld various social contexts, social interaction, social Robert M. van Krieken, BA PhD N.S.W. institutions, social organisation, social change and development. A major focus of sociological research Lecturers has been the emergence, characteristics and Christine Crowe, BA N.S.W. consequences of industrial societies. The sociology Renee Koonin, MA(Social Work) Witw. taught at the University of Sydney emphasises both Jan Larbalestier, BA PhD Macq. an historical and a comparative approach to the Glenn Lee, BSocStud MSW N.S.W. discipline and its subject matter. M. Lindsey Napier, MA Aberd. DipSocStud Edin. The study of sociology is a rewarding and DipMH Lond. MSW stimulating enterprise, bothintellectualry and in terms Zita I. Weber, BSocStud PhD of future career prospects in a variety of professional Marie Wilkinson, BSocStud N.S.W. MSW fields. It is also an important addition to related Associate Lecturers disciplines such as government, economics, philos Annette Falahey, BA N.S.W. ophy, education, psychology, anthropology and Agi O'Hara, BA history, and it usefully complements studies in English, Administrative Officer fine arts, languages, and science. Janice Whittington, BA Students may proceed in their third year to Social Policy and Administration 301. Administrative Assistants Margaret Gilet Quota Nancy Reimer There may be a quota on enrolment in Sociology. Students should not purchase the textbooks until SOCIAL POLICY AND ADMINISTRATION their admission to the course has been confirmed. Social policy is the study of a range of policies which Honours affect the social and economic welfare of individuals, Students intending to proceed to Sociology IV families and broader social groupings. The policies (Honours) must complete forty senior sociology units studied include those formulated at all levels of including Sociology 390, obtainresults averaging credit government, by non-government welfare organisa or above in all their senior sociology units, and the tions and by the private sector. Policies studied include: options completed mustinclude Classical Sociological income support, housing, work and employment, Theory. health, family and children's services, youth policies, policies for the aged, urban and regional development. Social Policy and Administration 301 is a third year Sociology 101 12 units course. Classes Yr: (2 lec & one 2hr tut)/wk Assessment two 2hr exam, 4 written assignments Social Policy and Administration 301 The course is designed to provide students with a 16 units basic understanding of the concepts and vocabulary used in sociology and to familiarise them with the Social Policy and Administration 301 is compulsory major theoretical orientations and areas of research in for BSW students and is available to BA and BEc(SocSc) sociology. It aims to enable students to develop a students. critical and historically informed understanding of Dr George, Prof. Cass, Assoc. Prof. Horsburgh, Mr Freeland, Australian and other industrial societies, as well as Mr Pemberton providing a comprehension of diverse cultures and Classes Yr: (1 lec & one 2hr tut)/wk social systems. Assessment one 3hr exam, two tut papers, two essays 1st semester: an introduction to the major concepts and This course provides an introduction to social policy areas of debate in sociology; the development of in Australia. The experience of universal themes in sociology as a separate discipline in response to social policy is analysed in relation to the development industrialisation and urbanisation; social interaction, of the Australian welfare state. The philosophical social institutions, social organisation, culture and debates on principles of allocation of welfare are socialisation. 2nd semester: an exploration of some major areas of In this core unit we introduce students to some of the sociological investigation, such as inequality in methodological issues and debates in contemporary industrial societies; the social distribution of sociology and their impact on the range and types of knowledge; social change in modern society; the research methods that sociologists commonly use. impact of war, technology and globalisation. Emphasis is placed on developing a critical abiHty to Textbooks read sociological texts with an eye to their methodo Consult department logical adequacy, as well as an appreciation of their theoretical contribution. Examples wiU be drawnfrom a range of sociological research monographs, both Sociology 201 8 units classical and contemporary, to show the ways in Prereq Sociology 101 ■ . which theory and method have been used to produce Classes Sem 1 sociological knowledge. The major types of research technique employed by sociologists will be described Sociology 202 8 units along with problems of interpretation that arise from Coreq Sociology 201 their use in particular studies. Classes Sem 2 Sociology 201 and 202 will provide students with an Level 200 options extended grounding in sociological theory and Classes one 2hr seminar/wk researchmethods, as well as a detailed understanding Assessment 3000w essay of their application in at least two areas of sociological investigation. Social Inequality in Australia Each course consists of one core unit and one level Ms Crowe, Dr Larbalestier, Dr van Krieken 200 option. Options may be available in either first or This course explores patterns of social differentiation second semester only. Students should consult the and their consolidation into patterns of social department early in the year for timetable details. inequality which structure both objective social positions and subjective experiences. The main Sociology 290 8 units dimensions of social differentiation to be considered Prereq Sociology 101 at credit level are class, gender, race and ethnicity. Students wiU Coreq Sociology 201 and 202 examine the various bases of social inequaHty, its Classes Yr construction and maintenance, the social settings (welfare, school, family, work organisations, etc.) in This course consists of an additional two options which it is manifested, and the organised struggles to chosen from those listed below under 200 options. overcome inequaHty. As weU as dealing with the main sociological perspectives on social differentiation and Core units inequaHty, the course will move between those general Sociological Theory discussions and an examination of the ways in which Classes Sem 1: (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk the different dimensions of inequaHty interact with Assessment open book exam each other in AustraHan society. This course will examine the main strands of Sociology of the Family sociological thought, identifying the key concepts, Ms Falahey, Dr van Krieken debates and issues in the development of sociological theory while situating the production and The family is widely understood as a basic social interpretation of that theory in its social and political institution and a primary agent of sociaHsation, making context. It will focus on the writing of leading social it important that its nature and dynamics be critically theorists and sociologists, their contribution to the examined and sociologicaUy evaluated. This option development of a distinctly sociological theory, and wiU examine sociological studies of family Hfe written their continuing impact on current theoretical debates from a variety of theoretical positions, including in sociology. feminist, positivist, structuraHst, functionaHst and Topics covered will include: the origins of sociology; Marxist perspectives. industrialism and the beginnings of a science of society; Issues addressed in the course will include: gender evolutionary social theory; classic theorists: Marx, inequaHty and the division of labour within the modern Durkheim, Sirnmel, Weber; sociology of urban society, family, patterns of childcare and the ideology of early feminist critiques of industrial society; motherhood, the family and the welfare state, interactionism and everyday life; functionaHsm and continuity and change in family forms, conflict and systems theory; critiques of functionaHsm; psycho instabiHty within the family, and alternatives to the analysis and sociaHsation; sociology of knowledge nuclear family. and culture; feminist challenges to sociological paradigms. Sociology of Religion Mr Pemberton Textbooks Consult department noticeboard This course wiU provide an introduction to the central sociological debates and issues in the study of reHgion Social Enquiry: Research Methods in Sociology in modern society, with an emphasis on reHgion in Classes Sem 2: (1 lec & 1 tut)/wk Western industriaHsed societies. The following topics Assessment 3000w essay will be covered: the classic theorists (Weber, the Protestant ethic and the rise of capitalism; Marx and nature of the term 'deviance' in sociology, at the religion as ideology; Durkheim and religion as moral contested nature of a concept used both as a lay and social cohesion); later sociological approaches to evaluation of conduct, persons or social settings, as the definition of religion (typologies of cults and well as a term used by sociologists adopting the sects); issues of method and interpretation (is believing perspectiveof those involved in policingand correction in a religion incompatible with studying it? can we to characterise those transgressing moral and legal make sense of a religion if we do not share its central boundaries. The confusion that this has engendered dogmas?); secularisation and the role of religion in in the analysis -of rule-breaking conduct has led to a contemporary Australian society; New Age common-sense content for the sociology of deviance movements and conceptions of spirituality; social and a correctional focus that leaves rules largely inequality, religion and society (feminist critiques of unexamined. Instead, this option has a wider interest religion, Marx and Christianity). than traditional criminology or corrections, and takes as its subject matter a diverse range of social settings Textbooks and personal conduct in order to encourage students Either to identify the historical origins of the rules that govern R. Gill (ed.) Theology and Sociology: A Reader (Chapman, them, the way in which some settings become officially 1987) or designated as deviant along with the persons and R. Robertson The Sociology of Religion (Penguin, 1987) conduct that are found in them, and the origin and types of social control that are exerted to maintain Feminist Theory and Sociology conformity with rules. The consequences of these Prof. Cass, Dr Larbalestier attempts at control are also analysed. Theories of Students will be introduced to contemporary feminist deviance will be examined, and particular forms of theory in order to explore its contribution to sociology. deviance will be analysed, e.g. alcohol abuse, hygiene, We will consider the diverse strands of feminist food disorders, sexual conduct. thought in relation to dominant sociological Sociology of Childhood and Youth epistemologies (e.g. liberal feminism, socialist Dr van Krieken feminism, radical feminism, postmodernism). Particular attention will be paid to the contribution of The main sociological theories concerning childhood feminist theory and research to studies of class, race and youth in modern industrial societies will be and the development of the modern state. examined, as well as the ways in which a particular Feminist contributions to and critiques of perspective on childhood is central to all social theory. sociological understandings of social processes will It will examine the debates surrounding historical also be discussed in relation to a range of specific development of childhood as a separate stage of life, issues. These will include: state policies and practices, and the various approaches to the impact of state gender differentiation and public/private interventionand social policies onboth the experiences demarcations; class and inequality; gender identity of childhood and youth and the transition to adulthood. and subordination; equal rights and the construction The course will explore the ways in which a particular of difference, and family life. kind of childhood experience might be typical of modern societies, and how it is currently changing in Sociology of Work and Welfare response to surrounding social developments. We Prof. Cass, Mr Freeland will also discuss the social construction of issues such The course will introduce students to the major as child abuse and youth homelessness as social theoretical debates and sociological research relating problems, possibly engaging in a research project on to work, employment and welfare in advanced these topics, and the sociological understanding of the industrial societies. They will become familiar with current concern with the integration of young people the major concepts and theoretical approaches to the into society. study of work and welfare, and be introduced to the social, economic and political contexts of these debates Sociology of Health and Illness Mr Davis from the development of industrial capitalism in Western countries until the 1980s. Students will be familiarised with the application of Issues to be covered will include: the history of sociological theory to the distribution and experience work; the division between paid and unpaid labour; of health and illness in populations of different kinds, the development of the capitalist labour market; places and times, the organisation of health care in theories of the labour market; technology and the comparative and historical perspective, the types of labour process; work and social citizenship; causes, specialised occupations and professions that develop distribution and social effects of unemployment; social knowledge about health and illness, and the practices security and labour market programs; debates about they employ. Australian health care, patterns of illness the 'future of work': conservative, liberal, social and their management will be discussed. democratic, feminist, and environmental 'futures' compared. Sociology of Social Development Mr Davis, Dr George Sociology of Deviance This course will introduce students to sociological Mr Davis, Ms Falahey studies and theories of development and will question Students will begin by looking at the problematic theproblematicresiduallocarionofsocialdevelopment relative to political and economic development. The This will be followed by the main theoretical relationship between state, family and social perspectives on social movements — functionalist, development will be explored with respect to: the phenomenological, Marxist, feminist and post- cultural, political, economic and historical contexts of structuralist accounts. These theoretical debates will social development; social change, social mobility then be related to a range of key issues and topics, and issues of class, race and gender; the role and including cultural and political frameworks in which efficacy of international aid programs in social social movements are expressed, morality and development. The course will draw primarily on collective protests, sexuality and group mobilisation, examples from the Asia-Pacific region, focusing on the Australian union movement, women's move policies of health, education and social welfare. ments, peace and 'green' movements as well as Aboriginal land rights. Sociology of the Professions Dr George, Mr Pemberton Sociology 301 8 units This course concerns the main sociological studies of Prereq Sociology 201 and 202 professions in modern societies and the theoretical Classes Sem 1 debates surrounding them. The key elements in the development of professions and semi-professions will Sociology 302 8 units be analysed from a comparative and historical Coreq Sociology 301 perspective. These will include recruitment, training Classes Sem 2 and socialisation; professional autonomy and power; intersections of class, race/ethnicity and gender; Sociology 301 and 302 will further consolidate students' professions and the state, and will be related to a range understanding of sociological theory and research of professions and semi-professions, including law, methods, providing for a close examination of the medicine, nursing, teaching and social work. classical basis of sociology as well as recent debates and current areas of sociological investigation. Media in Contemporary Society Sociology 301 and 302 each consist of one option from Ms Crowe, Ms Falahey those listed below. Each option runs for one semester —please consult the department early in the year for This course will examine the role of media in timetable details. contemporary society. It will provide students with an understanding of media forms and their positionin relation to the ideological construction of culture, Sociology 303 8 units their symbolic functioning as well as the processes Coreq Sociology 302 involved in mass communication both at the point of Classes Sem 1 or Sem 2 creation and at the point of impact. This option will This course consists of an additional option chosen cover a range of sociological perspectives and from those listed below. methodological approaches, including positivist, structuralist, feminist, functionalist, Marxist and post Sociology 390 8 units modern frameworks. The course will begin with a Prereq credit average in Sociology 201 and 202 discussion of the sociological debates about media Coreq Sociology 301 and 302 forms and their reception within Western industrial Classes Sem 1 or Sem 2 society. This will be followed by a discussion of what constitutes a 'mass' audience. The media forms which This course consists of an additional option chosen will be the central focus in this course include radio, from those listed below. television, newspapers, magazines and film. These analytical debates and media forms will thenbe related Level 300 options to a range of issues and topics — the part played in Classes one 3hr seminar/wk social life by media, media and the commodification Assessment 1500w tut paper, 3000w essay, exam of desire, the role of information technology within communication industries, legal aspects involved in Classical Sociological Theory 8 units media production and reception, advertising and Mr Davis, Dr Larbalestier, Dr van Krieken, Mr Pemberton media, sport and media, news reporting and the This course provides a critical and detailed study of portrayal of women and family life in media. the work of Marx, Weber, Durkheim and Simmel. Students will examine the various features of these Social Movements writers' work, the ways in which they constitute central Ms Crowe, Ms Falahey paradigms in sociological reasoning and research, The course will examine the organisational processes and the ways in which their ideas continue to exert an involved in collective action. It will familiarise students influence on current debates in sociology. with the major theoretical perspectives and key sociological debates to do with social movements. We Sociology of Urbanisation and Modernity will begin with a discussion of the external and internal 8 units factors which give rise to social movements, the history Prof. Cass, Dr Larbalestier of the development of various forms of collective The focus of this course is sociological understandings action and an examination of the ways in which social of modernity in the context of contemporary movements operate at both macro and micro levels. urbanisationinindustrial societies. Studies will centre on time, space and gender distinctions which are 'individuality' and 'privacy', the historical develop integral to theories of modernity. The course will ment of emotional responses and the management of examine historical processes of urbanisation, and the emotions within differing social and historical contexts, various ways in which class structure and relationships the role played by the knowledge produced by the and gender order and relationships are represented human sciences in constituting human subjectivity in spatially in the market and in everyday life. The role particular forms, and the impact of various social of urban social movements and urban political debates institutions such as church, family, school, welfare in contemporary Australia will also be examined. and therapy on the experience of subjectivity. Sociology of Mental Illness 8 units Sexuality and Society 8 units Mr Pemberton Mr Davis, Dr van Krieken This course will introduce students to core themes Students will examine sexuality as a social and issues in the sociological study of mental illness, phenomenon. It will familiarise students with both: with an historical and critical emphasis. Issues will be (1) the major sociological perspectives, and (2) the placed in their historical context wherever possible to central areas of substantive sociological research and indicate the development of particular debates in debate on sexuality. We will begin with a discussion their social, cultural and political setting. The course of the sociological arguments against approaching will compare and evaluate rival or alternative sexuality as a biological construct, the history of both approaches and perspectives to mental illness, as well expressions of sexual behaviour and attitudes towards as utilising the empirical evidence on mental illness to sexuality, and the examination of sexuality as culturally guide students through the issues, debates and variable and socially constructed. This willbe followed controversies. Topics covered will include: sociological by the main theoretical perspectives on sexuality — studies of the causes of mental illness, cross-cultural psychoanalysis, Marxism, symbolic interactionism, studies, social factors in depression, labelling theory feminism, and the work of Foucault and his successors. and its assessment, mental illness as myth, anti- These theoretical debates will then be related to a psychiatry, feminist critiques of psychiatry, the number of substantive themes and issues—the social sociology of psychiatry and psychiatric practice, the construction of masculinity, femininity, and hetero- sociology of the mental hospital, and deinstitutional- and homosexuality, the representation of sexuality in isation. pornography, the media, art and literature, prostitution, sexuality and violence, work, sport, and Sociology of Social Problems and the Welfare the social movements surrounding the politics of State 8 units sexual identity. Mr Davis Science, Technology and Social Change This course will explore the possible social scientific 8 units frameworks with which to analyse critically current Ms Crowe social issues and problems as well as the institutions and practices of the welfare state. It will be concerned Students will examine the major sociological theories both with sociological theories of the social construc concerning science and technology, and relate these tion of social problems and specific case studies which theories to the issue of social change. It will examine illustrate the theoretical perspectives and arguments, the effects of scientific and technological innovation in order to provide a sound basis for an informed, on society as well as the shaping of science and critical and imaginative understanding of the welfare technology by cultural, economic, political and state and its possible future development. There will organisational considerations. The course will explore be an emphasis on an Australian perspective, to the social process of invention to provide students illuminate the specific character of the development with an appreciation of the dynamics of the science- of the welfare state in Australia. Topics covered will technology relationship. Past and present responses include: ideology and the social construction of social to technology, including Luddism, alternative problems; the state and welfare; professions, women technology debates, and feminist critiques of reproductive technology will be explored to illustrate and welfare; professionalisation and clients; the some of the major tenets concerning the relationship organisation of bureaucratic and professional work; of technology to social change. Theoretical frameworks welfare as social regulation and social control. will include feminist, Marxist, liberal, critical theorist Self and Society 8 units and postmodernist perspectives. These positions will Dr van Krieken be related to current social issues such as reproductive technologies, genetic engineering, paid employment, This course examines the social construction of domestic technology, state sponsorship of scientific subjectivity: how individual personality and everyday and technological innovation, the 'industrialisation' life are formed and structured by changing social of scientific research, the environment and alternative conditions and relationships, as well as playing an technologies. active role in processes of social change. This general subject will be approached by focusing ona number of more specific topics, which will include Sociology IV Honours the question of whether there is a human 'nature' Prereq 40 senior units, including Sociology 390 and Classical outside of society and social relations, the history and Sociological Theory social context of notions and experiences of Sociology IV students will be required to undertake a research seminar and the advanced seminar listed below, and submit a dissertation based on their own research of 15 000 to 20 000 words depending on the research method. Arrangements concerning dissertation topics and supervision will be made early in the year.
Research Seminar Classes Sem 1 & 2: one 2hr seminar/wk Assessment one tut paper and progress reports on the dissertation The seminar will examine issues concerning methods and perspectives in sociological research emerging from student dissertation projects, as well as research design and organisation. Students will also be required to present reports on the progress of their research throughout the year.
Contemporary Issues in Sociological Thought Prof. Cass, Mr Davis, Dr Larbalestier, Ms Crowe, Mr Pemberton, Dr Van Krieken Classes Sem 1: one 3hr seminar/wk Assessment tut paper, two 5000w essays This seminar will examine current debates in sociological thought and the ways in which they are stimulating and informing recent, and especially Australian, social research. Topics covered will include: the reconceptualisation of class, economy and society in the modern state; feminist critiques of and contributions to sociological analysis; the contributions made by sociologists to contemporary economic and social policy debates; the relationship between micro- and macro-sociology, the implications of neo-Parsonian and neo-Weberian sociological theories for contemporary social analysis; recent work on social action and social movements; theories of power and empowerment, current debates in historical sociology; and conceptualisations of 'postmodernity'. NOTE: This chapter of the handbook contains First Second Full year information specific to the Faculty of Economics and semester semester course some general information. For further details about course course the University — its organisation, examinations, assistance for students with disabilities, child care Withdraw by 30 March 30 August 30 March facilities, accommodation, health, counselling, Discontinue end of 7th end of 7th end of first financial assistance, careers advice and a range of with permis week of week of week of other matters — see the University of Sydney Diary, sion by Semi Sem2 Sem2 available free from the Student Centre and student Union outlets. Discontinue last day of last day of last day of by lectures lectures lectures Semi Sem2 Sem2
Enrolment Computer facilities Special enrolment instructions The Faculty has a range of up-to-date computing From 1995 compulsory pre-enrolment has been facilities that virtually all students will use at some introduced for local undergraduate students in time during their studies. Students of Accounting, second or later years. Students should reply to the Econometrics, Economics, Finance and Marketing will pre-enrolment request in October of each year for the most certainly be concerned with computer usage. following year. When pre-enrolling, all The computers are generally networked personal undergraduate students must complete a degree computers. planning sheet. This will be checked and approved In the Institute Building on City Road, next to the by a faculty adviser. The Faculty of Economics is also Merewether Building, there is a large laboratory participating in enrolment by post about which all containing 80 computers. This number will soon be re-enrolling students will receive information by increased to 100. The laboratory is located in the mail. This may mean that you may not have to enrol Upper Institute and is equipped with several high in person at the University. It is therefore very speed printers. It services the needs of many courses, important for students to have a correct semester particularly at first and second year level. and long vacation address on the University system. The Faculty also has a smaller Advanced Users Changes of address can be made through the Student Laboratory, housed in Room N471 of the Institute Centre or the Faculty of Economics office. The Building. The 25 or so computers here are generally enrolment procedure is explained in special leaflets for the use of third year students, honours students available from the Student Centre. and postgraduates. Research postgraduate students are additionally catered for through a set of 36 individual study carrels, each of which is supplied with a modern networked Discontinuation personal computer. There is also a small laboratory The table below sets out the dates by which variations containing about 10 computers for general uses, such as word processing; they are to be found in Seminar of enrolment should be made. Faculty of Economics Room 10 of the Merewether Building. Nearby the students should make changes at the Faculty Office Faculty also offers computer facilities suitable for where variation of enrolment forms are available. disabled students. Changes may also be made by submitting changes via the confirmation of enrolment form which you receive in the mail to the Faculty of Economics office. Lecture and seminar rooms If you withdraw from a course, the course does not Information as to where the lectures will be held is on appear on your academic transcript and you are not noticeboards in the foyer, Level Two (Courtyard level) charged the Higher Education Contribution. If you of the Merewether Building. discontinue with permission or discontinue a course, As far as is practicable, lectures and tutorials it will appear on your transcript with the date when provided by the Faculty of Economics are held in the you made the change. The Associate Dean Merewether Building or the Institute Building, but the (Undergraduate Studies) may consider that a course increasing division of classes and the introduction of may be discontinued with permission after the relevant semesters may result in more lectures and tutorials date if there is evidence of serious illness or being held elsewhere in the University. In any case, misadventure. Withdrawal from a course or during the annual examinations students will find discontinuation with permission are not considered themselves allotted seats in any part of the University. for the purposes of exclusion.. It is useful, therefore, to discover the whereabouts of lecture theatres and lecture rooms. The following will possible and practicable, all further tests will be assist in direction and students are reminded that a administered before the Board of Examiners' Meeting. map of the Main Campus of the University is at the 4. All incomplete results at the time of submission end of this handbook. of marks to the Board of Examiners are recorded by Merewether Lecture Theatres 1 and 2 the symbol "V (result to come). Any incomplete result These are fitted with tiered seats; the larger theatre is not finalised by the commencement of first semester thatnearer the ButlinAvenue/Gty Road corner.Entry in the next academic year will be altered to 'Fail', on is from the downstairs corridor or from the assembly the approval of the Associate Dean (Undergraduate Studies) in consultation with theHead of Department. area at the Covered Way level. Students late for lectures 5. The Head of Department is responsible for the will assist if they enter by doors at the Covered Way level, timetabling and conduct of further tests, which may that is, if they go to the back of the theatres. take such form as the Head of Department directs. Merewether Lecture Rooms 3,4 and 5 Students in a course must be given notice of the Courtyard level, entry from the Colonnade. proposed date for conducting further tests no later than the date of publication of the final University Merewether Lecture Room 6 examinations timetable. Butlin Avenue level, entry from downstairs corridor. 6. Individual students granted a further test Merewether Seminar Rooms 1,2,3,4,5 and 6 should, wherever possible, be given at least three Butlin Avenue level, entry from downstairs corridor. days' prior notice. A candidate who is absent from a Merewether Seminar Rooms 7,9 and 11 further test without sufficient reason may be deemed Butlin Avenue level, entry from downstairs corridor, to have failed the test. past entrance to Lecture Theatre 2. 7. Inrespecttothenotificationofstudentsreferred to in sections 5 and 6, students will be deemed to have Institute Lecture Theatre 1 been notified as a result of the posting of information In Institute Building at the front on City Road next to by the due date on the Faculty of Economics Merewether Building. noticeboards. Institute Lecture Rooms 2 and 3 and Institute Rooms 331 8. It is the responsibility of the student to provide and 386 evidence of illness or misadventure to the appropriate In Institute Building on City Road next to Merewether Head of Department as soon as possible and practicable Building. after the date of the final examination in a course. Where such evidence is not presented in time for the Bosch Theatres student to be offered a further test on the advertised On Western Avenue; these form part of the lecture facilities of the Faculty of Medicine and adjoin the date, it will only be considered by the Head of Royal Prince Alfred Hospital area. Department where there is sufficient reason why it has not been presented by that date. Carslaw Theatres and Seminar Rooms 9. The highest grade of award at a further test is On Eastern Avenue in the main University area; the Pass, except where the further test is granted on the theatres form a wing extending north from the main grounds of illness or misadventure. structure and are reached by stairs from the main 10. These regulations apply to the BEc, the court. BEc(SocSc) and the BCom. PNR Theatres Aegrotat results The name given the Peter Nicol Russell Theatres of the The Head of a Department may recommend to the Engineering Faculty. The Engineering 'precinct' is Board of Examiners that a candidate be awarded the along Darlington Road; a point of identification is, for result of Pass (aegrotat) in a course or Honours example, the bright blue hydraulics tower of Civil (aegrotat) in a Final Honours year in cases where: Engineering. (a) because of serious illness or misadventure the Stephen Roberts Lecture Theatre candidate has been unable to sit for the annual On Eastern Avenue; a separate building with irregular examination; and copper roof near Carslaw Building, and close to the (b) it is unlikely, for the same reasons, that the boundary of the public park. candidate would be able to attempt a further test; and Examinations and further tests (c) the Head of Department is satisfied beyond doubt on the basis of the work performed Extract from the resolutions of the Faculty throughout the year, that had the candidate 1. No supplementary examinations are awarded beenable to sitforme examination the candidate to candidates for the BEc, BEc(SocSc) and BCom. would have achieved at least the result 2. Further tests may be awarded where the recommended. candidate has been prevented by sufficient and duly The only aegrotat result available on first, second certified illness or misadventure from completing a and third year courses, whether pass or honours, is course. pass (aegrotat). 3. Further tests may also be awarded in a course where the examiner requires further evidence to reach Slip-back passes a final assessment of a candidate who has failed a A student enrolled in the courses Economics III or course and whose performance is borderline. Where Economics HI Additional maybe granted a 'slip-back' pass if he or she fails one option in the course and (b) Anystudentwhohasbeenexcludedfrom passes the other. The result will be recorded as a pass a course or courses by one Faculty, in the short course Economics III Supplementary. College Board or Board of Studies in accordance with section 2 and who Restriction upon re-enrolment wishes to enrol in that course or courses in another Faculty, College or another There are certain circumstances in which you could be Board of Studies, may apply for such asked to show good cause why you should be enrolment after at least two academic permitted to repeat any previously attempted study. years and that other Faculty, College IiabiHtyforexclusionfromre-enrolmentisdetermined Board or Board of Studies may permit by academic attainment during the immediate past himorhertoenrolinthecourseor courses one or two academic years. The resolutions of the from which he or she was previously Senate restricting re-enrolment may be found in the excluded. University's Statutes and regulations, indexed under 'Re-enrolment'. You should acquaint yourself with 4. Except with the express approval of the Faculty, the studies in which you are enrolled. If you are in any College Board or Board of Studies concerned a student doubt about your liability for exclusion following excluded from a year or course who is readmitted academic failure or discontinuation of courses, you shall not be given credit for any work completed in should ask advice of the Exclusions Officer in the another Faculty, Collegeor Board of Studies or another Records Services section. university during the period of exclusion. It is not possible to define in advance all the reasons 5. Before exercising its powers under section 2 or that constitute 'good cause' but serious ill health, or 3 inrelation to an individual course, a Faculty, College misadventure properly attested, will be considered. Board or Board of Studies shall consult the Head of the In addition your general record, for example in other Department or School responsible for the course. courses, would be taken into account. In particular, if 6. The Senate authorises the Faculty, College Board . you were transferring from another faculty your record or Board of Studies as a whole or a Faculty or College in your previous faculty would be considered. Not Committee or Board of Studies Committee usually acceptable as good cause are such matters as representing the main teaching departments in each demands of employers, pressure of employment, time Faculty, College or Board of Studies, to carry out all devoted to non-university activities and so on, except duties arising out of sections 1,2,3,4 and 5. as they may be relevant to any serious ill health or 7. [Section 7 relates to appeals to the Senate. The misadventure. full text appears in the University of Sydney Calendar The resolutions of the Senate concerning 'Restriction 1993, Volume I, p 219.] upon Re-enrolment of certain students who fail in Annual Examinations' are as follows: A. Students in all Faculties, Colleges and 1. The Senate authorises any Faculty, College Boards of Studies Board or Board of Studies to require a student who 8. The Senate authorises any Faculty, College comes within the provisions of sections 8 to 24 below Board or Board of Studies to require a student to show to show good cause why he or she should be allowed good cause why he or she should be allowed to repeat to re-enrol or to repeat a year of candidature or a in that Faculty, College or Board of Studies (a) a year course in that Faculty, College or Board of Studies. of candidature in which he or she has failed or 2. Subject to section 5, the Faculty, College Board discontinued more than once, or (b) any course in or Board of Studies may exclude a student who fails to which he or she has failed or discontinued more than show good cause from— once, whether that course was failed or discontinued (a) the degree course or year of candidature when he or she was enrolled for a degree supervised concerned, and/or by that Faculty, College Board or Board of Studies, or (b) the course or courses concerned both in by another Faculty, College Board or Board of Studies. that Faculty, College or Board of Studies 9. The Senate authorises the several Faculties, and in any other Faculty, College or Board Colleges or Boards of Studies to require a student of Studies in which that course or those who, because of failure or discontinuation has been courses may be taken. excluded from a Faculty, College or course, either in 3. Subject to section 5— the University of Sydney or in another tertiary (a) Anystudentwhohasbeenexcludedfrom institution, but who has subsequently been admitted a year of candidature or from a course or or readmitted to the University of Sydney, to show courses by a Faculty, College Board or good cause why he or she should be allowed to repeat Board of Studies in accordance with either (a) the first year of attendance in which after section 2 and who wishes to re-enrol in such admission or readmission he or she fails or that year of candidature or that course or discontinues, or (b) any course in which in the first those courses, may apply for such re- year after admission or readmission he or she fails or enrolment after at least two academic discontinues. years and that Faculty, College Board or Board of Studies may permit him or her F. Faculty of Economics to re-enrol in the year or the course or 14. (1) The Senate authorises the Faculty of courses from which he or she was Economics to require a student to show cause previously excluded. why the student should be allowed to re-enrol for the degree of Bachelor of Economics, 3. Prize compositions: Details of these may be obtained Bachelor of Economics (Social Sciences) or from the Scholarships Office with whom applications Bachelor of Commerce, if (i) the student fails to generally close in the third week of second semester. gain credit for at least half of his or her enrolment in any year, or (ii) in any two successive years 4. Bursaries: Bursaries are awarded on the combined of enrolment, the student fails to gain credit for grounds of financial need and academic merit and the equivalent of at least six semester courses. application may be made at any time to the Financial (2) In cases where the Faculty permits the Assistance Office (open Monday to Thursday from re-enrolment of a student whose progress has 9.30 am to 2.30 pm). been deemed unsatisfactory, the Faculty may 5. Grants-in-aid: These are offered by application place restrictions on the number and type of (closing date: 31 May each year) to postgraduate courses in which the student may re-enrol in students seeking assistance with travel or maintenance. that year and may require the completion of specified courses in a specified time, and if the 6. Postgraduate scholarships tenable at the University of student does not comply with these conditions Sydney: Prospective postgraduate students should the student may again be called upon to show consult the Scholarships Office in August/September good cause why he or she should be allowed to each year about AustralianPostgraduate Awards with re-enrol in the Faculty of Economics. stipend (closing date: mid October). Postgraduate travelling scholarships Prizes and scholarships Each year the University offers five or six travelling This handbook contains simplified details of some of scholarships with a closing date in November. the prizes and scholarships offered by the University. Generally, applicants need to have a first-class honours For full details you are advised to contact the degree approaching medal standard to be successful. Scholarships Office. Applications for the major travelling scholarships The scholarships and prizes may be scheduled as offered by external bodies generally close in August follows: or September. 1. Prizes awarded automatically on results: Successful All postgraduate scholarships are advertised in the students are notified of these by the Records Services Administrative Bulletin which is available in section. departments or from the Scholarships Office in the Holme Building. 2. Prizes awarded on application: Closing dates for these may be obtained from the Scholarships Office.
Value Title $ Qualifications Undergraduate Accountancy Placements Prize 250 Proficiency in Financial Statement Analysis Frank Albert (3) 50 Proficiency in first, second and third years Frank Albert (2) 60 Proficiency in Anthropology I and n Applied Statistics Prize 100 Proficiency in third year Econometrics Australian Institute of Political Science 50 Proficiency in first year Government Prize in First Year Government Australian Society of Certified 500 each Proficiency in Accounting IB, Financial Practising Accountants (N.S.W. Accounting A and Management Division) (3) Accounting B Australian Transport Officers' 100 Proficiency in second year Industrial Federation Prize in Industrial Relations Relations Sir Alexander Beattie Prize in 100 Proficiency in elective "The Historical Industrial Relations Development of Industrial Relations' Mary Beddie Scholarships (2) 75 and Best women candidates in second and third 150 year Economic History — must proceed to next year in Economic History Frank Bell Memorial . 50 Most outstanding Anthropology student of the year Sir Hermann Black Prize 150 Proficiency in first, second and third year Economic History Michael Casper Blad Memorial Prize 175 Proficiency in Economic Theory in Economics III Honours Emeritus Professor F.A. Bland 30 Best student in third year Government Dr Mary Booth Scholarship 1250 Most proficient woman student in first and second year Economics Value Title $ Qualifications R.L. Bowra Prize 500 Proficiency in third year Commercial Law over 2 semesters G.S. Caird Scholarship 650 Proficiency in second year Economics G.S. Caird Scholarship 650 Proficiency in third year Government proceeding to fourth year Chamber of Commerce 200 Best student at graduation who specialised in commercial subjects Commonwealth Bank Officers' 50 Most outstanding student in first year Association Prize in Industrial Industrial Relations Relations Commonwealth Bank Scholarships 225 Students proceeding to fourth year Coopers and Lybrand Prize in 400 Most distinguished in three-year Accounting Accounting sequence Corporate Affairs Commission 100 Greatest proficiency in Company Law in the Department of Accounting Donald George Crew Memorial 20 Proficiency in Economics III Donald George Crew Memorial Prize 35 Most proficient student in third year who is an for Officers of Commonwealth officer of the Commonwealth Bank or Banking Corporation and of Reserve the Reserve Bank of Australia Bank of Australia Crooks Michell Peacock Stewart 250 Most proficient student in third year Pty Ltd Operations Research in the Department of Econometrics C.S. First Boston Australia Limited 2000 Excellence in Finance entering fourth year Scholarship Geoffrey Dale 30 Proficiency in third year Economic Research Society 30 Proficiency in first year Economics Economic Society of Australia Prize 200 plus Most outstanding student in Economics final in Economics sub. honours year Economics Graduates' Association (2) 20 Awarded at graduation for proficiency throughout the course ESSO Scholarship in Accounting 500 Excellence in Accounting Evening Students' Association 15 Proficiency in Economics III by part-time student Federated Ironworkers' Association 200 Proficiency in Industrial Relations John Kenneth Galbraith 50 Best candidate in Economics II(P) ICCH Prize 1000 Proficiency in Investments Industrial Relations Society of N.S.W. 100 Proficiency in third year Industrial Relations Prize Ivo Whiston Kerr Memorial 40 Best essays in first year Accounting KPMG Peat Marwick (3) 250 Proficiency in Auditing, Investments and Commercial Law HIA A.M. Magoffin Memorial 100 Best student in third year Commercial Law who has completed or proceeds to third year Accounting Gunnar Myrdal 50 Best student in Economics IV(P) Arthur Oakes Memorial 500 Best student in History of Economic Thought Public Service Association of N.S.W. 250 Proficiency in second year Government Pass, — John S. D'Arcy Memorial (4) second year Government Honours, third year Government Pass and third year Government Honours G.C. Remington 250 Most outstanding student in Government in any year Joan Robinson 50 Best candidate in third year Economics option Tost-Keynesian Economics' Randolph G. Rouse 40 Awarded at graduation to most proficient fourth year student in Economics R.S.G. Rutherford (2) 50 Proficiency in second and third year Econometrics Seamen's Union of Australia Eliot V. 125 Proficiency in elective 'The Sociology of Elliott Prize in Industrial Relations Industry and Labour' Value Title $ Qualifications Shell Prize 200 Awarded at graduation to most proficient student in Government Statistical Society of Australia 50 + Awarded at graduation to final year (N.S.W. Branch) membership Econometrics student for proficiency (1 year) throughout course Paul Sweezy 50 Best student in Economics III(P) Universities Credit Union Prize (5) 100 Proficiency in first year Accounting and Commercial Law; Economics III Honours; final honours year course Finance in Economics; Financial Markets and Intermediaries; and Monetary Economics E.L. Wheelwright Prize 50 Proficiency in Economics I (Social Sciences) Postgraduate R.J. Chambers PhD Scholarship in 20 000 PhD candidate in Accounting Accounting Walter Noel Gillies Prize 1000 Most meritorious MEc thesis
Societies Events are detailed in the Society's Newsletter, Sydney University Economics Society DOLLAR$ and Sense. All undergraduate students enrolled in the Faculty of Activities are always well attended and Economics are members of ECOSOC. participation in running the Society is encouraged The Society is responsible for making students' from all years. A committee of students is elected lives outside of lectures and tutorials more fun and yearly to coordinate the activities of the Society. exciting through a host of different events. The Society creates the annual ball, holds a welcoming bar party, Sydney University Economics Graduates' produces a newsletter (Merewether 90210), organises Association jerseys and debating, has heaps of barbecues and This association seeks to maintain contact between industry representatives to speak, holds a careers graduates and the faculty on the one hand, and between evening, a champagne breakfast with a famous guest graduates themselves on the other. It does this by and provides teams for the interfaculty sport means of social functions during the year and by the competitions. The Society also produces the Economics promotion of talks to graduates by notable people in Revue — a musical, theatrical and humorous the field of economics and allied subjects and other extravaganza, held at the Footbridge Theatre to activities. The President of the Sydney University showcase the extracurricular talents of all the Society's Economics Society is an ex officio member of the USEG A members. council. Graduates wishing to join should get in touch The Society is also responsible for promoting staff with Mr Tom Togher, the Convenor of the Membership and student communication and putting forward the Committee, USEGA, Commonwealth Banking student point of view through faculty meetings and Corporation, GPO Box 2719, Sydney 2001. departmental committees. Formoreinformationabout getting involved or faculty events, students should Economic Society of Australia (N.S.W. Branch) have a look at the noticeboards in Ecoeats, the Student Students are eligible for membership of the Economic Common Room and coffee shop, or drop in to the Society of Australia at a concessional rate through the office, Room 250 of the Merewether Building. New South Wales Branch. The branch's financial year commences on 1 April and a special student Sydney University Accounting Society membership rate is offered. The Sydney University Accounting Society caters for Membership forms and information about the the specific academic, vocational and social needs of Society are available from the Honorary Secretary, accounting students. Every student who takes any Economic Society of Australia (N.S.W. Branch), PO accounting subjects is automatically a member at no Box 211, Mosman 2088. cost. Members receive the Society's journal The Economic The Society holds numerous activities such as an Record, which is published four times a year, Economic annual employer-student cocktail party where Papers (three or four times a year), monthly students are able to meet potential employers in a monographs on current topics, and advice of recently relaxed atmosphere; the Grand Ball, a highlight on the published books. They may also subscribe at University's social calendar; and a harbour cruise and concessional rates to The Australian Quarterly, The regular BBQs. The Society also runs functions such as Australian Economic Review, and Economic Analysis and interview techniques workshops, foreign exchange Policy. dealing room tours and career talks through the year. Initial enquiries about student membership of the Society may be directed to members of staff of the Australian Agricultural Economics Society Department of Economics or the Administrative The Secretary of the N.S.W. Branchis Mr Stuart Harris, Officer, Mr Peter Clarke. Raw Sugar Marketing, CSR Limited, PO Box 934, North Sydney, N.S.W. 2059. Meetings are held Royal Institute of Public Administration regularly throughout the year. A special student Australia (N.S.W. Division) subscription includes subscription to the Society's Students may join for a special subscription. The publications, The Australian Journal of Agricultural Institute holds monthly meetings and periodic Economics and The Review of Marketing and Agricultural conferences. Its members include public servants, Economics. university teachers and others interested in public admirastrauon.ItpubHshesajourral,A«sfraZwn/ournaZ AIESEC (The International Association of of Public Administration, four times a year. The address Economics and Management Students) is Box 904, GPO, Sydney 2001. AIESEC is the largest non-profit, non-religious, non- political student organisation in the world. Its objectives include promoting understanding and Statistical Society of Australia (N.S.W. Branch) cooperation between the 67 member countries and The N.S.W. Branch offers student membership to all providing practical business experience for its students who are interested in joining and who include members. The objectives are achieved through an statistics in their degree. exchange program and a wide range of related The Society publishes The Australian Journal of activities. The exchange program gives students the Statistics three times a year, and members (including opportunity to supplement their academic training student members) receive the journal. Applications by working overseas short term (between 2 and 18 and requests for further information should be months). forwarded to the Honorary Secretary, Jennifer Kelly, AIESEC offers traineeships in the areas of AGB McNair, PO Box 507, North Sydney 2059. accounting, computing, economics, industrial rela tions, statistics, etc. Other activities of interest to Industrial Relations Society of N.S.W. students include business games, seminars, confer Full-time students may join for a special student ences, international congresses, as well as a receptions subscription. The Society brings together program (weekends away, sailing, skiingtrips, theatre representatives of top management, the trade unions, parties and international lunches). the government services, the professions and Generally AIESEC is an opportunity to have a lot of specialists in the various academic disciplines fun at University while gaining invaluable practical concerned with industrial relations. Meetings and experience, and with the prospects of working overseas weekend conventions are held and study groups before or after graduation. arranged. The Society publishes a periodical, The Journal of Industrial Relations. Enquiries should be addressed to the Honorary Secretary, GPO Box 4479, Libraries Sydney 2001. Note: See also the University of Sydney Library entry in the University of Sydney Diary.
Australian Human Resources Institute Wolstenholme Library The Institute is a professional association for The Wolstenholme Library is named after S.H. practitioners, consultants and academics working in Wolstenholme, a former member of the Faculty. It is human resources and related fields. Special on Level 1 of Merewether Building and the entrance is membership rates are available for students. Monthly near the Butlin Avenue/Darlington Road corner. It meetings with guest speakers are held in Sydney and supports the Fisher Library'sundergraduate collection the Western Suburbs, and special interest groups for courses in the Faculty of Economics and holds the meet on a regular basis. Members receive the quarterly research collections in accounting and industrial Asia Pacific Journal of Human Resources, HR Monthly, relations. and a monthly newsletter. Enquiries should be directed During the semester the library is open: to PO Box 508, Neutral Bay, N.S.W. 2089, tel. (02) Mondays 9 am to 5 pm 953 2900. Tuesdays 9 am to 7 pm Wednesdays 9 am to 7 pm Sydney University Pacioli Society Thursdays 9 am to 7 pm The object of the Society is to foster the discussion of Fridays 9 am to 5 pm. accounting and financial problems among members Times of opening during vacation are notified on of universities and the business and professional boards at the library entrance. community. Meetings are held three to four times a Information about the arrangement of materials in year. Topics of discussion are generally based on the library, borrowing procedures, the closed reserve issues that are of current interest to practising system for books in heavy demand, and rules accountants. All enquiries should be addressed to the governing its use, is available from the Wolstenholme Honorary Secretary, Ms Anja Morton, Department of Librarian, Mrs Gloria Muir, or her staff. Students are Accounting. There is a special subscription rate for encouraged to become familiar with the procedures of students which includes a subscription to Abacus. the library, and in particular to make full use of the catalogue, which is the key to its resources. A correct Research units bibliographical reference makes things easier for both Accounting Research Centre students and staff. The Accounting Research Centre is an adjunct of the Since it was first established the Wolstenholme Accounting Foundation of the University. The objects Library has received support from various sources: of the Centre are to enhance the reputation of the the Commonwealth Bank of Australia, the Bank of University of Sydney as a centre for excellence in New South Wales, the Walter and Eliza Hall Trust, the teaching and research in accounting and to provide Economic Society of Australia (N.S.W. Branch), the support formembersof the Departmentof Accounting. Australian Society of Certified Practising Accountants, The Centre provides financial and other support the Chamber of Commerce, the Public Accountants' for members of staff, visiting academics and students. Registration Board, and from the Sydney University Comprehensive files are kept of the annual reports of . Economics Graduates' Association. Of special Australian and overseas companies, and of assistance have been the regular annual donations by, professional pronouncements and other material from and gifts of books from, individual graduates. all major English-speaking countries. Papers and EMAR (the Economics Macintosh Access Room) is monographs on accounting and finance topics are a student-managed facility located in the published and marketed world-wide. Wolstenholme Library, and is available for word Regular research seminars are conducted at which processing on a once-a-year subscription basis. Details members of the Department of Accounting and visiting are posted on the noticeboard in the room. academics present research papers. The Centre The Dean welcomes suggestions about ways to sponsors the R.J. Chambers Research Lecture which was assist the Wolstenholme Library and, where given in 1994 by Professor Peter H. Knutson, The appropriate, gifts are acknowledged by the use of Wharton School, University of Pennsylvania. The bookplates. Centre also edits the twice-yearly journal Abacus. The Centre offers consulting services on a limited Map Library and confidential basis and has among its objectives The Map Library within the Department of Geography the achievement of a closer rapport with other sections in the Institute Building is open to all faculties and of the professional community that have research departments in the University. interests. The collection offers world coverage with 45 The Centre is administered by a Director, Professor topographic series produced by agencies within the A.T. Craswell. various countries, together with geological, regional, thematic and specialist maps. There are also a number of maps of historic interest. Atlases are held in the Geography Library close by. Research Institute for Asia and the Pacific Among the local holdings of the library are the The Institute, established in 1987, is principally Australian topographic series of 1:1 000 000,1:250 000, concerned with developing research and information and such sheets published of the inch-to-1-mile series, services on the region with a focus on human resource as well as maps produced by the Department of development. It plays a coordinating and facilitating Mines, the Forestry Commission, conservation and role in developing Asian studies in the Arts Faculty planning establishments, census departments, and and in related areas in the professional faculties. The most other map-producing agencies throughout Institute has five programs: research; resources and Australia. information; international relations; professional The Map Library, which contains 80 000 maps, is training; seminars and outreach. Its core program is in open from 8.30 am to 4.30 pm on weekdays. Its developing and delivering training programs for comprehensive collection of wall maps is available for business and professionals working in Asia. It is the lecture use throughout the University. In other respects National Lead Institute for the APEC-HRD-BMN the library is for reference only, map identity being program for developing a regional business obtained from a visual index or catalogue. The map management network. custodian is the cartographer of the Department of It undertakes basic and applied research and Geography. publishes occasional papers. It has research links with institutions in the Asia- Pacific region, and through this network the Research Publications Institute facilitates the exchange of information, Abacus, a journal of accounting and business studies. research results and visits of eminent researchers and Editor: G.W. Dean. scholars. The program maximises the interaction Labour History, journal of the Australian Society for between academic research and business and the Study of Labour History. Editor: Terry Irving. professional groups. Seminars, talks, lectures, Associate Editors: Barbara Dale and Greg Patmore. symposia and conferences are sponsored and supported by the Research Institute. Who Audits Australia? Editor: A.T. Craswell. In 1988 the Centre for Asian Studies was Journal of Political Economy. Editors: Frank Stilwell, incorporated into the Institute. Gavan Butler, Dick Bryan, Evan Jones, Peter Kell and For further information contact the Acting Director, Stuart Rosewarne. Dr Pamela Gutman, tel. (02) 351 3822. Australian Centre for Industrial Relations microeconomic analysis to policy issues, especially Research and Teaching (ACIRRT) those issues currently identified by the term ACIRRT was established in 1989 as an Australian 'microeconomic reform'. The Centre undertakes Research Council National Key Centre for research research and teaching, and is involved in external and teaching. The role of ACIRRT is to promote and activities such as participation in public discussion of assist the development of excellence in industrial policy issues and consulting work. relations education and research in Australia. The The Centre is building a collection of annual reports focus of the Centre's research and teaching is the and other documents of public sector authorities and study of industrial relations processes and outcomes corporations, especially for N.S.W. and Australian at the workplace. Integral to this is an examination of government instrumentalities. The first Director is the wider institutional, economic and social structures Professor Gordon Mills (on secondment from the as they impact on the workplace. Department of Economics). His personal interests ACIRRT fulfils this role through internally include enterprise pricing and investment policies, generated research, seminars and conference programs and he has particular experience of transport policy. as well as commissioned research. The Centre's The Centre seeks to assiststudents withspecialinterests services are used by public and private sector in its field. For further information, tel. (02) 351 3744. organisations, employer associations and unions. ACIRRT's principal research objective is to provide a comprehensive analysis of the long-term Public Affairs Research Centre (PARC) restructuring of Australia's industrial and labour The Public Affairs Research Centre is part of the relations. The Centre has also been commissioned to research projects on the process of labour adjustment Department of Government and Public Adminis at the firm level, the incidence and operation of tration. The Centre is an applied research facility incentive payment systems, industrial relations in offering its expertise to public and private small business, workplace bargaining in Australia, organisations in the conduct of impartial survey evaluating the Training Guarantee, prospects for research projects, consultancies and evaluations. It enterprise bargaining in workplaces with a significant produces studies of a high standard and offers a non-English speaking workforce, enterprise unique service to the community. The Centre draws bargaining and occupational health and safety issues, on a wide range of academic and technical expertise, and an evaluation of the Pilot Australian Vocational in both quantitative and qualitative research and in Certificates for DEET. specific subject knowledge. It provides assistance to The Centre is also involved in a range of international undergraduate and postgraduate students and staff research activities. For example, it was commissioned in various aspects of their research. Enquiries should by the International Labour Organisation (ILO) to be made to tel. (02) 351 2054. prepare a report on the impact of labour relations on Projects have been undertaken by the Centre for, productivity in the Australian coal-mining industry. among others, the University of Sydney Centre for The Centre is also the Australian Coordinator for the Teaching and Learning (on behalf of the Faculty of ILO's Asian Pacific network of labour studies institutes. Medicine); the Department of Geography (on behalf The Centre's education program is designed to of the Blacktown Migrant Resource Centre); ABC-TV; complement and extend existing programs by theN.S.W.Departmentof Education; Arthur Andersen exploring new options in education and training. A Consulting; the Trades Practices Commission and major education initiative is the establishment of various State Government departments and courses in Trade Union Administration funded by the authorities and universities for the 1990 ODEOPE N.S.W. Education and Training Foundation. This is EEO Survey. modular-based and will soon become available by distance education. The Centre undertakes a range of activities for The Centre for the Study of the History of graduates and practitioners working in industrial Economic Thought relations. These include briefings on current The Centre was established in 1989 to promote study developments and short courses in new skills. The objective is to pass on information and skills held by and research in the history of economics both within University staff to a wider audience who can then the University and outside its framework, and to draw on these ideas in their own work. ACIRRT has arrange lectures by distinguished visiting scholars in also developed Australia's most comprehensive the field, hold seminars and organise workshops in database on enterprise agreements, the Agreements relevant fields, participate and arrange conferences Database and Monitor (ADAM). In addition to a on the history of economic thought and more widely quarterly report to subscribers, a fee for service facility the history of political and social thought, publish is available for specific information requests on reprints of economic classics including Australian provisions in agreements. economic classics and other work on the history of The Director of the Centre is Associate Professor economic thought, encourage postgraduate studies, Ron Callus. For further information, tel. (02) 519 9400. and provide research facilities and accumulate research material on the history of economic thought. Centre for Microeconomic Policy Analysis The Director of the Centre is Professor Peter Established in 1990, the role of the Centre is to promote Groenewegen of the Department of Economics, tel. interest and develop expertise in the application of (02) 351 3074. Securities Industry Research Centre of Asia may undertake the program leading to associate Pacific (SIRCA) membership and Certified Practising Accountant SIRCA involves a strategic alliance between research (CPA) status. personnel (academics, graduates and others) from five Australian universities, the Australian Stock Institute of Corporate Managers, Secretaries Exchange, the Sydney Futures Exchange and the and Administrators Australian Financial Markets Association. The The Institute of Corporate Managers, Secretaries and objective of the Centre is to develop and market the Administrators is the professional association for combined intellectual capital of universities, industry 10 000 company secretaries and corporate managers and government on any issue associated with the around Australia. development of financial markets. The proposed The Institute accredits units both at undergraduate outcome is the enhancement of both the regional and and postgraduate level by which you can satisfy its international competitiveness of these marketplaces academic requirements for membership. For further and the businesses which make use of them, by information, please contact Chris McRostie, the promoting the world's best financial practice. Through Institute's New South Wales Branch Manager, on (02) this process, SIRCA is developing a regional centre for 223 5666. He can also advise you about how to become capital markets research to complement existing a student member during your studies and a regional centres in Europe (London) and the United provisional associate following graduation. States (Chicago and New York). SIRCA provides PhD scholarships and supplements Bankers Institute of Australasia: grants exemptions to SIRCA research fellows undertaking higher degrees. from six of its examination subjects to graduates who It has also acquired and maintained a number of large have passed courses currently offered in Economics I, elective databases on a number of Australian security Commercial Law and the Accounting sequence. markets and is continually adding to these databases which are the basis for the security market research Taxation Institute of Australia: willadmitasmembers that SIRCA undertakes. SIRCA also supports security graduates who have passed the Accounting and market research undertaken by members of the Commercial Law sequences including Taxation Law. Department of Finance. The Executive Director of SIRCA is Associate Professor Michael Aitken of the Securities Institute of Australia: admits graduates Department of Finance (tel. (02) 660 8799). as affiliates. The information above is summarised from details Professional organisations supplied by the examining bodies mentioned. Itshould Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia: not be relied upon as a complete statement. In grants exemption from all but its professional year particular, certain of the exemptions mentioned examinations to graduates who have completed the operate only from specified dates. In all cases enquiries appropriate accounting and commercial law subjects. and applications for exemption should be directed to Applicants to the Institute for exemption and for the examining bodies concerned, not to the Faculty of examination must, at the time of application and Economics. examination, be in the service of a chartered accountant Students seeking a signed record of courses passed in public practice or in an accredited PY in commerce at the University of Sydney for presentation to any of organisation. these organisations should consult the Student Centre in the Madsen Building. Chartered Accountants Students' Society All accounting students can be associated with the above Institute (ICAA) by becoming members of the Chartered Accountants Students' Society (CASS). Members of CASS receive a number of services including one volume of the Accounting and Auditing Handbook, subscription to the Institute's journal Charter, access to the Institute's libraries and discounts on bookshop purchases, invitations to attend professional development courses and young member social and sporting functions, and a regular CASS newsletter. For further information and an application form for CASS, please contact the Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia, 37 York Street, Sydney (tel. 290 1344).
Australian Society of Certified Practising Accountants: admits graduates to provisional membership. Those who have completed the appropriate accounting and commercial law subjects
Symbols may have been used in the courses of study Frequency chapter in the handbook as a succinct way of presenting /wk per week teaching and assessment information. Because of the /fn per fortnight varied nature of the work described and occasional /sem per semester difficulties in interpretation and typesetting, such /yr per year. details are not construed as a firm undertaking. Students are advised to check details with the Examples departments concerned. The significance of symbols Classes used is as follows: Sem 1:1 class/wk one class work session each Hypothetical examples of symbols used . week during Semester 1 Yr: (2 lec & 3 tut/ two lectures and three Double Dutch 1 Title of course prac)/wk tutorialsorpracticalsweekly, Assoc. Prof. Holland, Actual lecturers throughout the year Dr Nederlands Sem 2: 3 lec/wk & three lectures per week and Allied studies AKn HSC German 1 tut/fn one tutorial per fortnight, Class contact & during Semester 2 course duration Classes Yr: (3 lec & 1 tut)/wk Exams, essays, etc. Assessment one 3hr exam, two Assessment 2000w essays/sem, 4 tut papers/sem one 3hr exam one 3-hour exam two 3hr exams/sem two 3-hour exams per semester Title of course 8766 Star Wars 5 one 2000w essay one 2000-word essay Actual lecturers Dr Lazer, Ms Gunn one 3000w essay, one 3000-word essay for Allied studies Prereq 7653 Corea Intro. Media two 2000w the course, two 2000- Manipulation essays/sem, 4 word essays per semester Class contact & Classes Sem 1: (2 lec & 3 tut/ tut papers and four tutorial papers for course duration prac)/wk; the course Sem 2: (2 lec & 2 tut/prac) /wk (one 3000w & one 3000- and two 2000- Exams, essays, etc. Assessment one 3hr exam/ sem, two 2000w word essays per semester classwork essays)/sem
Allied studies AKn assumed knowledge Prereq prerequisite (you must have passed the indicated prerequisite before you start the course) Coreq corequisite (you must enrol in this course at the same time unless you have already passed it)
Type of class contact/assessment class .*. class contact of any form lab laboratory lec lecture prac practical tut tutorial exam examination tut paper tutorial paper
Duration hr hour Sem 1 Semester 1 Sem 2 Semester 2 Yr throughout the year Buildings, departments and operations (main campus)
13G Accommodation Service A35 17E Clock Tower A14 1ST Joinery G12 7D Round House Bll 16S Accounting H51 17L Computer Science, Basser Dept F09 12F Koori Centre A22 23P Russell, Peter Nicol, Building J02 166 Admin. Policy & Strategic Planning Division A14 12A Continuing Education KOI 13F Language Centre A19 16K SAUT F12 17D Admin. Support Services Division A14 9K Coppleson Postgrad. Med. Inst. D02 17E Latin A14 5P St Andrew's College 2 17D Admissions A14 13G Counselling Service, University A35 13G Learning Assistance Centre A35 3H St John's College 3 26N Aeronautical Engineering J07 14C Credit Union A09 16K Linguistics F12 21M St Michael's College lie Agricultural Annexe A07 12E Crop Sciences A20 250 Link Building J13 12N St Paul's College 4 IOC Agricultural Chemistry & Soil Science A03 11C Agricultural Entomology A04 12A Mackie Building KOI IF Sancta Sophia College 5 11C Agricultural Economics A04 11C Agricultural Genetics & Plant Breeding A04 16F MacLaurin Hall A14 4C Sand roll shed B04 11C Agricultural Glasshouses A06 12E Agronomy A20 16C Macleay Building A12 19L Science Faculty Office F07 11C Agriculture Faculty Office A05 IOC Biometry A03 16C Macleay Museum A12 14E Security A19 23N Alma Street Glasshouse G07 12E Horticulture A20 7C McMaster Laboratory CSIRO B02 12A Selle House K02 170 Alumni Relations FIB 11C Plant Pathology A04 11C ' McMillan, J.R.A., Building A05 18E Semitic Studies A14 17H Anderson Stuart Building F13 -7C CSIRO McMaster Laboratory B02 17L Madsen Building F09 18E Senate Room A14 17H Anatomy & Histology F13 7E —, Annexe B14 15C Mail Room (Internal) All 21T Services Building G12 7E Animal Science B19 22B Dental H. Educ. & Res. Fndn K03 17E Main Building A14 25M Seymour Thea tre Centre J09 16F Anthropology A14 16K Dentistry Faculty Office A27 14G Manning House A23 5D Sheep Building & Pens B07 16S ANZAAS H44 18Q Econometrics H04 13A Margaret Telfer Building K07 17H Shellshear Museum F13 16F Archaeology, Classics & Ancient History A14 18Q Economic History H04 16K Mathematics Learning Centre F12 21S Shepherd Centre G10 22M Architectural & Design Science G04 18P Economics H04 19L Mathematics & Statistics F07 27M Shepherd St Parking Station J10 22M Architecture, Dept & Faculty Office G04 18P Economics Faculty Office H04 26N Median. & Aero. Eng Bdg J07 16H Social Work A26 20G Archives F04 19J Edgeworth David Building F05 250 Mechanical Engineering J07 Sports 20N Art Workshop G03 13G Education A35 15K Medicine Faculty Office A27 20R Noel Martin Recreation Centre, Darlington G09 16E Arts Faculty Office A14 15K Edward Ford Building A27 8L Med.,Paraclinical & Clinical D06 12H Sports Centre Western Ave A30 14F Asian Studies A18 24P Electrical Engineering J03 17H Medicine, Preclinical F13 7F Sports Union D08 170 Attendant's Lodge F18 17L Electron Microscope Unit F09 18P Merewether Building H04 7F Ward, H.K., Gymnasium DOS 14D Badham Building & Library A16 23Q Engineering Faculty Office J02 20P Microbiology G08 20J Stephen Roberts Theatre F06 Banks 24S Engineering Workshop J06 16H Mills, R.C., Building A26 8D Stewart, J.D., Building B01 19N Advance G01 12E English A20 14Q Moore Theological College 1 17L Student Centre F09 13C Commonwealth A09 16S Equal Employment Opportunity H47 15F Mungo MacCallum Building A17 19N SRC G01 19N Commonwealth G01 6D Evelyn Williams Building BIO 17S Museum Studies H36- 21T Supply Department G12 15D National Australia-A15 8L Experimental Medicine D06 24M Music J09 JU8S SUPRA H28 19N National Australia G01 17D External Relations Division A14 16F Nicholson Museum A14 8L Surgery D06 22D Baxter's Lodge F02 17D Financial Services Division A14 10K Obstetrics & Gynaecology D02 ZOR Swimming Pool G09 8L Behav. Sciences in Medicine D06 16H Fine Arts A26 17S Ocean Sciences Institute H34 20D Tennis pav. & women's courts FOI 20P Biochemistry G08 20F Fisher Library F03 15C Old Geology Building All 14E Traffic Office A19 . 12C Biological Sciences, Zoology A08 14C Footbridge Theatre A09 220 Old School Building G15 16K Transient Building F12 16C Biological Science, Botany A12 14E Found Property A19 12F Old Teachers' College Building A22 19N Union, University of Sydney G01 8L Blackburn Building D06 14F French Studies A18 8L Pathology & Path Museum D06 15F University of Sydney Club A17 16K Bookshop F12 21T Garage, University G13 12E Performance Studies A20 22M Urban & Regional Planning G04 8L Bookshop, Medical D06 17Q Geography H03 13A Personnel Services K07 8D Vet. Anatomy B01 19N Bookshop SRC Secondhand G01 19J Geology & Geophysics F05 8L Pharmacology D06 6D Vet. Clinic, hospital, surgery BIO BM Bosch Building D05 14F Germanic Studies A18 ISD Pharmacy A15 6D Vet. Clinical Sciences BIO 9M Bosch Lecture Theatres D04 18Q Govt & Public Admin H04 17F Philosophy A14 7D Vet. Operating theatre & animal house B13 16C Botany A12 8K Grandstand No. 1 Oval D01 16K Phonetics Laboratory F12 7D Vet. Pathology B12 14F Brennan, C, Building A18 18D Great Hall A14 21T Photography G12 7E Vet. Physiology B19 17H Burkitt Library F13 17E Greek—Ancient A14 13K Physics A28 8D Vet. Science, Faculty Office B01 17E Business Liaison Office A14 13F Greek—ModernA19 17H Physiology F13 16E Vice-Chancellor A14 12A Careers & Appts Service KOI 13F Griffith Taylor Building A19 10K Postgraduate C'ttee in Medicine D02 11D Wallace Theatre A21 6C Caretaker's Cottage (Vet. area) B03 7E Gunn, R.M.C., Building B19 15D Post Office A15 17D War Memorial Gallery A14 19L Carslaw Building F07 Health Service, University' 16R Press Building H02 2SO Warren Centre for Adv. Engin. J07 16D Cashier A14 13C Holme Building A09 21T Printing Service G12 UC Watt, R.D., Building A04 15E Celtic Studies A17 19N Wentworth Building G01 16E Professorial Board Room A14 17L Welfare Association F09 21S Central Stores G12 1SF History A17 13A Properties Office K07 19N Wentworth Building G01 19L Centre for Teach & Learning F07 17K History & Philosophy of Science Fll 6H Psychiatry D06 11L Wesley College 6 17D Chancellor's Committee Shop A14 13C Holme Building A09 15F Psychology A17 8N Western AvenueUnderground Parking Station D07 10G Chaplains, University Dll 5D Horse Stables B09 11D. Publications A20 16E Western Tower A14 23Q Chemical Engineering J01 20P Human Nutrition Unit G08 15K Public Health A27 22M Wilkinson Building G04 21S Chemical Store Gil 17Q Industrial Relations H03 17E Quadrangle A14 17H Wilson (Anatomy) Museum F13 17K Chemistry Fll 8L Infectious Diseases D06 10K Queen Elizabeth II Res. Inst. D02 Women's College 7 Child Care 19U Information Services HOB 16D Records A14 12noH Women's Sports Association 17U Boundary Lane 17Q Institute Building H03 15R Regiment, University HOI 16S Women's Studies Centre H53 9R Carillon Avenue 17Q Internal Auditor H03 13 F Religion, School of Studies in A19 12E Woolley Building A20 14A Laurel Tree House (Glebe) K05 13D International Education Office K07 17S Research Institute for Asia & the Pacific H40 17D Yeoman Bedell A14 21S Union (Darlington) G10 23L International House G06 18S Risk Management H31 12C Zoology A08 24R Civil Engineering J05 4D Isolation Block—large animal bull pen B05 2SP Rose Street Building J04 17T Clark Building H12 16H Italian Studies A26 IOC Ross Street Building A03